Home

SAN Management Software User Manual

1. 164 Showing Routes Between Two End Products 165 Hiding Routes Between Two End Products 166 Viewing Properties of Routes Between Two End Products 166 Changing a Fabric s PropertieS 00 e eee 166 Configuring Nicknames 0 0 e eee eee 167 Viewing Nicknames 0000 eee eee eee eee 167 Searching by Nickname 0 0c cece eee eee 168 Searching by WWN 00 cee eee 169 Assigning a Nickname to an Existing Device 170 Adding a Nickname to a New Device 000 170 Importing Nicknames 000 e eee eee eee 171 Importing FC Aliases into Nicknames 2 05 172 Exporting Nicknames 20 c ce eee eee eee eee 172 Removing a Nickname 0 0 e cece eee ee eee 173 Configuring Enterprise Fabric Mode 000ee eens 174 About Enterprise Fabric Mode 0000 cece eee 174 Setting Enterprise Fabric Mode 0000 eee eee 175 Configuring Fabric Binding 0 0 cee eee eee eee ee 176 Fabric Binding and Element Manager Switch Binding for Blade SWITCHES E04 oh SS hated cee ag tot sede he Seat Geechee Saad eta 177 Enabling Fabric Binding 0 0 0 cee eee eee 178 Disabling Fabric Binding 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 179 Adding Switches to the Fabric Binding Membership List 179 Adding Detached Devices to the Fabric Binding Membership List180 Removing Switches from Fab
2. 0 000 e eee eee eee 105 Adding a Property Field 000 cece eee eee 105 Editing a Property Field 2 0 0 0 e cece eee eee 105 Deleting a Property Field na nn naunan 020 e eee eee eee 106 Hiding a Property Field 0 02 c eee eee ee eee 106 Hiding All Empty Property FieldS 00055 107 Showing a Property Field 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 107 Showing All Property FieldS 000 0 eee ee eens 107 Showing Only Property Fields with Data 108 Exportand IMport 28 ese ake ek fa dala bk AEE Se 109 Exporting Data to Disk or E mail 000000 eee 109 Selecting an E Mail Address for Export 112 Defining Filters for Export 2 0 0 0 00 112 Exporting Data to a Database 000 eee eee 113 Importing Data 2 6 ia ee ee 116 Accessing Third Party ToolS 000 c eee eee eee 123 Adding a TOO encrier oiri eei oin e techs GA 123 Adding an Option to the Tools Menu 5 124 Changing an Option on the Tools Menu 125 Removing an Option from the Tools Menu 125 Adding an Option to a Device s Shortcut Menu 126 Changing an Option on a Device s Shortcut Menu 127 Removing an Option from a Device s Shortcut Menu 127 Launching a Telnet Session 000 eee eee 127 Launching an Element Manager 0e eee eeee 128 Launching Web Too
3. i leiriegiai SAN Router Generic Brocade Switch Director or Access Gateway g S F EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 ES 1000 Switch ED 5000 Director 243 C 244 In this Appendix TABLE 22 Product Icons Continued Icon Description Icon Description sm switen Blade Switch Asm Gy Bridge op Director QA FCIP Bridge or Gateway ap Host FCIP SSA oe Host Bus Adapter HBA t Hub D iSCSI Device ee iSCSI Bridge or Gatewa 3 e i iSCSI iSCSI 2 JBOD DISK os Loop P Network Attached Storage NAS l y Server Q Storage Tape Unknown EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 In this Appendix C Group Icons TABLE 23 Group Icons Icon Description Icon Description E Bridge Enclosure ke SS Fabric FCIP Bridge or Gateway FCIP Host iSCSI D BD p oa iScsl iSCSI Bridge or Gateway iSCSI Device amp 2 2 iScsl iscsl Isolated Loop s Ei lt SS mSAN Routed In FA Y ae Routed In Fabric z Routed In Router Fabric 2 SAN Router Storage amp Switch Tape Virtual Device a EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 245 C In this Appendix Product Status Icons TABLE 24 Product Status Icons Icon Status Z e i e a Healthy Operational Attention Degraded Marginal Device Added Device Removed Missing Down Failed Routed In Routed Out
4. 00000 c eee eee 199 Viewing Frame Sniffer Tests 0 00 eee eee eee 200 Adding a New Frame Sniffer Test 2 00005 201 Running a Frame Sniffer Test 00020 e eee 202 Stopping a Frame Sniffer Session 0000000 203 Editing a Frame Sniffer Test 0 00 0 c eee eee 204 Deleting a Frame Sniffer Test 0 0000 e ee eee 205 Deleting a Frame Sniffer Session 00000 eee 205 Refreshing the Frame Sniffer 0 002 ee eeee 206 Configuring the SNMP Agent 0 0c cece eee eee eee 207 Setting Up the SNMP Agent 00 0c eee eee eee 207 Turning On the SNMP Agent 000 eee eee eee eee 208 Turning Off the SNMP Agent 02 eee eee eee ee 208 Adding Trap Recipients 0 00 cece eee eee eee 209 Editing Trap Recipients ir ae cee eee eee eee 210 Changing the UDP Port 00 e eee eee 211 Removing Trap Recipients 00c eee eee eee 211 Adding Community Strings 0 0 00 cece eee 212 Editing Community Strings 0 0 cee eee 213 Removing Community StringS 0 0 0 2 eee eee eee 213 Changing the TCP IP Port for SNMP Trap Events 214 Chapter 6 Monitoring SAN Products lInthissCha pters aries Ataris Ao Av a ar E eet anata as 215 Event Monitori Ng oie cc ieened ee ied E Gad aa Pid ey 216 Viewing LOSS ses cea ee eet ee ia tiok eee eee eee 216 Clearing LOSS site sacar meid dew
5. Right click any storage port in the Device Tree and select Storage Port Mapping The Storage Port Mapping dialog box displays Select the storage array in the Storage Array list and click Properties The Properties dialog box appears In the Nickname field edit the storage array nickname if necessary In the Name field enter the storage array name In the Node WWN field enter the storage array node WWN In the Name in band field enter the storage array in band name In the Port Count field enter the storage array port count In the Port Count in band field enter the storage array in band port count In the Enclosure field enter an enclosure for the storage array In the IP Address field enter the IP address for the storage array In the Vendor field enter the vendor name for the storage array In the Vendor in band field enter the vendor name for the in band storage array In the Vendor ID in band field enter the vendor ID for the in band storage array In the Model field enter a model number for the storage array In the Model in band field enter a model number for the in band storage array In the Serial field enter a serial number for the storage array In the Serial in band field enter a serial number for the in band storage array In the Firmware field enter the firmware for the storage array In the Firmware in band field enter the firmware for the in band storage array
6. In the Operational Status field enter a status for the storage array In the Management Link field enter a management link for the storage array In the Location field enter a location for the storage array In the Contact field enter a contact name for the storage array In the Description field enter a description for the storage array In the Comments field enter any comments Click OK on the Properties dialog box to save the storage array properties Click OK on the Storage Port Mapping dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Storage Port Mapping 4 Deleting a Storage Array 1 To open the Storage Port Mapping dialog box choose from one of the following approaches Select a storage port icon in the topology view then select Discover gt Storage Port Mapping Right click any storage port icon in the topology view and select Storage Port Mapping Right click any storage port in the Device Tree and select Storage Port Mapping The Storage Port Mapping dialog box displays Select a Storage Array icon in the Storage Array list 3 Click Delete The selected Storage Array and all Storage Ports assigned to the array are removed from Storage Array list All Storage Ports assigned to the device are moved to the Storage Ports table 4 Click OK Viewing Storage Port Properties 1 To open the Storage Port Mapping dialog box choose from one of the following appr
7. The Tool Menu Items table displays all configured tools including the tool name as it displays on the Tools menu parameters and keystroke shortcuts In the Menu Text field type a label for the option as you want it to appear on the Tools menu Select the application from the Tool list or click Define if you want to specify a new tool For instructions refer to Adding a Tool on page 123 Optional In the Parameters field enter parameters such as a URL Optional In the Keystroke list select a keyboard shortcut Click Add The new tool displays in the Tool Menu Items table NOTE You must click Add before clicking OK otherwise the new menu option is not created 8 Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box The tool you configured now displays on the Tools menu 124 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Accessing Third Party Tools 3 Changing an Option on the Tools Menu You can edit parameters for third party tools that display on the Tools menu 1 Select Tools gt Setup The Setup Tools dialog box displays Click the Tools Menu tab The Tool Menu Items table displays all configured tools including the tool name as it displays on the Tools menu parameters and keystroke shortcuts In the Tool Menu Items table select the tool you want to edit The settings for the selected tool display in the fields at the top of the dialog box Edit the fields as desired Click Edit NO
8. On the Physical Map rest the pointer over a product icon port or connection The pop up window containing the product port or connection information displays EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Customizing Device Properties 3 Customizing Device Properties You can customize the device Properties dialog boxes to display only the data you need by adding deleting hiding hiding all empty or showing only property fields with data You can also edit property fields to change the label or description of the field Adding a Property Field You can add a new field to any of the tabs from the Properties dialog box NOTE Adding a property field is not available in the Planned SAN view 1 Right click any product icon and select Properties The Properties dialog box displays Select the tab to which you want to add a property 3 Right click on any label The new property label displays above the one you select 4 Select Add The Add Property dialog box displays Type a label and description for the property From the Type list select the property type if available From the Icon list select an icon to display in the column Click OK OO dank D Or The new property displays Editing a Property Field You can edit any fields on any of the tabs from the Properties dialog box NOTE Not available in the Planned SAN view 1 Right click any product icon and select Properties The Properties dialog box displ
9. Resolution Verify the following conditions have been met Check the discovery setup Verify that discovery is not still in progress Verify that the management application is installed in the appropriate path Verify that the device you ve selected is a supported device configuration Verify that the device is on line Verify that the management server is running Communication with the storage management application failed Verify the following conditions have been met Verify that the device is on line Verify that the management server is running LUN Management actions failed EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Verify the following conditions have been met Verify that the device is on line Verify that the management server is running Verify that the Client is communicating with the Server Verify that a green Server connection indicator displays on the status bar Verify that the LUN data configuration was not changed while the dialog box was open 233 A In this Appendix Problems with Products Problem Adding a port to a storage array also adds all ports associated with its discov ered node Resolution Check all associated ports to determine if they should be added to the storage array Cannot disable Fabric Bind ing while Enterprise Fabric Mode is active You may have attempted to disable Fabric Binding through the Fabric Binding dia log box whil
10. Same as No Privilege Read Write Enables the Export Clear Show and Hide com mands for the master log and individual logs Enables the commands on the master log right click menu except possibly the Export com mand Note that the Export com mand on the master log is dependent on both this privilege and the Export privilege because this command opens the Export Discovered SAN dialog box Enables all functions in the individual logs Map Editing Recommend Remove Map Loop to Hub Allows you to identify the discovered hub that is replacing or can replace a loop icon in the Connec tivity Map Disables the Map to Hub command in the Discover menu and on loop icons Same as No Privilege Enables all Map to Hub functions Map Port to Storage Allows you to construct multi port storage sys tems out of individual storage ports 276 Disables the Storage Port Mapping command from Discover menu and right click menus for Stor age products and ports in the tree and map Enables the Storage Port Mapping command from Discover menu right click menus for Storage prod ucts and ports in the tree and map Allows you to open the Storage Port Mapping dia log box however disables the Create Delete right and left arrow and OK buttons Enables the Storage Port Mapping command from Discover menu and right click menus for Stor age products and ports in the tree and map Enables all funct
11. on page 13 Open the SAN Management application and complete the configuration Stop the Backup Services a Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services The Services dialog box displays b Right click EFCM 9 7 Backup and select Stop Change the directory to lt nstall_Home gt bin Double click restore bat A DOS window opens EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 10 11 Backing Up and Restoring Data 1 At the Command Prompt enter the path to the backup source directory and press Enter The default is D Backup At the Command Prompt enter the path to the destination directory and press Enter The default is lt nstall_Home gt EFCM 9 7 When you receive the Restore completed message press any key to close the DOS window Restart the SAN Management application Log back into the application Make sure discovery is turned on If it is not select Discover gt On Restoring Data from the Hard Drive 1 Reinstall the application For step by step instructions about installing the application refer to Installing the Application on page 13 2 Open the SAN Management application and complete the configuration 3 Stop the Backup Services a Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services The Services dialog box displays b Right click EFCM 9 7 Backup and select Stop 4 Change the directory to lt nstall_Hom
12. Keyboard Shortcut CTRL U Zoom In CTRL NumPad Zoom Out CTRL NumPad EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Appendix D Configuring EFCM Through a Firewall In this Appendix This appendix provides optional procedures for configuring your SAN Management Client and Server applications to function across remote networks through a firewall Polling CHENE FUNCTION riesis aeien EErEE ERARE 250 Configuring TCP Port Numbers to Allow Firewall Access EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 249 D In this Appendix Polling Client Function In some cases a network may use virtual private network VPN or firewall technology which can prohibit communication between a Server and the Client In other words a Client can find a Server appear to log in but is immediately logged out because the Server cannot reach the Client s remote object To resolve this issue the SAN Management application automatically detects the network configuration and runs the Client in polling mode when necessary When the Client is not running in polling mode the Server calls the Client s remote object whenever it has new data When the Client is running in polling mode the Server queues up the data and the Client s remote object periodically approximately every 5 or 10 seconds checks in and gets the data Thus the original two way communication is transformed into one way communication al
13. Product List Set to only display basic property list To reset EFCM to the default EFCM display and view settings complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays 2 Inthe Category list select Reset Display Click Reset Display 4 Click Yes on the reset confirmation message The display and view settings are immediately reset to the default EFCM classic display settings as detailed in the EFCM Classic Display Settings table 5 Click Apply or OK to save your work EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 3 83 84 3 Configuration Options Configuring Software Settings The SAN Management application allows you to configure the following software settings Client Export Port Configure a port for communication between the client and server Element Management Configure the element management method IP Configuration Configure the Ethernet ports LogData Archive Master log data Memory Allocation Configure memory allocation for the client and server Server Connection Configure client server connectivity settings SNMP Discovery Configure the SNMP timeout and retry settings SNMP Trap Listening Configure the SNMP Trap port Support Mode Configure support settings to allow enhanced diagnostics Configuring Client Export Port Settings To configure client export port settings complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Option
14. The Advanced Event Filtering dialog box displays 4 Select the event type you want to remove from the Event Type drop down list All event types are listed in alphabetical order 5 Enter all or part of the event type description text in the Description Contains text box up to 40 characters This text should be the same text that displayed in the Description field for the events that displayed on the Master Log 6 Click the right arrow button to move the event type to the Additional Filters Filter out these Events table 7 Click OK The Define Filter dialog box displays 8 Click OK to close Define Filter dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 93 53 1000663 03 3 Managing User Groups Managing User Groups This section provides an overview of user groups and describes how to configure and manage user groups e Creating a User Group 2 ee ee eee 94 Editing a User Group tara aaa eit a a Mien a T aa anwar a eas 96 Removing a User Group 0 ee teens 97 e Assigning Users to GrOUPS 6 cece eee 98 e Removing a User from a Group 6 eee 99 Finding a Users GroupS 6 0 cece eee 99 Creating a User Group NOTE You must be a System Administrator or Security Administrator to perform this task You can create a user group and specify access to certain features or views in the application enhancing the security of your SAN 1 Select SAN gt Users The EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box displays Fig
15. The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select Backup Select the Enable backups check box 3 In the Next Backup Start Time Hours and Minutes fields enter the time using a 24 hour clock you want the backup process to begin Select an interval from the Backup Interval list to set how often backup occurs In the Output Directory field enter the path for the backup directory NOTE If you set your backup directory to a network drive you must specify the directory in a share format for example server share You must also supply user credentials for a user that is authorized to write to the network device You can change the directory or use the Browse button to select another directory EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 79 3 80 Configuration Options 7 8 Set the Network Drive Credentials if necessary a Inthe Domain or Workgroup field enter the domain or workgroup name b Inthe User Name field enter the user name c Inthe Password field enter the password Click Apply or OK to save your work The application verifies that the backup device exists and that the server can write to it If the device does not exist or is not writable an error message displays that says you have entered an invalid device Click OK to go back to the Options dialog box and fix the error Backup occurs if needed at the interval you specified Configuring End Node Display To di
16. displays in the Action column of the Sniffer Tests table for the selected tests To undo this action select the tests and click Clear Action The tests are not run and the Action column of the Sniffer Tests table displays blank 6 Click Apply The Server notifies the switch port to set up the template registers and start monitoring In the Sniffer Tests table Running displays in the Action column for the selected tests Also a new session displays under each running test Once the session is finished an ending time displays in the session s Finish Time column 7 Click OK 202 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Frame Sniffer 5 Stopping a Frame Sniffer Session NOTE Frame Sniffer procedures should only be performed by advanced users and are only available with M Model manageable switches running M EOS 5 0 or higher For a list of manageable devices refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 To stop running sessions follow these instructions 1 Select Monitor gt Frame Sniffer The Frame Sniffer dialog box displays 2 Inthe Sniffer Tests table select the running sessions you want to stop Press CTRL and click to make multiple selections 3 Click Stop The sessions are queued to stop and Stop displays in the Action column of the Sniffer Tests table for the selected sessions To undo this action select the sessions and click Clear Action The tests are not run and the Action c
17. e All reports generated e Application configuration data e Backup configuration e Call home configuration including phone numbers and dialing options Note that call home information may be different depending on which call home centers you use e Call home Enabled status of each call home center e Call home mapping between call home centers and devices e Call home mapping between devices and assigned event filters e License information e Performance data e User defined sounds e User launched scripts e Zoning library all zone sets and zone definitions saved through the Zoning function EFC Manager Software User Manual 25 53 1000663 03 1 26 Backing Up and Restoring Data Management Server Backup There are three options for backing up data to the management server e Configuring Backup to a Writable CD e Configuring Backup to a Hard Drive e Configuring Backup to a Network Drive The rack mount Management Server is backed up to a rewritable CD RW compact disk by default Make sure you have a CD RW disk in the CD recorder drive to ensure that backup can occur Critical information from the SAN Management application is automatically backed up to the CD RW when the data directory contents change or when you restart the SAN Management application Note that backing up to CD is not the recommended method The usable capacity of a CD is approximately 700 MB and needs to be replaced when full Also CD
18. e Custom Select to select a background color e Line Types Select to determine the way inter device connections display on the topology e Straight Select to display connections using straight lines e Orthogonal Select to display connections in orthogonal grid lines e None Select to hide the connections between devices e Domain ID Port Select to set the display domain IDs and port numbers in decimal or hex format e Decimal Select to display all domain IDs and port numbers in decimal format e Hex Select to display all domain IDs in hex format Port numbers only display in hex format in the Element Managers e Product Label Select to configure which product labels display Name Select to display the product name as the product label Nickname Select to display the nickname as the product label Node WWN Select to display the node name as the product label IP Address Select to display the IP Address IPv4 or IPv6 format as the product label Domain ID Select to display the domain ID as the product label e Port Label Select to configure which port labels display Nickname Select to display the nickname as the port label Name Select to display the name as the port label Port Number Select to display the port number as the port label Port Address Select to display the port address as the port label Port WWN Select to display the port world wide name as the port label EFC Manager Software User Manua
19. sions command on the SAN menu Disables the Add Edit and Delete buttons on the Create View dialog box Columns tab Disables the Add Column Edit Col umn and Delete Column commands on the right click menu of the Product List column head ers Disables the Add Edit and Delete commands on the property headers in property sheets Disables the Advanced Call Home command on the Monitor gt Event Noti fication menu Read Only Enables the Active Ses sions command on the SAN menu Allows you to open the Active Sessions dialog box however disables the Disconnect User and OK buttons Same as No Privilege Enables the Advanced Call Home command on the Monitor gt Event Noti fication menu however disables the Add Edit Remove Edit Centers Add Remove Centers OK and Apply buttons as well as the Enabled check boxes Read Write Enables the Active Ses sions command on the SAN menu Enables all functions in the Active Sessions dialog box Enables the Add Edit and Delete properties commands and buttons in the Create View and Edit View dialog boxes the Product List column header right click menu and the Property Sheet property header right click menu Enables the Advanced Call Home command on the Monitor gt Event Noti fication menu Enables all functions in the dialog box Backup Discover On Off 272 Allows you to control the function that copies backs up the applic
20. 1 Select SAN gt Log Out The EFCM 9 7 Log In dialog box displays 2 Enter the Server s network address in the Network Address field The SAN Management application accepts IP addresses in IPv4 and IPv6 formats The IPv4 format is valid when the Operating System has IPv4 mode only or dual stack mode The IPv6 format is valid when the Operating System has IPv6 mode only or dual stack mode IPv4 addresses are normally written as four groups of three decimals For example 123 023 123 023 is a valid IPv4 address The SAN Management application accepts the following IPv4 address formats e 123 023 123 023 Complete address including leading zeros e 123 23 123 23 Compressed format with leading zeros omitted This is the default display IPv6 addresses are normally written as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits For example 2001 0db8 85a3 08d3 1319 8a2e 0370 7334 is a valid IPv6 address The SAN Management application accepts the following IPv6 address formats e AAAA OAAA 0000 AAAA AAAA AAAA AAAA AAAA Complete address including leading zeros e AAAA AAA 0 0 AAAA AAAA AAAA AAAA Compressed format with leading zeros omitted This is the default display e AAAA AAA AAAA AAAA AAAA AAAA Compressed format with double colons for successive hexadecimal fields of zeros e lt Pv6_Address gt lt Port_Number gt Any IP IPv6 address format and port number The default port number is 51511 NOTE You must have an establishe
21. 7 Click OK to save your changes and close the EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box Editing a User Group NOTE You must have the User Management privilege to perform this task You can change a user group s permissions to use certain features and views This provides added security for your SAN as well as your management application 1 Select SAN gt Users The EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box displays 2 Select a user group in the Groups list 3 Click Edit located below the Groups list The Group dialog box displays 4 To change permissions to use certain features click the Features tab Otherwise skip to step 5 a Inthe Read Write list select the features to which you want to remove read and write access Press CTRL and click to select multiple features b Click the left arrow next to the Read Write list The features are moved to the list on the left c Inthe Read Only list select the features to which you want to remove read only access Press CTRL and click to select multiple features d Click the left arrow next to the Read Only list The features are moved to the list on the left 5 To change permissions to use certain views click the Views tab Otherwise skip to step 6 a In the Selected Views list select the views to which you want to remove access Press CTRL and click to make multiple selections b Click the left arrow to move the selections to the list on the left 6 Click OK on the Group dialog box to
22. A Revised to support release 8 5 01 December 2004 EFC Manager Software User Manual 620 000170 030 Rev A Revised to support release 8 6 01 February 2005 EFC Manager Software User Manual EFC Manager Software User Manual 620 000170 040 Rev A 620 000170 050 Rev A Revised to support release 8 7 Revised to support release 8 7 1 01 June 2005 01 September 2005 EFC Manager Software User Manual 620 000170 060 Rev A Revised to support release 8 8 01 November 2005 EFC Manager Software User Manual 620 000170 070 Rev A Revised to support release 9 0 01 September 2006 EFC Manager Software User Manual EFC Manager Software User Manual 620 000170 080 Rev A 620 000170 090 Rev A Revised to support release 9 1 Revised to change company name 01 November 2006 02 March 2007 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 01 Rev A Revised to support release 9 5 31 July 2007 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 02 Rev A Revised to support release 9 6 19 October 2007 EFC Manager Software User Manual EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 53 1000663 03 Revised to support release 9 7 26 March 2008 iii iv EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Contents About this Document Chapter 1 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 How This Document is Organized 00 ccc e
23. A link consists of two conductors one used for sending and the other for receiving thereby providing a duplex communication path EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Glossary link incident LIN Interruption to link due to loss of light or other causes See also link incident alerts link incident alerts A user notification such as a graphic symbol in the Element Manager application Hardware View that indicates that a link incident has occurred See also link incident Link Incident Log Director or switch Link Incident Log Log displayed through the Element Manager application that provides a history of Fibre Channel link incidents with associated port numbers for an individual director or switch The information is useful to maintenance personnel for isolating port problems particularly expansion port E_Port segmentation problems and repair verification See also Audit Log master log Hardware Log Threshold Alert Log LIP See loop initialization primitive load balancing Ability to evenly distribute traffic over multiple interswitch links within a fabric Load balancing on McDATA or IBM directors and switches takes place automatically local area network LAN A computer network in a localized geographical area for example a building or campus whose communications technology provides a high bandwidth medium to which many nodes are connected D See also metropolitan area network storage area n
24. Community Strings Trap Recipients Community Strings p o Community String __ Privileges Add public Read Only OK Cancel Help FIGURE 60 SNMP Agent Setup Dialog Box Community Strings Tab 3 Choose from the following To add a new community string click Add Refer to Adding Community Strings on page 212 for more instructions To edit an existing community string click the recipient s row in the table and then click Edit Refer to Editing Community Strings on page 213 for more instructions Toremove an existing community string click the community string row in the table and then click Remove 4 Inthe SNMP Agent Setup dialog box click the Trap Recipient tab Figure 61 EFC Manager Software User Manual 207 53 1000663 03 5 208 Configuring the SNMP Agent Community Strings Trap Recipients y Enable Authentication Traps Trap Recipients i 17218 3 218 162 public OK Cancel Help FIGURE61 SNMP Agent Setup Dialog Box Trap Recipients Tab Active IP Address UDP Port Community String Add 5 To enable or disable authorization traps to be sent when unauthorized management stations try to access SNMP information through the Server select the Enable Authentication Traps check box 6 Choose from one of the following Toaddanewtrap recipient click Add Refer to Adding Trap Recipients on page 209 for more instructions To edit
25. FCIP gateway group 245 host 244 host bus adapter 244 host group 245 hub 244 iSCSI 245 iSCSI bridge 244 iSCSI bridge group 245 iSCSI device 244 iSCSI gateway 244 iSCSI gateway group 245 isolated group 245 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 JBOD 244 JDISK 244 loop 244 loop group 245 MSAN group 245 network attached storage 244 persisted fabric 195 persisted fabrics 195 products 243 routed in fabric group 245 routed in group 245 routed in router fabric group 245 SAN router 243 SAN Router group 245 server 244 storage 244 storage group 245 switch group 245 tape 244 tape group 245 unknown device 244 virtual device group 245 icons iSCSI device group 245 import feature 285 importing 109 116 in band discovery overview 132 in band discovery enabling 139 information bar 68 installing EFCM 13 license key 10 on UNIX systems 16 on Windows systems 13 IP addresses adding 142 changing 144 removing 147 iSCSI bridge group icon 245 iSCSI bridge icon 244 iSCSI device group icon 245 iSCSI device icon 244 iSCSI gateway group icon 245 iSCSI gateway icon 244 iSCSI icon 245 ISLs clearing alerts 196 isolated group icon 245 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 J JBOD icon 244 JDISK icon 244 K keyboard shortcuts 247 L launching applications 129 Element Managers 128 Telnet session 127 launching SAN Management application 23 lay
26. Generating an Aggregate Advanced Module Licensed Port Count To discover the license keys from managed EFCM servers and update the Manager of Manager MoM server license complete the following steps 1 Select Help gt License The License dialog box displays 2 Select the Aggregate advanced module licensed port counts from all managed EFCM servers check box 3 Click OK A message displays warning you that you have changed the aggregate port count setting click Yes to continue After the next discovery cycle the MoM server updates the licensed port count and modules list to include information from all discovered managed EFCM servers Clients connected to the MoM server are logged out automatically and must log in again EFC Manager Software User Manual 137 53 1000663 03 4 Mi1OK Director Discovery Mi10K Director Discovery Management of the Mi10K Director utilizes various network protocols to gather and send data Complete and successful management of the Mi1OK Director requires that all the ports associated with the network protocols must be accessible through the network and unblocked by any firewalls Simple Management Network Protocol SNMP across a User Datagram Protocol UDP connection primary which uses the default network port 1024 Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP connection additional which uses two protocols across the TCP IP connection e Extensible Markup Language
27. Remote Procedure Call XML RPC uses port 80 e NMRU Brocade proprietary protocol uses port 2048 for non SSL and port 2049 for SSL connections NOTE Make sure that your SNMP communication parameters are set correctly to discover Brocade or IBM switches Otherwise the discovery may fail Access Gateway Discovery NOTE Only supported on B model and M model switches that support NPIV functionality EFCM 9 5 and higher supports discovery of Brocade Access Gateway Brocade Access Gateway is a feature of the Brocade Fabric OS 5 2 1 or higher and a mode of operation designed for Brocade blade server SAN switches Access Gateway uses N_Port ID Virtualization NPIV standards to connect server blades to any SAN fabric Access Gateway does not appear as switch to the fabric it does not add a domain or require the same level of management as a traditional switch If discovered directly without discovering connected switches Access Gateway displays in an isolated devices group with the generic icon however no connected devices display Access Gateway is manageable through Web Tools right click device and select Element Manager If discovered directly with direct discovery of connected switches Access Gateway displays in an isolated device group with the generic icon and all connected end devices display as a collapsed host group connected to an edge switch in the Topology Map and as NPIV devices beneath the real edge switch port to which Ac
28. SNMP community Also known as SNMP community string SNMP community is a cluster of managed products in SNMP terminology hosts to which the server or managed product running the SNMP agent belongs EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Glossary simple network management protocol community name SNMP community name The name assigned to a given SNMP community Queries from an SNMP management station to a device running an SNMP agent only elicit a response if those queries are addressed with the correct SNMP community name simple network management protocol management station SNMP management station An SNMP workstation personal computer PC used to oversee the SNMP network SL_Port See segmented loop port small form factor pluggable transceivers SFP transceivers Laser based optical transceivers for a wide range of networking applications requiring high data rates The transceivers which are designed for increased densities performance and reduced power are well suited for Fibre Channel applications SMTP See simple mail transfer protocol SNMP See simple network management protocol SNMP community See simple network management protocol community SNMP community name See simple network management protocol community name SNMP management station See simple network management protocol management station SNMP time out The maximum amount of time the SAN Management application waits for a devic
29. Setting Up Discovery on page 139 EFC Manager Software User Manual 23 53 1000663 03 24 1 Starting the Application Starting EFCM on UNIX Systems Only use this procedure if you do not want to migrate data from the previous version of the SAN Management application To migrate data from a previous version refer to the EFC Manager Software Upgrade Instructions Follow these instructions to start SAN Management application on UNIX systems 1 Oe SOV ae ey N 10 11 To start EFCM 9 7 execute nohup EFCM_Mgr start from the lt nstall_Home gt bin directory where by default lt nstall_Home gt is opt EFCM97 If this is not the first time you start the application go to step 9 On the Welcome screen click Next On the License screen read the agreement click Yes then click Next On the Copy Data and Settings screen click No then click Next On the EFCM 9 7 Server Name screen enter the name to assign the Server then click Next On the EFCM 9 7 Server License screen enter your product s serial number on the CD jewel case and your license key on the Key Certificate and click Next On the EFCM 9 7 Server License Summary screen verify the install data then click Finish A message displays that states configuration is about the start the server make sure that the Administrative Tools Services window is closed or the server may not start Click OK to close the message On the EFCM 9 7 Log In
30. You can use the Show Route feature to view the path that Fibre Channel frames must take between two end products in a multiswitch fabric If you intend to show a different route within the same fabric the previous route is automatically hidden Requirements To view the route between two products the following conditions must be met e There must be two or more switches in the fabric e All switches or directors in the route must be managed by the application and attached to the same Server e All switches or directors in the route must be manageable products and must be running firmware version M EOS 4 0 or higher For a list of manageable products refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 e All attached products in the route must be in the same zone Procedure To show the route for two specific ports on the end nodes perform the following steps 1 Inthe Product List click the next to a switch product icon to see the nodes 2 Right click a node and select Show Route The Show Route dialog box displays Select a destination node from the Destination Port table Click OK The route between the nodes displays on topology Figure 36 madim 172 931 5455 EFC Manager Software User Manual 165 53 1000663 03 5 166 Managing Products Hiding Routes Between Two End Products NOTE This feature is only available for fabrics consisting solely of manageable products refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 You can
31. agent and a set of SNMP managers that defines authentication access control and proxy characteristics community strings The community name that is contained in each SNMP message It is not secure and there is no way of keeping the contents private or for determining if a message has been changed or replayed The community string value is not encrypted component 1 Hardware or software that is part of a functional unit 2 A functional part of an operating system for example the scheduler or Supervisor D EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Glossary computer A programmable machine that responds to a specific set of instructions in a well defined manner and executes a prerecorded list of instructions a program Computers are both electronic and digital and are made up of both hardware the actual machine wires transistors and circuits and software instructions and data concurrent firmware upgrade Firmware is upgraded without disrupting switch operation configuration data The collection of data that results from configuring product and system operating parameters For example configuring operating parameters SNMP agent and port configurations through the Element Manager application results in a collection of configuration data Configuration data includes identification data port configuration data operating parameters and SNMP configuration A configuration backup file is required to rest
32. changing TCP IP ports 214 clearing events 217 clearing ISL alerts 196 community strings adding 212 configuring 147 editing 213 removing 213 reverting to default 149 compatibility with applications 242 Configure menu 64 327 configuring community strings 147 discovery 139 event notification e mail 220 remote access 100 trap forwarding 197 CONNECTION table for MySQL 257 connections on persisted fabrics 196 status determining 68 copying from logs 219 counting frames overview 199 creating user groups 94 creating user accounts 90 D data exporting 109 importing 109 database exporting to 113 setting up DB2 115 MySQL 115 DB2 database setting up 115 deactivating discovery 141 default community strings 149 degraded icon 246 deleting reports 227 users 91 deleting servers 78 deleting Tools menu options 125 deleting users from groups 99 determining users 89 device administration feature 285 device icons 243 device maintenance feature 285 device operation feature 285 DEVICE table for MySQL 258 device tips turning on and off 104 device s shortcut menu adding option to 126 editing 127 removing option from 127 devices finding in persisted fabrics 197 328 director icon 243 244 Discover menu 63 discover on off feature 285 discovery configuring 139 in band 132 in band enabling 139 issues 231 out of band 132 out of ba
33. gt Persist Fabric e Right click the fabric or switch group in the Product List or Physical Map and select Persist Fabric from the pop up menu e Select a fabric or switch group in the Physical Map or Product List then click the Persist Fabric button on the toolbar Unpersisting a Fabric or Switch Group To unpersist a fabric or switch group e Select a fabric or switch group in the Physical Map or Product List then select Monitor gt Unpersist Fabrics e Right click the fabric or switch group in the Product List or Physical Map and select Unpersist Fabrics from the pop up menu Unpersisting a Single Product You can unpersist a single product in a persisted fabric or switch group if the product is no longer part of the fabric or switch group When a product is unpersisted the connections associated with that product are also removed The persisted fabric or switch group s data is updated with the changes To unpersist a product click the product icon and select Monitor gt Unpersist Product or right click the product and select Unpersist Product from the menu 194 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Persisting and Unpersisting Fabrics and Switch Groups 5 Graphic Indicators Related to Persisted Fabrics There are various ways to determine the status of persisted fabrics or switch groups and persisted products Real time changes to the fabric or switch group display on the Physical Map and the Product Lis
34. license Allows you to control access to the License dia log box from the Help menu EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Disables the License command on the Help menu Enables the License com mand on the Help menu however disables the Update and OK buttons Enables the License com mand on the Help menu and enables you to change the license key 275 F In this Appendix TABLE 56 Privileges and Application Behavior Privilege Description Log Management Allows you to control access to the Export Clear Show and Hide commands in the Master Log and individual logs audit event fabric group product status session and security No Privilege Disables the Export Clear Show and Hide commands in the Master Log and individual logs Enables Show All and Export commands Dis ables the Clear and Export buttons on the individual logs Note that the Export com mand on the master log right click menu is con trolled by the Export privi lege launches the Export Discovered SAN dialog box If this privilege is removed and the Event Manage ment privilege is assigned then this message appears lt title lt Product gt Mes sage gt lt Warning gt Removing the Log Management privi lege does not remove users ability for Log Man agement in Event Man agement You might also want to consider remov ing the Event Manage ment privilege as well lt lt OK gt gt Read Only
35. specific location on the Physical Map click that area on the Minimap A close up view of the selected location displays on the Physical Map Use the Minimap to view the entire SAN and to navigate more detailed map views This feature is especially useful if you have a large SAN Minimap 4 a FIGURE 5 Minimap Anchoring or Floating the Minimap You can anchor or float the Minimap to customize your main window Floating the Minimap To float the Minimap and view it in a separate window click the Detach icon 5 in the upper right corner of the Minimap Anchoring the Minimap To return the Minimap to its original location on the main window do one of the following steps e Click the Attach icon 94 in the upper right corner of the Minimap e Click the Close icon XI in the upper right corner of the Minimap e Double click the logo in the upper left corner of the Minimap e Click the logo in the upper left corner of the Minimap and select Close ALT F4 Resizing the Minimap On an anchored Minimap place the cursor on the left border of the Minimap until a double pointed arrow displays Click and drag the adjoining divider On a floating Minimap place the cursor on a border of the Minimap until a double pointed arrow displays Click and drag to change the window size EFC Manager Software User Manual 59 53 1000663 03 2 60 User Interface Description Menu Bar The menu bar is located at the top of the m
36. 128 empty if LUN is bound to all ports PWWN Port World Wide Name is ALL if LUN is Varchar 128 bound to all ports HOSTMODE Host Mode meaningful only for HDS Varchar 128 LUNID ID used in binding LUN to this port Int N A EXPORTTIME Exported time Varchar 128 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 In this Appendix LUNMASKING Table TABLE 40 Field Definition Format Size LUNGUID LUN GUID Varchar 255 HBANWWN HBA Node World Wide Name Varchar 128 HBAPWWN HBA Port World Wide Name Varchar 128 STORAGENWWN Storage port node World Wide Varchar 128 Name could be empty if masking is not restricted to any storage ports STORAGEPWWN_ Storage port World Wide Name Varchar 128 could be empty if masking is not restricted through any port CABLED Whether Fibre Channel connection Int N A exists between the host port and this storage port ZONED Whether the host port and the stor Int N A age port are zoned together EXPORTTIME Exported time Varchar 128 MSAN Table TABLE 41 Field Definition Format Size NAME Name of the mSAN Varchar 20 SANID ID of the MSAN Varchar 255 NICKNAME Nickname of the mSAN Bigint 255 ROUTERFABRICCOUNT SAN Router fabric count of the Int 11 mSAN FCFABRICCOUNT Fibre Channel fabric count of the Int 11 mSAN EXPORTTIME Exported time Varchar 128 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 E 263 E 264 In this Appendix NETAPPFILER Table TA
37. 327 2121 Entering the License Key A license key is required to run the application The key specifies the maximum number of switch ports you can monitor the number of clients you can run the expiration date of a trial license as well as any licensed optional modules Before you enter the license key you must install the application for step by step instructions on installation refer to Installing the Application on page 13 1 Select Help gt License The License dialog box displays Figure 1 Serial License Key l Update Discovered Ports 165 Adv Module 4098 Licensed Ports Aggregate advanced module licensed port counts from all managed EFCM servers Advanced Module Details gt Performance Management s Performance Management Performance Monitoring measures the current performance statistics historic metrics and future trends Croup Contguralion 4 of every switch port on your SAN Performance Security Center V Monitoring identifies links and ports within the storage network that are over and under utilized Network performance management means more ports availableto storage arrays Leverage this information to make Contact sales at www brocade com 1 800 545 5773 Event Management ao Cancel Help FIGURE 1 License Dialog Box 2 If you are upgrading from a trial license enter the serial number EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 3 Product Licensing Overvie
38. 4 144 Configuring Address Properties Editing an IP Address You can edit IP addresses or associated subnets that are listed on the Discover Setup dialog box 1 10 11 Select Discover gt Setup The Discover Setup dialog box displays Click the Out of Band tab In the Available Addresses table select the IP address to edit Click Edit If the IP address you want to edit is in the Selected Individual Addresses area of the Discovery Setup dialog box then an message displays telling you that you must remove the IP Address from the Selected Individual Addresses area before editing Click OK to close the message To remove the IP address from the Selected Individual Addresses area select the IP address and click the left arrow In the Description field modify the description for the device Select either IPv4 Address or IPv6 Address NOTE The SAN Management application accepts IP addresses in IPv4 and IPv6 formats The IPv4 format is valid when the Operating System has IPv4 mode only or dual stack mode The IPv6 format is valid when the Operating System has IPv6 mode only or dual stack mode If you selected IPv4 Address complete the following steps a Inthe IPv4 Address field enter the IP address four groups of three decimals for the device b In the Subnet Mask IPv4 or dual mode only field enter the subnet mask address for the device If you selected IPv6 Address complete the following steps a In
39. 53 1000663 03 6 Using Event Notification Features Copying the Entire Master Log 1 In the Master Log area click in the list 2 Choose Edit gt Select All CTRL A All Master Log rows are selected Press CTRL C to copy the selected information in tab delimited format In another application click where you want to paste the data Press CTRL V or select the Paste command from the other application All data and column headings are pasted Using Event Notification Features 220 The application records the SAN events in the Master Log You can configure the application to send event notifications to e mail addresses at certain time intervals This is a convenient way to keep track of events that occur on the SAN You can also configure products to call home for certain events notifying the service center of product problems For instructions about configuring call home for events refer to Configuring Advanced Call Home on page 37 Configuring E mail Notification You can configure the application to send notification of events to users 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt E mail The E mail Event Notification Setup dialog box displays Figure 69 _ Enable E mail Event Notification E mail Server SMTP Port 25 SMTP ID SMTP Password Reply Address unknown unknown com Summary Interval 0 minutes Y E mail Test Options Sendto Send to all users enabled for notifica
40. 69 user list viewing 89 user management feature 286 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 user privileges defined 272 users access levels 285 adding 90 assigning to groups 98 changing 91 determining permissions 99 filtering events for 92 finding in groups 99 groups 285 managing overview 89 privileges 272 removing 91 removing from groups 99 viewing all 89 users total 69 V version 2 7 upgrading from 10 view management feature 286 View menu 61 view options changing 103 viewing active sessions 101 events 216 fabric events 218 product list 56 reports 225 routes 166 users 89 zooming in 103 zooming out 103 views changing permissions 96 virtual device group icon 245 virtual fabric feature 286 W Windows installing on 13 terminating the application 13 uninstalling from 21 335 Z ZONE table 267 ZONELIBRARY table for MySQL 268 ZONEMEMBER table for MySQL 268 ZONESET table for MySQL 270 ZONESETZONES table for MySQL 270 zooming in 103 zooming out 103 336 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03
41. 83 V8 1 5 15 V8 1 5 12 v4 13 01 v3 05 v6 06 10 v1 27 13 v1 27 06 v2 01b5 Qlogic QL 2310 v1 43 v9 01 10 v9 01 10 v4 15 02 v3 07 v6 06 10 v2 0 02 v2 0 02 v2 01b5 Qlogic QLA 2340 v1 43 v8 2 3 11 v8 1 5 12 v4 13 01 v3 05 v6 06 10 v1 27 23 v1 27 06 v2 01b5 Qlogic QLA 2342 v3 03 01 v8 2 3 11 V8 1 5 12 v4 13 01 v3 05 v6 06 10 v1 27 23 v1 27 06 v2 01b5 Viewing Frame Sniffer Tests NOTE Frame Sniffer procedures should only be performed by advanced users and are only available with M Model manageable switches running M EOS 5 0 or higher For a list of manageable devices refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 You can view and manage frame sniffer tests through the Frame Sniffer dialog box 1 Select Monitor gt Frame Sniffer The Frame Sniffer dialog box displays Figure 57 Avolleble Switch Intrepid 140 T Tem piste Cortert Registers TCR 5 Pott 12 bf Tem plate Counters 7 Shitier Tests Tests StatugOuretion TCRPortName Steet Time Finish Time Freee Count Direct Action Run a Tet 7 Mimies 3 RX B Coinwalid_same 2 Hours 1 TX Stop E Eebserver to LUN 17 1SMintes 5 RX Run unina 2Mintes 1 RX o Cunwwea SMintes 3 RX E Swteh 2Minstes 8 TX Ada Ss Runni 20 minutes 8 10099804 13 20am Novt 1 000 34 RX Stop eg Session Compl 20 mites 7 1002344988 05 22am Oct 0 0S42an 0 2000 Rx Edit Delete Clear Action Retesh OK Cancel Apply Helo FIGURE57 Frame Sniffer Dialog Box 2 The configured tests di
42. Aliases into Nicknames To import Zone Alias information from a B model switch into the SAN Management application complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Import The Import dialog box displays 2 Select FC Aliases into Nicknames from the Import list In the Fabric field select the fabric from which you want to import FC Aliases Click OK A Warning message displays stating mporting a nickname for a WWN that already has a nickname will overwrite the existing nickname Do you want to continue Click OK to continue The file is imported and assigned 122 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Accessing Third Party Tools 3 Accessing Third Party Tools You can add third party tools to the Tools menu or shortcut menus to open other software products you frequently use Adding a Tool You can specify third party tools so they appear on the Setup Tools dialog box From there you can add them to the Tools menu and then open the tools directly from the management application 1 Select Tools gt Setup The Setup Tools dialog box displays 2 Click the Tools Menu tab 3 Click Define The Define Tools dialog box displays Figure 25 Tool Name Netscape Path l _ Browse Working Folder Browse Add Edit Remove Tools Tool Name Path Working Folder Netscape a paima Explorer C Program Filesiinternet Explorer iex ii aa Telnet CAWINNT system32 telnet exe Saninsite
43. Associate a nickname with a product or port WWN currently being discovered Add aWWN and an associated nickname for a product or port that is not yet being discovered Remove or disassociate a nickname from a WWN Viewing Nicknames The SAN Management application allows you to view devices by the device nickname 1 Select Configure gt Nicknames The Configure Nicknames dialog box displays Figure 37 Dispisy AN Nicknemes X Scope Neineme Y Nickname wal Operational Stabus Tyre la Detached WWAN Netreme FIGURE37 Configure Nicknames Dialog Box 2 From the Display list select All Nicknames Only devices with a nickname display The table displays the Nickname WWN Operational Status Type and Description of the device 3 Click OK to close the Configure Nicknames dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 167 5 Configuring Nicknames Searching by Nickname The SAN Management application allows you to search for objects switch fabric MSAN product ports or N Ports by nickname 1 Select Configure gt Nicknames The Configure Nicknames dialog box displays Figure 37 Cosplay All Nicknames X Scope Mekneme Y Nickname weal Operational Status Tre Description laport bl Detached WAAN Nekname w anced Hop FIGURE38 Configure Nicknames Dialog Box 2 From the Display list select All Nicknames Only objects with a nickname display Display Aa hachnames aa Scope Ncin
44. Community Strings tab if necessary 3 On the Community Strings tab click Add The Add Community String dialog box displays Community String Privileges Read and Write D Read Only OK Cancel FIGURE66 Add Community String Dialog Box 4 Enter a name for the community string in the Community String field Select the appropriate Privileges option When you select Read and Write an administrator at an SNMP management station has write permissions for writable MIB objects on the Server 6 Click OK 212 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring the SNMP Agent 5 Editing Community Strings To edit an existing community string during SNMP agent configuration use the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt SNMP Agent gt Setup The SNMP Agent Setup dialog box displays 2 Click the Community Strings tab if necessary 3 Select the community string you want to edit and click Edit The Edit Trap Recipient dialog box displays Figure 64 Community String Privileges Read and Write Read Only OK Cancel FIGURE 67 Edit Community String Dialog Box 4 Edit the fields as necessary Refer to Adding Community Strings on page 212 for more details 5 Click OK Removing Community Strings To remove an existing community string during SNMP agent configuration use the following steps ATTENTION This procedure removes community string without asking for confirmation 1 Select Monitor gt
45. Enable In Band Discovery Enable ia ait aa a aaah eee SAN Database Clear current SAN devices before starting new discovery Rebuild Discovery Schedule Cancel Help FIGURE26 Discover Setup Dialog Box General Tab 3 Change the polling delay if necessary For details refer to Setting the Polling Delay on page 141 EFC Manager Software User Manual 139 53 1000663 03 4 140 Setting Up Discovery Select the discovery method you want to use Select the Out of Band Discovery Enable check box to perform out of band discovery Continue with step 8 For more information refer to Out of Band Discovery on page 132 Select the In Band Discovery Enable check box to perform in band discovery Go to step 5 For more information refer to In Band Discovery on page 132 NOTE To perform in band discovery an HBA must be physically installed in the Server Download the vendor s HBA drivers and libraries from the vendor s website Select both options to perform both in band and out of band discovery Continue with step 5 If you selected In Band Discovery in the Available HBAs table select the Active check box for each HBA you want to use to discover the SAN Select Clear current SAN devices before starting new discovery to start discovery with a clean desktop Select the Rebuild Discovery Schedule check box to reset the discovery engine and rebuild the discovery catalog e If
46. Enabling a Call Home Center 00 00 e eee eee 43 Testing the Call Home Center Connection 43 Disabling a Call Home Center 00 0 eee eee eee 44 Viewing Call Home StatuS 0 0 0 eee 45 Assigning a Device to the Call Home Center 46 Removing a Device From a Call Home Center 47 Removing All Devices and Filters From a Call Home Center 47 Defining an Event Filter 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 48 Assigning an Event Filter to a Call Home Center 48 Assigning an Event Filter to a Device 0000 49 Overwriting an Assigned Event Filter 00 49 Removing an Event Filter from a Call Home Center 50 Removing an Event Filter from a Device 50 Removing an Event Filter from the Call Home Event Filters Table50 Searching for an Assigned Event Filter 51 MiscellanegUS sienen ae a ee ee a e a 51 Multiple Network Interface CardS 00 ce cee eee eee 51 Closing the Application 0 00 cee eee 51 Using the Documentation 0 000 c eee eee 52 Searching the Online Help 0c eee eee eee 52 Printing an Online Help Topic 020 ee eee eee 52 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Chapter 2 Software Overview In this Cha pte risag ei eee ais agente Weal a alee ee wey 53 TheLife Cycle of a SANS cdi ee rieni yra decid ae ede be D o 54 User Interface D
47. FABRIC Table TABLE 31 Field Definition Format Size NAME Fabric Name Varchar 128 Nickname Fabric nickname Varchar 128 EXPORTTIME Exported time Varchar 128 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 HISTORICALPERFORMANCE Table In this Appendix TABLE 32 Field Definition Format Size STARTTIME Start time Varchar 128 DEVICEGUID Device GUID Varchar 128 PORTNUMBER Port number Int N A TYPE Type of performance i e day hr Varchar 128 BIN Bin number Int N A TX Transmit Int A RX Receive Int N A CRC Invalid CRC count Int N A LOS Loss of signal Int N A OOS Out of sync Int JA MBW Max bandwidth Int N A EXPORTTIME Exported time Varchar 128 HOST Table TABLE 33 Field Definition Format Size ID Host ID MySQL Int 11 unsigned DB2 Int NICKNAME Nickname of the host Varchar 255 HOSTNAME Name of the host Varchar 128 IPADDRESS IP address number Varchar 128 OS Operating System Varchar 128 ASSIGNEDLUNS Assigned LUNs Int 11 TOTALSIZE Total size of the host MySQL Float N A DB2 Double APPLICATIONS Host applications Varchar 255 DEPARTMENT Department of the host Varchar 128 LOCATION Location of the host Varchar 128 CONTACT Contact information of the host Varchar 255 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 E 259 E 260 In this Appendix TABLE 33 Field Definition Format Size DESCRIPTION Host description Varchar 255 COMMENTS Comments
48. From a Call Home Center To remove all devices and filters from a call home center complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays 2 Inthe Call Home Center table select the call home center from which you want to remove devices and filters 3 Click lt left arrow button A confirmation message displays 4 Click OK All devices assigned to the selected call home center display in the Products List table Any assigned filters are also removed 5 Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 47 53 1000663 03 48 1 Configuring Advanced Call Home Defining an Event Filter To define an event filter complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays 2 Click Add beneath the Call Home Event Filter table The Call Home Event Filter dialog box displays In the Name field enter a name for the filter In the Description field enter a name for the description In the Available Call Home Event Types table select the events you want to include in the filter Click Select All to select all event types in the table or select Unselect All to clear the selected event types in the table For more information about Call Home events refer to Appendix page 287 6 Cli
49. HBA ports also apply the nickname to the HBA product For Storage ports apply one of the nicknames to the Storage product Storage ports include the product types Storage Tape and Bridge NOTE This is only applicable when nicknames have been set to allow non unique nicknames in the Options dialog box For more information refer to Configuring Nickname Settings 5 Click OK A Warning message displays stating Importing a nickname for a WWN that already has a nickname will overwrite the existing nickname Do you want to continue Click OK to continue 6 On the Imported Results dialog box click OK Importing Properties To import Properties csv complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Import The Import dialog box displays 2 Select Properties csv from the Import list 3 Inthe File Name field enter the path and file name or Browse to the file NOTE If you browsed to and selected the lt nstall_Home gt Server Universe_Home TestUniverse _Working directory or any files within that directory the Import Export might fail You must deselect the file or directory before you run the Import Export process again 4 Click OK Importing properties replaces corresponding data on the server Any data actively being monitored by the SAN Management application will revert to the discovered values 5 On the Imported Results dialog box click OK 120 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Export and
50. IP Address of the trap recipient c To override the default User Datagram Protocol UDP port number for a trap recipient with any legal decimal UDP number enter the UDP port number in the UDP Port field NOTE The SAN Management application interprets trap data and displays the proper port value for all firmware levels When traps are generated on the switch for firmware versions 4 X and below the varbind shows the correct port number 0 as the first port however for firmware versions 5 X and above the varbind shows port number 1 as the first port and the label for the first port is O so you need to subtract 1 from the port number extracted from the varbind to correctly match the label Third party applications may not correctly interpret the information d Inthe Community String field change the trap recipient community Click OK EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring the SNMP Agent 5 Changing the UDP Port You can change the User Datagram Protocol UDP port number to a trap recipient with any legal decimal UDP number To change the UDP port number complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt SNMP Agent gt Setup The SNMP Agent Setup dialog box displays Click the Trap Recipient tab In the Trap Recipient tab click Edit The Edit Trap Recipient dialog box displays In the UDP Port field enter a new UDP port number NOTE The SAN Management application interprets trap data and di
51. Route Select to view the path that Fibre Channel frames must take between two end products in a multiswitch fabric NOTE Show Route is only available when your Fabric contains two or more Switches Hide Route Select to hide routes that Fibre Channel frames must take between two end products in a multi switch fabric Tools Menu The Tools menu provides the following commands Setup Select to set up the applications that display on the Tools menu Product Menu Select to access the tools available on a device s shortcut menu Tools determined by user settings Select to open a software application You can configure the Tools menu to display different software applications Recommended tools to include in this menu include an internet browser the command prompt application and Notepad Help Menu The Help menu provides the following commands Contents Select to open the Online Help Find Select to search the Online Help License Select to view or change your License information About EFCM Select to view SAN Management application information such as the release number EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 User Interface Description 2 Toolbar The toolbar is located at the top of the main window and provides icons to perform various functions Figure 6 FIGURE 6 The Toolbar The buttons on your toolbar will vary based on the licensed features on your system 1 Users Displays the EFCM 9 7 Server Use
52. SNMP Agent No Privilege Disables the SNMP Agent gt On Off and Setup com mands on the Monitor menu If this privilege is removed and the Event Manage ment privilege is assigned then this message appears lt title lt Product gt Mes sage gt lt Warning gt Removing the SNMP privilege does not remove users ability for SNMP configuration in Event Management You might also want to con sider removing the Event Management privilege as well lt lt OK gt gt In this Appendix F Read Only Disables the SNMP Agent gt On and Off commands on the Monitor menu Enables the SNMP Agent gt Setup command on the Monitor menu however disables all functions in the SNMP Setup dialog box Read Write Enables the SNMP Agent gt On Off and Setup com mands on the Monitor menu Enables all func tions in the SNMP Setup dialog box Software Configuration Parameters Allows you to configure some of the properties of the client and server of the management applica tion Disables the Software Configuration Parame ters folder and sub pages in the Options dialog box The configuration cannot be viewed Enables the Software Configuration Parame ters folder and sub pages in the Options dialog box however disables the OK and Apply buttons when any of the sub pages are selected Enables the Software Configuration Parame ters folder and sub pages in the Options dialog box Enables all fun
53. Select Enable to enable this call home center 6 Toset the interval at which to check the call home center select the Set the heartbeat interval at days 1 28 check box and enter the interval in the field 7 Inthe Local Server Phone Number field enter the phone number or extension of the local server 8 Inthe Local Server Server ID field enter the identification number of the local server In the Local Server Site Name field enter the site name for the local server 10 Click Send Test to test the phone number The selected call home center must be enabled to test the phone number EFC Manager Software User Manual 41 53 1000663 03 42 1 Configuring Advanced Call Home 11 12 Click OK The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays with the call home center you edited highlighted in the Call Home Centers table Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box Editing the HP LAN Call Home Center To edit a call home center complete the following steps 1 ow SOV Bs 9 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays In the Call Home Centers table select the call home center you want to edit Click Edit Centers beneath the Call Home Centers table The Configure Call Home Center dialog box displays In the Call Home Centers list select HP LAN Select Enable to enable this call home cent
54. Server with service pack 4 Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition with service pack 1 Windows XP with service pack 2 Memory 1GB Disk Space 2 GB Video Requirements 8MB VGA 256 Resolution 256 colors TABLE 5 Solaris Server Requirements Processor Solaris UltraSparc Ili and up Hardware CD ROM Operating System Solaris 9 or 10 Memory 1GB Disk Space 2 GB Video Requirements 8MB 8 bit color Resolution 256 colors NOTE Approximately 1 3 GB of space is necessary on the tmp directory of Solaris systems to install the application NOTE EFCM for Solaris includes all of the features of EFCM except the Backup feature EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 1 System Requirements TABLE 6 Linux Server Requirements Processor 2 0 GHz Intel Pentium 4 Hardware CD ROM Operating System Red Hat Enterprise Linux ES 3 0 Red Hat Enterprise Linux ES 4 0 Redhat 9 0 kernel v 2 4 20 8 SuSE Linux 9 2 SuSE Linux 9 3 Memory 1GB Disk Space 2 GB Video Requirements 8MB 8 bit color Resolution 256 colors NOTE When managing large fabrics we recommend that you use a platform meeting at least the recommended requirements for both server and client The Client system running the SAN Management application must meet the following requirements TABLE 7 Windows Client Requirements Processor 2 0 GHz Intel Pentium 4 Hardware CD ROM Windows 2000 Professional with service pack 4 Operating System NOTE IPv6 addresses are no
55. Sockeye ae 1 System REquIFEMENtS eris rrn i a ke ee ee eae eae 4 Product Licensing Overview 0 0 0 c eee ete eee eee 8 e Installing the Application 0 ccc eee 13 e Uninstalling the Application 2 0 00 eee eee 21 Starting the Application 00 eee eee eee teens 23 e Backing Up and Restoring Data 6 0 0 cece eee 25 e Configuring Advanced Call Home 1 00 e eee eee 37 e Closing the Application 0 0 0 c cee 51 e Searching the Online Help 0 0 cee eee eee 52 Overview EFCM Release 9 7 is available for installation on a management server supplied by Brocade or IBM or your own management server EFCM for UNIX systems includes all of the features of EFCM except for the Advanced Call Home and Backup features NOTE Advanced Call Home is only available on Windows and Solaris systems Backup is only available on Windows systems The SAN Management application has the following client and server system requirements Enterprise Edition License e Amaximum of 25 Clients are allowed per Server e The Server supports unlimited discovered ports Standard Edition License e Amaximum of 2 Clients are allowed per Server e The Server supports up to 140 discovered ports EFC Manager Software User Manual 1 53 1000663 03 1 Overview UDP and TCP Port Requirements The following tables detail the port numbers used by EFCM and note where the ports are used for client server connectivit
56. Unknown Link Down ON 7 ole gt gt Virtual Switch Event Icons For more information about events refer to the Event Management User Manual or online help TABLE25 Event Icons Icon Description Informational amp Warning Fatal gt 246 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Keyboard Shortcuts In this Appendix You can use the keystrokes shown in Table 26 to perform common functions NOTE C To open a menu using keystrokes press ALT the underlined letter To open a submenu release the ALT key first then press the key for the underlined letter of the submenu option TABLE 26 Keyboard Shortcuts EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Menu Item or Function Keyboard Shortcut All Panels F12 Collapse CTRL L Command Tool SHIFT F4 Connectivity Map F7 Copy CTRL C Cut CTRL X Delete Delete Delete All CTRL Delete Event Management F11 Expand CTRL E Help F1 Insert Devices CTRL D Internet Explorer SHIFT F1 Master Log F5 Multiple Devices Planned SAN only CTRL D Netscape SHIFT F2 New Plan CTRL N Open Plan CTRL O Open SAN menu F10 Paste CTRL V Product List F9 Properties CTRL P Security Center F8 Select All CTRL A Select Connections CTRL T Show Ports F4 247 C 248 In this Appendix TABLE 26 Keyboard Shortcuts Continued Menu Item or Function View Utilization
57. User Manual 71 53 1000663 03 3 Server and Client Communication Requirements Server and Client Communication Requirements 72 The SAN Management application has the following Server and Client communication requirements IP Connection to Switches The SAN Management Server and Client software poll different fabric information directly requiring access to each switch by way of an IP connection Make sure that the network environment does not have a proxy server or firewall between the devices and the Server and Clients If a proxy server or firewall exists make sure that proper rules are set up to allow access Port Numbers For some SAN Management functions to work correctly the following TCP UDP port numbers must not be blocked by a proxy server or network firewall e 20 FTP port e 21 built in FTP server port e 23 telnet sectelnet port e 162 SNMP port e 2048 2049 MPI discovery ports e 80 HTTP port e 443 HTTPS port e 1812 1813 RADIUS ports If a firewall exists between the Server and Client the following port numbers must be open e 80 Web Server port number on the Server port e 51511 API Server to Client communication port e 51510 API Server to Client export port e 55555 API Client to Server export port e 51513 ECCAPI port e 8081 Web proxy port EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring a Server 3 Configuring a Server The application has two parts the Serv
58. Varchar 255 EXPORTTIME Exported time Varchar 128 HOSTCONNECTION Table TABLE 34 Field Definition Format Size DEVICEGUID Storage device GUID Varchar 255 NICKNAME Nickname Varchar 255 HBANWWN HBA Node World Wide Name Varchar 128 HBAPWWN HBA Port WWN Varchar 128 OSNAME Operating System Profile Name Varchar 128 STORAGENWWN Storage Node WWN could be Varchar 128 empty if this host is permitted to access all ports STORAGEPWWN Storage Port WWN could be Varchar 128 empty if this host is allowed to access all ports CABLED Whether Fibre Channel connec Int N A tion exists between the host port and this storage port ZONED Whether the host port and the Int N A storage port are zoned together EXPORTTIME Exported time Varchar 128 HOSTHBAS Table TABLE 35 Field Definition Format Size HOSTID ID of the host containing the HBA MySQL Int N A unsigned DB2 Int HBADEVICEGUID DEVICEGUID of the contained HBA Varchar 128 EXPORTTIME Exported time Varchar 128 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 In this Appendix HOSTLUNS Table TABLE 36 Field Definition Format Size PORTGUID Port GUID Varchar 255 LUNGUID LUN GUID Varchar 255 TARGETPORTGUID Target Port GUID Varchar 255 ID Host size LUN ID HLU Int N A BUSID Bus ID of the LUN Int N A TARGETID Target ID of the LUN Int N A LATENCY SCSI inquiry time for the LUN Int N A OSDEVICENAME OSDeviceName of the LUN Varchar 255 VOLUME Volume Name of the LUN Varchar 255 VOLUMELAB
59. a SAN It also displays the relationship between multiple ports and represents them as attached toa storage array device in the Device Tree Topology and Fabric views Occasionally there are cases where the SAN Management application cannot see the relationship between ports attached to the same storage device Therefore the SAN Management application allows you to manually associate the connections that the system is unable to make using the Storage Port Mapping dialog box The SAN Management application allows you to create and assign properties to a Storage Device during the mapping process using the Storage Port Mapping dialog box Once a Storage Device has multiple ports assigned to it you cannot change the device type NOTE When you open the Storage Port Mapping dialog box Discovery is automatically turned off When you close the Storage Port Mapping dialog box Discovery automatically restarts During Discovery if a previously mapped Storage Port is found to have a relationship with a port just discovered the SAN Management application automatically reassigns the Storage Port to the proper mapping The two Ports are grouped together This grouping is visually represented as a Storage Device This Storage Device contains Node information from the discovered port and populates default information where available The SAN Management application allows you to change the Device Type of a discovered device Isolated Storage Ports are repre
60. a semi colon Mail List button Click to select from a list of e mail addresses From Enter your e mail address Subject Enter a subject for the e mail message Message Enter content for the e mail message Click Apply or OK to export the files If you exported to disk make a note of the file location and name Click OK at the confirmation window 111 3 Export and Import Selecting an E Mail Address for Export The SAN Management application enables you to select the e mail address to which you export information 1 Select SAN gt Export The Export Discovered SAN dialog box displays 2 From the Export To list select E mail 3 Click Mail List The Mail List dialog box displays Figure 22 Users Name Email Administrator User List OK Cancel Help FIGURE22 Mail List Dialog Box 4 Inthe Users table select a user or click User List to display a list of all users 5 Click OK The selected e mail information displays in the Mail To field Defining Filters for Export The SAN Management application enables you to filter the events included in the export of the Master Log 1 Select SAN gt Export The Export Discovered SAN dialog box displays Select Master log Click Select Events The Define Filter dialog box displays Figure 23 112 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Export and Import 3 Y Include extended events 1Y Only events for current view Available E
61. address See media access control address mainframe A powerful multi user computer capable of supporting many hundreds or thousands of users simultaneously MAN See metropolitan area network maintenance port Connector on the director or switch where a PC running an American National Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII terminal emulator can be attached or dial up connection made for specialized maintenance support managed product Hardware product that can be managed with the Element Manager application McDATA or directors and switches are managed products See also device EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 management information base MIB Related set of software objects variables containing information about a managed device and accessed via simple network management protocol SNMP from a network management station management session A session that exists when a user logs on to your SAN management application Your SAN management application can support multiple concurrent management sessions The user must specify the network address of your SAN management application s server at logon time management style In directors or switches in managed products a selection between FICON and open systems management style See also open systems management style FICON management style manager A SAN management application master log Record of significant events that have occurred on th
62. an existing trap recipient click the recipient s row in the table and then click Edit Refer to Editing Trap Recipients on page 210 for more instructions To remove a trap recipient click the recipient s row in the table and then click Remove 7 Click OK Turning On the SNMP Agent Select Monitor gt SNMP Agent gt On Turning Off the SNMP Agent Select Monitor gt SNMP Agent gt Off EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring the SNMP Agent Adding Trap Recipients To add a trap recipient during SNMP agent configuration complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt SNMP Agent gt Setup The SNMP Agent Setup dialog box displays 2 Click the Trap Recipient tab Community Strings Trap Recipients y Enable Authentication Traps Trap Recipients Active IP Address UDP Port Community String Add v 17218 3 218 162 public OK Cancel Help FIGURE62 SNMP Agent Setup Dialog Box Trap Recipients Tab 3 Inthe Trap Recipient tab click Add The Add Trap Recipient dialog box displays Trap Recipient y Activate IP Address UDP Port 162 Community String public nA OK Cancel FIGURE 63 Add Trap Recipient Dialog Box 4 Select the Activate check box to activate the trap recipient In the IP Address field enter the IP Address of the trap recipient 6 To override the default User Datagram Protocol UDP port number for a trap recipient with any legal decimal
63. and delete views Select ing from views should always be allowed unless restricted by the assign ment of Views in the Group definition in the Users dialog box No Privilege Disables the Create View Copy View Edit View Delete View and Connec tivity View commands in the View gt Manage View menu and the first tab header on the main desk top Allows you to select an assigned views but not create or change Read Only Enables the Create View and Edit View commands in the View gt Manage View menu and the first tab header on the main desktop however dis ables the OK button in the Create View and Edit View dialog boxes Disables the Copy View Delete View and Connectivity View gt Create and Refresh com mands Allows you to select an assigned views but not create or change Read Write Activates all view com mands in the View gt Man age View menu and the first tab header on the main desktop Enables all functions in the dialog boxes Virtual Fabric 282 Allows you to configure virtual switches and fab rics Disables the Virtual Switches command from the Configure menu However this does not restrict the Virtual Switches command in the Element Managers Enables the Virtual Switches command in the Configure menu however disables the Edit and OK buttons in the Virtual Switches dialog box Enables the Virtual Switches command in the Configure menu Enables all functions in
64. are some important notes about the Element Manager feature key for this release Enabling the Reset Configuration option through the Element Manager Maintenance menu clears all features that were enabled through the Configure Feature Key dialog box When you attempt to re install features using a feature key assigned for version M EOS 5 a warning displays that the feature key is not installed You must contact customer support to re assign a feature key Directors with M EOS 6 0 or later installed have feature keys for all previously purchased software features activated automatically Switches with M EOS 6 0 or later installed need a feature key to enable the Element Manager and any other additional keyed software features within the switch When you purchase additional software features for a Director or Switch you receive a new feature key that includes existing features purchased previously To activate the new features refer to the Configure Feature Key dialog box in the Switch or Director Element Manager User Manual EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Installing the Application 1 Installing the Application Follow these instructions to install the application on your system To migrate data from a previous version or for more information about upgrade considerations refer to the EFCM Upgrade Instructions The Upgrade Instructions are available on the documentation CD or if you run the documentation installer from
65. code loads are not available Firmware code loads are available Nicknames are not available Nicknames are available Performance information displays in the topology for example marching ants real time performance graphs and historical performance graphs Performance information displays in the topology for example marching ants real time performance graphs and historical performance graphs Port Fencing is not available Port Fencing is available Security Center is not available Security Center is available Show Route supported for the managed switches No Show Route support for the switches discovered via the target server Virtual Fabrics are discovered and displayed but cannot be con figured from the MoM server Virtual Fabrics is available Zoning is available Zoning Scope and Zoning Library contains selections for all dis covered fabrics as well as the discovered target servers Zoning is available Zoning Scope and Zoning Library contains selections for all discovered fabrics For all other features the MoM server has the same level of sup port as the Target server Discovering Data From Another EFCM Server To discover another server and manage a SAN with remote sites complete the following steps 1 Select Discover gt Setup The Discovery Setup dialog box displays 2 Click the Out of Band tab 3 Click Add The Address Properties dialog box displ
66. complete the following checklist to ensure that discovery was set up correctly 1 Verify IP connectivity by pinging the switch a Open the command prompt b From the Server type ping lt switch IP address gt 2 Verify the SNMP settings a Launch SANPilot or EFCM Basic by opening a web browser application and entering the IP address of the product as the Internet uniform resource locator URL NOTE SANPilot or EFCM Basic is only available for M model devices with M EOS For example http 10 1 1 11 b Login and click OK c Select Configure gt SNMP The Configure gt SNMP view displays Figure 32 SNMP Agent Enabled Disable Trap Recipient POR cancel FIGURE32 SNMP Settings in SANPilot or EFCM Basic d Verify that the SNMP Agent is enabled e Verify that the Name field displays public or matches the SAN Management application configuration 152 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Troubleshooting Discovery 4 3 Verify the product data a Select Product gt Hardware The Product gt Hardware view displays product properties Front View Rear View Name Description Fibre Channel Switch Location End User Premise please configure Contact End User Contact please configure World Wide Name 1000080088A050A5 Type Number 003016 Model Number 001 Manufacturer MCO Serial Number TEST3016 EC Level 1050708 Firmware Level 09 07 00 18 FIGURE 33 Produ
67. dialog box enter your user ID and password and click Login Click OK on the EFCM Login Banner Review the Software Release Notes document Set up the application to discover a SAN using the instructions in Setting Up Discovery on page 139 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Backing Up and Restoring Data 1 Backing Up and Restoring Data The SAN Management application helps you to protect your SAN data by backing it up automatically The data can then be restored as necessary NOTE Backing up data takes some time It is possible that in a disaster recovery situation configuration changes made after the last backup interval will be missing from the backup The SAN Management application allows you to view the backup status at a glance initiate immediate backup enable or disable automatic backup reconfigure the backup directory interval and start time and retrieve backup events What is Backed Up The backed up data is contained in the following directories e lt install_Home gt Call Home e lt install_Home gt Client e lt install_Home gt Resources e lt install_Home gt Server NOTE lt lnstall_Home gt refers to the directory where the SAN Management application is installed The data in those directories is automatically backed up to disk The data includes the following items e All data saved through the Export function e All log files e All plans saved through the Planning function
68. ecto tin n a e Aa A 217 Exporting Log Datas esses esae ee eee ee 217 Deleting Group LOgS 0 cece eee eee 218 Viewing the Fabric Log 2 0 0 0 cee ee eee eee 218 Filtering Events in the Master Log 20 0 0005 218 Copying Log EntrieS 0 0 2 c eee 219 Using Event Notification Features 000 eee eee 220 Configuring E mail Notification 000005 220 Enabling Ethernet Events 0 000 e eee eee eee eee 222 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Creating REPONSES iana a Qa ee AE 223 Generating ReportS 0 0 cece eee 224 Viewing Reports 26 secre ee iv ee eee wuna eee ee 225 Printing REPOMS sitet Girt nied Oe bee ein Mein AE 226 Printing a Connectivity Map Report 5 226 Deleting REPOMS gyri wees paa A aA each 227 Generating Router ReportS 0c ee eee eee 227 Generating Zone Library ReportS 00 000eee 228 AppendixA Troubleshooting Mithis Append ec densctan Sead tee ate sohad een deed fis Seas a 229 Problems with AddreSSe S 0000 c eee eee eee 229 Problems with Discovery 00 cece eee eee eee 230 Problems with Fabric Binding 00 c cee eee eee eee 233 Problems with LUNS erscidve opel iene cok ae ai Ao aiae cedars 233 Problems with Products 000 cece eee eee eee eens 234 Miscellaneous ProblemS 0000 eee eee eee eee 234 Appendix B Editing Configuration Properti
69. example Label or user defined for example Cabinet Color Non editable properties are not imported for example Port Count Non existent columns are ignored The format is space sensitive only commas are used as separators so trim leading or trailing spaces unless you want to import them as part of the data To import port properties use the Port Name column header Port import only allows the Port Nickname property to be set For step by step instructions about importing properties refer to Importing Properties on page 120 NOTE You cannot import fabric type user defined properties because both the Fabric WWN and the Switch WWN share the same WWN When a WWN is imported using the CSV format the WWN refers to the Switch rather than the Fabric You can edit the user defined properties at the Fabric Level in the SAN Management application e Server HBA Mappings csv Imports Server HBA Mappings into the existing Fabric Map The general format for this import is in CSV ASCII format The first row contains the header for the file which does not effect the import process however text must be present The first two fields must be the WorldWideNodeName WWNN then the Server Nickname If either of these fields WWNN or Server Nickname have no text in them the Server HBA Mapping entry is considered null and is not imported All additional fields are ignored during the import process The format is space sensitive only commas are used a
70. following actions Select Filter to view only the events specified in the Define Filter dialog box regardless of the current view Select Only events in current view to view only the events specified in the Define Filter dialog box for products in the current view Clear both the Filter and Only events in current view check boxes to turn off the filter and view all events NOTE Selecting these options only filters product specific events Copying Log Entries You can copy data and column headings from logs to other applications Use this function to analyze or store the data using another tool NOTE When using the View Logs dialog box you can only copy one row ata time To copy multiple rows of data copy the data from the Master Log on the main window Copying Rows 1 Inthe log window select the rows you want to copy To select contiguous rows select the first row you want to copy and Shift click in the last contiguous row you want to copy To select non contiguous rows select the first row you want to copy and CTRLclick every additional row you want to copy Press CTRL C to copy the selected information on the clipboard in tab delimited format Open the application you want to paste the data into Click where you want to paste the data Ol Re N Press CTRL V or select the Paste command from the other application All data and column headings are pasted EFC Manager Software User Manual 219
71. following steps 1 10 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays In the Call Home Centers table select the call home center you want to edit Click Edit Centers beneath the Call Home Centers table The Configure Call Home Center dialog box displays In the Call Home Centers list select Brocade North America or HP Modem Select Enable to enable this call home center In the Call Home Center Phone Number field enter the phone number or extension of the call home center In the Local Server Phone Number field enter the phone number or extension of the local server Click Send Test to test the phone number The selected call home center must be enabled to test the phone number Click OK The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays with the call home center you edited highlighted in the Call Home Centers table Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box Editing the EMC Call Home Center To edit a call home center complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays 2 Inthe Call Home Centers table select the call home center you want to edit 3 Click Edit Centers beneath the Call Home Centers table The Configure Call Home Center dialog box displays 4 Inthe Call Home Centers list select EMC
72. for SNMP Trap Events 242 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select SNMP Trap Listening In the SNMP Listening Port field change the SNMP listening port number to the new number Click OK NOTE Changes to this option take effect after a application reboot 5 Restart the application for your changes to take effect To forwarding SNMP traps to other applications refer to Configuring Trap Forwarding on page 197 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Icon Legend In this Appendix C Various icons are used to illustrate devices and connections in a SAN The following tables list icons that display on the Connectivity Map Product Icons The following table lists the manageable SAN product icons that display on the topology Some of the icons shown in Table 22 only display when certain features are licensed When a manageable product is administered by another Server the Generic icon displays TABLE 22 Icon Product Icons Description Sphereon 3016 Switch Icon Description Sphereon 3032 Switch Sphereon 3216 Switch Sphereon 3232 Switch Sphereon 4300 Switch Sphereon 4710 Switch Sphereon 4400 Switch Sphereon 4500 Switch M4700F Switch 00e ek ee B model Switch Intrepid 6064 Director B model Director M6140 Director Mi1OK Director Mi1OK Director Partition a aa Mi1OK Director Partition Disabled
73. from a previous version of EFCM SANavigator HAFM or SAN Manager refer to the EFCM Upgrade Instructions Pre Installation e To avoid errors close all instances of the application before beginning the installation or uninstallation procedures If you still receive error messages after closing the application enter the following commands ps ef grep i lists the process ID kill 9 process ID e Check for and install the latest patches for your operating system For the web sites listing patch information refer to Table 12 TABLE 12 Operating System Patch Information Locations Platform URL for Patch Information Solaris http java sun com j2se 1 4 2 download html e Solaris only To use IPv6 on a server that is IPv4 and IPv6 enabled complete the following steps a Open a command window b Type ifconfig lt interface name gt inet6 plumb up and press Enter c Restart the SAN Management server and client if running If the IPv6 address is not configured properly the client will show a Server Not Available at port 51511 message even though the server started successfully e Make sure that an X Server is available for display and is configured to permit X Client applications to display from the host on which they are installing the EFCM Server typically this simply requires that the systems console be present and running with a logged in user on the X Server based desktop session such as KDE GNOME and so o
74. hub ports H_Ports on the arbitrated loop device notify other devices and the switch of the presence in the loop by sending LIP sequences and subsequent frames through the loop This process allows linked arbitrated loop devices to perform fabric loop port FL_Port arbitration as they link through hub ports loop master In an arbitrated loop device a reference to the loop master World Wide Name WWN field in the Loop View the loop master is the arbitrated loop device that is responsible for allocating arbitrated loop physical addresses AL PAs on the loop An arbitrated loop device becomes the loop master through arbitration when there are multiple arbitrated loop devices on the loop The arbitrated loop device with the lowest WWN becomes the loop master 314 loop switches Loop switches support node loop port NL_Port Fibre Channel protocols Switches sold as loop support but upgradeable to fabric switches recounted as loop switches loop port L_Port Synonym for hub port loopback plug In a fiber optic environment a type of duplex connector used to wrap the optical output signal of a device directly to the optical input Synonymous with wrap plug loopback test Test that checks attachment or control unit circuitry without checking the mechanism itself by returning the output of the mechanism as input L_Port Loop port Synonym for hub port LSN See logical switch number LUN See logical unit number MAC
75. is now associated with the selected server 4 Click OK to save your changes and close the Create servers and assign HBAs dialog box On the Physical Map the HBA displays in the server Unassociating an HBA from a Server 1 On the Physical Map right click an HBA icon and select Server HBA Mapping from the menu The Create servers and assign HBAs dialog box displays 2 Select the HBA from the Servers table on the right and click the left arrow The HBA you selected is removed from the Servers table and the HBA is no longer associated with the server 3 Click OK to save your changes and close the Create servers and assign HBAs dialog box On the Physical Map the HBA displays on its own EFC Manager Software User Manual 77 53 1000663 03 3 Configuring a Server Renaming a Server You can rename Servers that display on the Physical Map 1 On the Physical Map right click an HBA icon and select Server HBA Mapping from the menu The Create servers and assign HBAs dialog box displays Click once on the Server name in the Servers table on the right Edit the Server name Press Enter The Server s new name displays on the Physical Map Deleting a Server You can delete Servers that display on the Physical Map 1 On the Physical Map right click an HBA icon and select Server HBA Mapping from the menu The Create servers and assign HBAs dialog box displays 2 From the Servers table on the right select the Server you want to d
76. of connected ports in the SAN as well as detailed usage information for each port Fabric Ports Lists fabric details including port and director utilization and individual product data Storage Device Summary Lists the assigned and free LUNs for the storage being managed through the application LUN Masking Summary Lists the number of host ports and storage devices in the SAN as well as the nicknames of hosts with zero assigned LUNs You must have the LUN Management feature for this report LUN Management is an optional module available to previous LUN Management licensed customers Departmental Storage Allocation Lists the storage allocation for the entire SAN the number of servers on the SAN for each department number of unique LUNs assigned to those servers the total size of all of those unique LUNs and a total percentage for each department You must have the LUN Management feature for this report LUN Management is an optional module available to previous LUN Management licensed customers The following device specific reports are available through the Monitor menu and right click menus Consistency Requires a SAN router Compares the configuration of the SAN Routers in a group and highlights the inconsistencies iFCP Connections and Zones Requires a SAN router Displays all the links in the fabric which includes the links from both primary and secondary router LUN Mapping Requires a SAN router Displays LUN information
77. of the address on a configuration matrix allowed blocked or prohibited Audit Log Log summarizing actions audit trail made by the user Director or switch Audit Log Log displayed through the Element Manager application that provides a history of all configuration changes made to an individual director or switch from the respective Element Manager application a simple network management protocol SNMP management workstation a Fibre Connection FICON or open systems host or the maintenance port This information is useful for administrators and users availability The accessibility of a computer system or network resource b See bit B See byte backup To copy files to a second medium disk or tape as a precaution in case the first medium fails backup diskette A diskette that contains duplicate information from an original diskette The backup diskette is used in case information on the original diskette is unintentionally changed or destroyed D backup field replaceable unit Backup FRU When an active FRU fails an identical backup FRU takes over operation automatically failover to maintain director or switch and Fibre Channel link operation See also active field replaceable unit backup FRU See backup field replaceable unit 298 bandwidth 1 The amount of data that can be sent over a given circuit 2 A measure of how fast a network can move information usually measured in Hertz Hz bau
78. on the Monitor menu and the E mail Event Notification Setup button in the Users dialog box Currently asks Are you sure you want to assign Event Management privi leges to this group that does not otherwise have read write for E mail Event Notification Setup Enables the Event Notifi cation E mail command on the Monitor menu and the E mail Event Notifica tion Setup button in the Users dialog box Allows you to open the E Mail Event Notification Setup dialog box however dis ables the OK button Enables Event Notifica tion E mail command on the Monitor menu and the E mail Event Notification Setup button in the Users dialog box Enables all functions in the E Mail Event Notifica tion Setup dialog box Enterprise Fabric Mode Event Management Allows you to activate Fabric Binding Switch Binding Insistent Domain ID and Domain RSCN s Allows you to define rules with event triggers and actions EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Disables the Enterprise Fabric Mode command from Configure menu Disables the Event Man agement tab Allows you to open the Enterprise Fabric Mode dialog box however dis ables the OK button Enables access to the Event Management tab and allows existing rules to be selected and viewed Disables all action but tons on the tab Enables Enterprise Fab ric Mode command from Configure menu Enables all functions in the Enterprise F
79. on a high speed local area network LAN communication environment D See also Internet protocol trap Unsolicited notification of an event originating from a simple network management protocol SNMP managed device and directed to an SNMP network management station trap host Simple network management protocol SNMP management workstation that is configured to receive traps translated loop port Connects to a private loop and allows connectivity between the private loop devices and off loop devices devices not connected to that particular TL_Port trap recipient Receiver of a forwarded SNMP trap Specifically a trap receiver is defined by an IP address and port to which traps are sent Presumably the actual recipient is a software application running at the IP address and listening to the port trap recipient In simple network management protocol SNMP Receiver of a forwarded SNMP trap Specifically a trap receiver is defined by an IP address and port to which traps are sent Presumably the actual recipient is a software application running at the IP address and listening to the port U UDP See user datagram protocol unblocked connection In a director or switch the absence of the blocked attribute for a specific port Contrast with blocked connection See connectivity attribute See also allowed connection dynamic connection dynamic connectivity 323 Glossary unblocked port Devices com
80. platform You can also export to disk or e mail For instructions for exporting to disk or e mail refer to Exporting Data to Disk or E mail on page 109 1 Configure your SAN Management application for exporting to a database For more information refer to Setting Up for Exporting to a MySQL Database on page 115 and Setting Up for Exporting to a DB2 Database on page 115 2 Select SAN gt Export The Export Discovered SAN dialog box displays a list of file types that can be exported and their sizes 3 From the Export To list select e MySQL Exports data to a MySQL database You must have a MySQL database set up to use this feature e DB2 Exports data to a DB2 database You must have a DB2 database set up to use this feature EFC Manager Software User Manual 113 53 1000663 03 3 114 Export and Import 4 Select the types of files you want to export NOTE Some file types may not be available based on the export destination you selected in the previous step SAN Files Exports the SAN files Performance Data Exports the performance data Performance Monitoring is a feature of the Advanced Module which is an Enterprise Edition only optional module Please contact your sales representative to order the Advanced Module NOTE When exporting to Disk or E mail this option is subordinate to SAN Files When exporting to MySQL or DB2 it is independent of SAN Files 5 Enter information in the foll
81. provide marketing support exhibits and tradeshows for its member companies The FCIA complements activities of the various standards committees Fibre Channel I O controller FCC IOC In a director the integrated controller on the control processor CTP card dedicated to the task of managing the embedded Fibre Channel port In a director or switch the FCC IOC controls the embedded Fibre Channel port and configures the ports application specific integrated circuits ASICs Fibre Channel IP address FC IP The default FC IP on a new switch is a temporary number divided by the switch s world wide name WWN The system administrator needs to enter a valid IP address Fibre Channel management framework integration FCMGMT A standard defined by the Fibre Alliance to provide easy management for Fibre Channel based products such as switches hubs and host bus adapters 307 Glossary Fibre Channel physical and signaling interface FC PH The American National Standards Institute ANSI document that specifies the FC O physical signaling FC 1 data encoding and FC 2 frame construct layers of the Fibre Channel protocol D Fibre Channel protocol for SCSI FCP FCP defines a high level Fibre Channel mapping layer FC 4 that uses lower level Fibre Channel FC PH services to transmit SCSI command data and status information between a SCSI initiator and a SCSI target across the FC link using FC frame and sequence for
82. recently used instructions and data for fast access The larger the cache the more information that can be stored and the fewer time consuming memory accesses a central processing unit CPU must make to complete a task Cache is very fast memory typically static random access memory SRAM call home Product feature which enables the server platform to automatically contact a support center and report system problems The support center server accepts calls from the server platform logs reported events and can notify one or more support center representatives capacity The amount of information measured in bytes that can be stored on a hard drive cascade Linking two or more Fibre Channel switches to form a larger switch or fabric The switched link through fiber cables attached between one or more expansion ports E_Ports See also expansion port cell In FICON management style in a port address matrix a cell is the intersection point between a horizontal port address and a vertical port address A selected cell is indicated by the cell cursor 300 central memory module card CMM In the Director a circuit card that provides the storage area for Fibre Channel ports to deposit and retrieve Fibre Channel frames Each port is allocated a portion of this memory divided into a fixed number of frame buffers central processing unit CPU The heart of the computer this is the component that actually executes instructio
83. screen select one of the following options e Partial Uninstall Configuration and performance data is retained to be re used by the new installation e Full Uninstall All data is removed Click Uninstall On the Uninstall Complete screen click Done Uninstalling from UNIX Systems 1 Goto lt nstall_Home gt Uninstall_EFCM_9 7 Execute Uninstall_EFCM_9 7 On the Uninstall Option screen select one of the following options e Partial Uninstall Configuration and performance data is retained to be re used by the new installation e Full Uninstall All data is removed 4 Click Uninstall On the Uninstall Complete screen click Done EFC Manager Software User Manual 21 53 1000663 03 1 22 Uninstalling the Application Headless Uninstall from UNIX Systems If the application was installed using the headless installation complete the following steps to uninstall 1 Goto lt nstall_Home gt Uninstall_EFCM_9 7 2 Execute Uninstall_EFCM_9 7 i console 3 Choose from the following install sets and press Enter 1 partial Uninstall Configuration and performance data is retained to be re used by the new installation 2 full Uninstall in the Terminal All data is removed EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Starting the Application 1 Starting the Application Follow these instructions to start the application Starting EFCM on Windows Systems Only use this procedure if
84. select Element Manager or Element Management HTML e On the Physical Map double click a manageable product s icon NOTE When you open the Element Manager for the Sphereon 4300 Fabric Switch the EFCM Basic application also opens NOTE If you encounter problems ensure that only one copy of the application is being used to monitor and manage the device Only one copy of the application should be used to monitor and manage the same devices in a subnet 162 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Managing Products 5 Searching for Products in a SAN You can search a discovered SAN for a specific product by its properties such as name or IP address 1 Enter the search parameter in the Search box on the toolbar Figure 35 Search FIGURE 35 Search Box 2 Click the up or down arrow to search forwards or backwards through the Physical Map 3 Click Search to find each product NOTE When the application finds a product on the Physical Map it highlights the product on the Physical Map as well as on the Product List Changing Product Properties You can change some of the properties for online products NOTE If the product you selected is offline you will not be able to edit this information NOTE This process does not change the configuration of the product It only changes the information that is stored on the local Server 1 On the Physical Map right click a product icon and select Properties from
85. that can be accessed and used by the layer above Layers are independent in that implementation of a layer can be changed without affecting other layers D open systems management server OSMS An optional feature that can be enabled on the director or switch through the Element Manager application When enabled host control and management of the director or switch are provided through an Open System Interconnection OSI device attached to a director or switch port open systems management style The mode that is used for open fabrics See also management style FICON management style operating system OS Software that controls execution of applications and provides services such as resource allocation scheduling 1 0 control and data management Most operating systems are predominantly software but partial hardware implementations are possible D T Operating System 390 0S 390 An integrated open enterprise server operating system developed by IBM that incorporates a leading edge and open communications server distributed data and file services parallel Sysplex support object oriented programming distributed computing environment and open application interfaces D original equipment manufacturer OEM A company that has a special relationship with computer producers OEMs buy components and customize them for a particular application They sell the customized computer under their own name OEMs may not ac
86. the SMTP Server Settings Server Name field enter the name of the server In the SMTP Server Settings Port field enter the port number of the server In the SMTP Server Settings Username field enter a username Optional field unless the SMTP server authentication is enabled In the SMTP Server Settings Password field enter a password Optional field unless the SMTP server authentication is enabled In the E mail Notification Settings Reply Address field enter the e mail address for replies In the E mail Notification Settings Send To Address field enter the customer e mail address Click Send Test to test the phone number The selected call home center must be enabled to test the phone number Click OK The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays with the call home center you edited highlighted in the Call Home Centers table Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box Enabling a Call Home Center To enable a call home center complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays In the Call Home Centers table select the Enable check box of the call home center you want to enable Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box Testing the Call Home Center Connection Once you add and enable a call home center you should verify that call home is functiona
87. the documentation CD you can access this document in lt Install_Home gt docs TIP On Windows systems if you run the documentation installer you can also access documentation through the Windows Start menu Browse to the application s submenu and select Documentation NOTE SANavigator Software and EFCM Software cannot be run on the same machine even if one of the products is running as a service Installing on Windows Systems Follow these instructions to install the application on Windows Servers NOTE If you are upgrading from a previous version of EFCM SANavigator HAFM or SAN Manager refer to the EFCM Upgrade Instructions Pre Installation To avoid errors close all instances of the application before beginning the installation or uninstallation procedures Installation 1 Insert the installation CD into the CD ROM drive If autorun is enabled the installer will begin automatically If autorun is not enabled open the following file lt CD drive gt EFCM97_win install exe 2 On the Introduction screen click Next 3 On the Choose Install Set screen select Server and Client or Client and click Next NOTE If you select Client the installer will skip the steps that are not required 4 On the Select Install Folder screen select the usual location for your system s application files for example C Program Files and click Next NOTE Do not select the installation folder for the previous version NOT
88. the frame sniffer to run Select a condition from the Condition list Select a mathematical operator The Mask Value and Word Offset fields specify criteria that the application uses to find the condition s location in the frame To enter your own values in the Mask Value or Word Offset fields select User Defined from the Condition list 201 5 Configuring Frame Sniffer 10 Enter the match string in the Match String field The match string is the frame value that you are seeking For example if you select Source ID as the condition and only want to consider source ID of 44FF7R enter a match string of 44FF7R 11 Click OK Your settings are validated If no issues are found the new test displays on the Frame Sniffer dialog box Running a Frame Sniffer Test NOTE Frame Sniffer procedures should only be performed by advanced users and are only available with M Model manageable switches running M EOS 5 0 or higher For a list of manageable devices refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 You can run tests on a selected switch port 1 Select Monitor gt Frame Sniffer The Frame Sniffer dialog box displays From the Switch list select the switch on which you want to run the test From the Port list select the switch on which you want to run the test In the Sniffer Tests table select the tests you want to run Press CTRL and click to make multiple selections 5 Click Run The tests are queued to run and Run
89. the menu The product s Properties dialog box displays Click the Properties tab Edit information as necessary When finished click OK to update the product s properties on the local Server EFC Manager Software User Manual 163 53 1000663 03 5 164 Managing Products Determining a Product s Operational Status You can determine a product s operational status by looking at the Physical Map or the Product List Both the Physical Map and the Product List enable you to determine a product s operational status by looking at the associated icons Table 19 TABLE 19 Product Status Icons Icon Status No icon Healthy Operational Attention Degraded Marginal Device Added Device Removed Missing Down Failed Routed In Routed Out Unknown Link Down CIN v o oee Virtual Switch To see a list of all products requiring attention click the Attention Indicator icon aTh on the Status bar at the bottom of the main window The Service Request dialog box displays with a list of the names and IP addresses of devices needing attention Click a product name hyperlink to jump to the product on the Physical Map The list updates dynamically EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Managing Products 5 Showing Routes Between Two End Products NOTE This feature is only available for fabrics consisting solely of manageable M model products refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243
90. the principal switch determines which fabric is mapped to the persistent fabric The fabric that includes the principal switch is mapped to the persistent fabric Layout Changes in Persisted Fabrics When you move a product in a persisted fabric s topology the new positions are stored on the Client If you log in to the Server from a different Client you lose the layout of the products if the fabric is not persisted with the layout changes EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Trap Forwarding 5 Finding Devices in a Persisted Fabric When a product is removed from a persisted fabric it displays a ghost image with a minus icon Right click the icon and select Find Product The focus jumps to the online item that corresponds to the ghost image from the original fabric Configuring Trap Forwarding Trap forwarding is the process by which you can configure the application to send SNMP traps to other computers To correctly configure trap forwarding you must configure the target computer s IP address and SNMP ports in the Configure Trap Forwarding dialog box Configuring Trap Forwarding 1 Select Monitor gt Trap Forwarding The Configure Trap Forwarding dialog box displays Figure 55 _ Enable Trap Forwarding Available Recipients Selected Recipients Description IP Address Port Description P Address Port OK Cancel Help FIGURE55 Configure Trap Forwarding Dialog Box 2 If ne
91. this Appendix D Forcing All Clients to Be Polling To force all Clients communicating with a Server to be treated as polling Clients regardless of the parameters the Clients launch with edit the Server config properties file located in the lt nstall_Home gt resources Server directory Edit the smp callback passive parameter as in the following example 1 Open the lt nstall_Home gt resources Server config properties file using a text editor for example Notepad 2 Goto the following lines Force all Clients communicating with a Server to be treated as polling Clients regardless of their startup parameters Enable by un commenting this parameter smp callback passive He th FE te 3 Remove the pound sign in front of the smp callback passive line Force all Clients communicating with a Server to be treated as polling Clients regardless of their startup parameters Enable by un commenting this parameter smp callback passive 4 Save the file and restart the server EFC Manager Software User Manual 251 53 1000663 03 D In this Appendix Configuring TCP Port Numbers to Allow Firewall Access This section provides details about configuring TCP port numbers for RMI Servers and Registries to allow EFCM Client and Server application to function across firewalls EFCM with RMI at TCP Port Level The RMI protocol lies between the EFCM application and the TCP IP layer as shown in the following ta
92. to an optical or amplified electrical serial data stream Contains connector for attaching fiber optic cable gigabyte GB A unit of measure for data storage equal to 1 073 741 824 bytes Generally approximated as one billion bytes D gigahertz GHz One billion cycles per second Hertz D GPM card See generic port module card G_Port See generic port graphical user interface GUI A visually oriented interface where the user interacts with representations of real world objects displayed on the computer screen Interactions with such objects produce actions that are intuitive to the user D GSM card A generic port G_Port module card containing shortwave laser ports for multimode fiber optic cables GUI See graphical user interface H H_Port See hub port hard drive An electromechanical product used for information storage and retrieval incorporating one or more rotating disks on which data is recorded stored and read magnetically 309 Glossary Hardware Log Director or switch Hardware Log Log displayed through the Element Manager application that provides a history of FRU removals and replacements insertions for an individual director or switch The information is useful to maintenance personnel for fault isolation and repair verification See also Audit Log master log Link Incident Log Threshold Alert Log hardware Physical equipment director switch or personal computer as op
93. to move the switches to the Available Switches table NOTE If you segment a fabric the Fabric s nickname follows the assigned principal switch 4 Click OK EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 181 5 Port Fencing Port Fencing 182 Port Fencing allows you to protect your SAN from repeated operational or security problems experienced by ports Use Port Fencing to set threshold limits ISL Protocol Link and Security for the number of specific port events permitted during a given time period on the selected object Port Fencing objects include Fabrics Directors Switches physical Virtual Switches Port Types E Port F Port and Fx Port as well as Ports Use Port Fencing to directly assign a threshold to these objects When a switch does not support Port Fencing a No Fencing Changes message displays in the Threshold field in the Ports table If the port generates more events during the specified time period the SAN Management application blocks the port disabling transmit and receive traffic until you investigate solve the problem and manually unblock the port NOTE Port Fencing displays any existing thresholds discovered on manageable fabrics directors and switches running firmware versions M EOS 7 0 supports ISL Protocol only and 8 0 and above supports ISL Protocol Link and Security Physical fabrics directors switches port types and ports display when you have the privileges to mana
94. txt 5 Execute md5sum install bin gt gt system txt 6 Execute df k gt gt system txt 7 Execute sh c xterm e echo nothing gt gt system txt 2 gt 61 8 Execute env gt gt system txt 9 Execute sh c DISPLAY 0 0 xterm e echo nothing gt gt system txt 2 gt amp 1 10 Execute zip supportl zip efcm9install txt system txt Send the support1 zip file output from the above containing efcm9install txt and system txt to Technical Support This will assist us in isolating the issue EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Uninstalling the Application 1 Uninstalling the Application This section provides step by step instructions to uninstall the application from both Windows and UNIX systems NOTE This version of EFCM is installed on a separate directory from your previous version therefore you do not have to uninstall the previous version immediately However you cannot run both versions simultaneously Uninstalling from Windows Systems Follow these instructions to uninstall the application from your Windows system 1 Select Start gt Programs gt EFCM 9 7 gt Uninstall EFCM If any related services such as Client exe or ClientD exe are still running the following Warning message displays Uninstall will stop all the EFCM services and shut down the application if it is running Do you want to proceed Click Yes to close all services and continue uninstall 2 On the Uninstall Option
95. you selected EFC Manager Software User Manual 107 53 1000663 03 3 108 Customizing Device Properties Showing Only Property Fields with Data NOTE Not available in the Planned SAN view You can show all fields that contain data on any of the tabs from the Properties dialog box 1 Right click any product icon and select Properties The Properties dialog box displays Select the tab on which you want to show a property Right click the label above where you want the properties to show Select Show then select Show All With Data All properties in the Show list that contain data display beneath the label you selected EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Export and Import 3 Export and Import The import and export features are important functions of the application You can import and export data for many reasons including to communicate issues to the support center and capture network status NOTE You can export to and import from only the same releases of the application You can export files from the SAN Management application to a MySQL or an IBM DB2 database To set up the third party databases refer to the following instructions Exporting Data to Disk or E mail The Export Discovered SAN dialog box displays a list of file types that can be exported and their sizes You can export various SAN files to a disk or e mail You can also export to database such as MySQL or DB2 For instruction
96. you selected Out of Band Discovery continue with step 8 e If you only selected In Band Discovery go to step 12 Click the Out of Band tab Figure 27 General out of band Available Addresses Selected Subnets E E Description iP Address Communty RDC Address Product 7 Description P Address _ Subnet Mask Community RDC Adal 17216 3 78 Default Switch 17216 3 78 255 255 255 0 Default i 4 4 si dls gt Selected Individual Addresses _ E R Description IP Address Discovery Status A iis Led Add Cancel Help FIGURE 27 Discover Setup Dialog Box Out of Band Tab 9 Specify the IP addresses you want to discover through out of band discovery NOTE If you change the password on the Switch or Director you must enter the new password during discovery on the Product Type and Access tab of the Address Properties dialog box ATTENTION To correctly discover all SAN products you must specify each product s IP address or a Subnet in the Discover Setup dialog box s Out of Band tab If you do not configure the application to discover the devices directly the connections and attached devices may not display correctly EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 10 11 12 13 Setting the Polling Delay 4 Select IP addresses from the Available Addresses table and click the right arrow to add them to the Selected Subnets or Selected Individual Addresses tables Click Add to
97. 04 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Frame Sniffer 5 Deleting a Frame Sniffer Test NOTE Frame Sniffer procedures should only be performed by advanced users and are only available with M Model manageable switches running M EOS 5 0 or higher For a list of manageable devices refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 You can remove tests that count frames passed by a switch port that meet certain criteria 1 Select Monitor gt Frame Sniffer The Frame Sniffer dialog box displays 2 Select the test you want to remove NOTE Tests that have running sessions are not deleted Click Delete 4 Click OK Deleting a Frame Sniffer Session NOTE Frame Sniffer procedures should only be performed by advanced users and are only available with M Model manageable switches running M EOS 5 0 or higher For a list of manageable devices refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 You can remove frame sniffer sessions 1 Select Monitor gt Frame Sniffer The Frame Sniffer dialog box displays 2 Select the session you want to remove NOTE Running sessions are not deleted Click Delete 4 Click OK EFC Manager Software User Manual 205 53 1000663 03 5 206 Configuring Frame Sniffer Refreshing the Frame Sniffer NOTE Frame Sniffer procedures should only be performed by advanced users and are only available with M Model manageable switches running M EOS 5 0 or higher For a list of manageable devi
98. 139 e Setting the Polling Delay 0 0 0 cee eee 141 e Configuring Address Properties 0 00 c eee eee eee eee 142 e Turning Discovery On and Off 0 0 ccc eee 151 e Determining the Discovery State 0 00 cece eee eee 151 Troubleshooting Discovery 0 cece eee eee 152 e Configuring Storage Port Mapping 000 c eee eee eee 155 EFC Manager Software User Manual 131 53 1000663 03 4 How Discovery Works How Discovery Works Discovery is the process by which the application contacts the devices in your SAN When you log in to a Server the local network is automatically discovered and displayed on the Physical Map When you configure and turn on discovery the application discovers products connected to the SAN The application illustrates each product and its connections on the Physical Map topology For details refer to Setting Up Discovery on page 139 The SAN Management application enables you to discover devices using Out of Band and In Band discovery For detailed information refer to Out of Band Discovery on page 132 and In Band Discovery on page 132 Out of Band Discovery When performing out of band discovery the application connects to the switches through the IP network and product information is copied from the SNS database on the switch to the Server To correctly discover all SAN products you must specify each product s IP address or a subnet on the Ou
99. 18 per user 92 329 finding products 163 topics in help 52 finding users 99 firewall configuration forcing port in RMI registry 253 forcing server and client port number 253 TCP port numbers for RMI 252 flyovers turning on and off 104 frame sniffer configuring 199 events in log 199 refreshing 206 session deleting 205 stopping 203 test adding 201 deleting 205 editing 204 running 202 stopping 203 frame sniffer feature 285 G generating reports 224 generating router reports 227 generating zone library reports 228 ghost products finding corresponding real products 197 group manager create event log feature 285 group manager firmware install feature 285 group manager run data collection feature 285 groups assigning users 98 creating for users 94 determining 99 editing for users 96 finding users in 99 removing users 99 groups icons 245 330 H HBAs associating to servers 77 unassociating 77 Help menu 66 hide routes overview 166 HISTORICALPERFORMANCE table for MySQL 259 host bus adapter icon 244 host group icon 245 host icon 244 HOST table for MySQL 259 HOSTHBAS table for MySQL 260 HOSTLUNS table for MySQL 261 HP UX uninstalling from 22 hub icon 244 icons ASM switch 244 blade switch 244 bridge 244 bridge group 245 device 243 director 243 244 enclosure group 245 fabric group 245 FCIP bridge 244 FCIP bridge group 245 FCIP gateway 244
100. 2 Configuring Reset Display SettingS 0 83 Configuring Software SettingS 0 cece ee eee 84 Managing USES iiaiai teeta ied Senet ene ey eae ee E ee 89 Viewing the List of USers 1 0 2 eee ee 89 Adding a User Account 0 020 c eee eee eee eee 90 Changing a User Account 00 0c cece eee eee 91 Removing a User Account 00 00 cece eee ee eee 91 Filtering Event Notifications for a User 4 92 Setting Up Advanced Event Filtering 005 93 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Managing User GroupS 2 2 0 ce ee eee 94 Creating a User Group 2 ee eee 94 Editing a User Group 0 eee eee 96 Removing a User Group 0 0 0 cece eee 97 Assigning Users to GroupS 0000 eee eee 98 Removing a User from a Group 2 000 eee 99 Finding a User s GroupS 000 e eee eee eee 99 Configuring Remote ACCESS 00 2 cece eee 100 Viewing Active User SeSSIONS 0000 c eee 101 Partitioned Switch Support 0 0 cee eee eee 102 Viewing the Logical Configuration of Devices 102 Customizing the Main Window 00e eee eee eee 103 Zooming In and Out of the Physical Map 103 Showing Levels of Detail on the Physical Map 104 Turning Flyovers On or Off 2 2 2 0 00 cece eee eee 104 Viewing FIYOVerS 1 0 0 0 cee tee 104 Customizing Device Properties
101. 2 View users and the network addresses from which they connected 3 Optional Select a user and click Disconnect User to disconnect the user from the Server The Server immediately shuts down the Server Client connection The status bar on the Client displays that the Server connection was lost When the client is disconnected the user sees a message and is logged out NOTE To prevent this user from reconnecting remove the user account through the EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box For instructions refer to Removing a User Account on page 91 EFC Manager Software User Manual 101 53 1000663 03 3 Partitioned Switch Support Partitioned Switch Support 102 Release 9 7 displays the logical configurations of partitioned switches Remember the following when viewing logical configurations on the topology The physical set of Cisco switches display in isolated switches All current view settings are used when displaying logical configurations Partitioned switches are identified by their logical WWNs not their physical WWNs Cisco switch element managers provide the physical information about the switches and fabrics All port information is equivalent to the physical port information Viewing the Logical Configuration of Devices You can view the logical configuration virtual SANs of devices on the Topology Physical Map and Product List 1 Locate the virtual SAN on the topology or the Product List 2 View swit
102. 3 Appendix Reference C In this Appendix This appendix provides useful reference information e Compatibility with Other Applications cccsccsseececsssceeeeneceneeeeesereenees 242 e Changing the TCP IP Port for SNMP Trap EV Nts 1 cccssccsscceseeeees 242 ICOM LO SCN sccssscccssscsscecescssecsesccascesesscsazecascsesvesdaecascntecceseutaaesesscestazestec 243 Keyboard SHOMCUIS areae eaa Eeee EAA E Ea Eaua 247 EFC Manager Software User Manual 241 53 1000663 03 C In this Appendix Compatibility with Other Applications The application is designed to operate smoothly with other Enterprise applications and network monitoring programs Because this application has fully configurable SNMP trap listening and forwarding functions it can act as a primary or secondary network manager It can listen for trap events on any port and can forward traps to other network management software enabling easy integration into existing systems Only one software application can control a TCP IP port at a given time If the application is not the primary network management tool and you plan to run the application on the same computer you may need to reconfigure the application to listen for traps on a different port For instance if the primary network management software is configured to listen for traps on port 162 and forward them on port 3000 reconfigure the application to listen for traps on port 3000 Changing the TCP IP Port
103. 45 Disabling Extended Discovery 000e eee eee eee 146 Removing an IP Address 0 000 cece eee eee eee 147 Configuring an SNMP Community String 147 Reverting to a Default SNMP Community String 149 Configuring the Product Type and Access 149 Turning Discovery On and Off 0 0c e ee eee eee 151 Determining the Discovery State 0 0 e eee eee eee 151 Troubleshooting Discovery 0000 c eee ee eee eee 152 Configuring Storage Port Mapping 000 eee eee 155 Adding Storage Ports to a Storage Array 4 156 Removing Storage Port and Storage Array Associations 156 Reassigning Mapped Storage PortS 2 00005 157 Creating a Storage Array 0 0 cece 157 Editing Storage Array PropertieS 00000 eee 158 Deleting a Storage Array 0 0 cee eee 159 Viewing Storage Port PropertieS 020 eee 159 Viewing Storage Array Properties 00 000ee 160 Chapter 5 Configuring SAN Products and Fabrics In this Cha pte riteicas cee aie pale ee Wee eee Kalen eee His 161 Managing ProductS 0 cee eect eee eee 162 Determining Whether a Product is Being Managed 162 Opening a Product s Element Manager 162 Searching for Products ina SAN 00 0c eee eee 163 Changing Product Properties 000 eee eeee 163 Determining a Product s Operational Status
104. 53 1000663 03 26 March 2008 3 EFC Manager Software User Manual BROCADE Copyright 2006 2008 Brocade Communications Systems Inc All Rights Reserved Brocade Fabric OS File Lifecycle Manager MyView and StorageX are registered trademarks and the Brocade B wing symbol DCX and SAN Health are trademarks of Brocade Communications Systems Inc in the United States and or in other countries All other brands products or service names are or may be trademarks or service marks of and are used to identify products or services of their respective owners Notice This document is for informational purposes only and does not set forth any warranty expressed or implied concerning any equipment equipment feature or service offered or to be offered by Brocade Brocade reserves the right to make changes to this document at any time without notice and assumes no responsibility for its use This informational document describes features that may not be currently available Contact a Brocade sales office for information on feature and product availability Export of technical data contained in this document may require an export license from the United States government The authors and Brocade Communications Systems Inc shall have no liability or responsibility to any person or entity with respect to any loss cost liability or damages arising from the information contained in this book or the computer programs that accompany it T
105. 6 Marginal port 3 1437 FW 1437 Faulty Port 3 1438 FW 1438 Faulty or Missing SFPs 3 EFC Manager Software User Manual 291 53 1000663 03 G In this Appendix 292 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 B Model Considerations Appendix H In this Appendix This section provides information specific to B model devices B Model Supported Traps The following list details the B model supported traps that display in the master log when triggered TABLE 63 B Model Supported Traps Trap ConnUnitEventTrap Event Type SNMP Trap Event ConnUnitStatusChange Call Home Event FruStatusChanged Call Home Event RLIRLinkFailurelncident EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Call Home Event 293 294 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Glossary This glossary includes terms and definitions from American National Standard Dictionary for Information Systems ANSI X3 172 1990 copyright 1990 by the American National Standards Institute ANSI Copies can be purchased from the American National Standards Institute 25 West 42nd Street New York NY 10036 Definitions from this text are identified by A ANSI EIA Standard 440A Fiber Optic Terminology copyright 1989 by the Electronic Industries Association EIA Copies can be purchased from the Electronic Industries Association 2001 Pennsylvania Avenue N W Washington D C 20006 Definitions from this text are identified
106. 63 03 cluster A group of processors interconnected by a high speed network typically dedicated for increased reliability and scalability Clusters are groupings of multiple servers in which information is shared among systems When a server in a cluster fails one of the other servers in the cluster assumes the responsibility of the failed server thereby ensuring server application and data availability CMM See central memory module card command 1 A character string from an external source to a system that represents a request for system action 2 A request from a terminal to perform an operation or execute a program 3 A value sent through an I O interface from a channel to a control unit that specifies the operation to be performed D A selection on a dialog box or elsewhere in the user interface that causes the SAN Management application to perform a task community name SNMP A name that represents an simple network management protocol SNMP community that the agent software recognizes as a valid source for SNMP requests A product recognizes a management station as a valid recipient for trap information when the station s community names are configured community profile Information that specifies which management objects are available to what management domain or simple network management protocol SNMP community name community SNMP A relationship between an simple network management protocol SNMP
107. AN menu Enables all functions on the Remote Access dialog box TABLE 56 Privileges and Application Behavior Privilege Description Report Allows you to generate and view the following reports e Consistency iFCP Connections and Zones LUN Mapping Name Server R Port Router configuration e Zone Library reports No Privilege Disables the Reports gt View command and the Reports gt Generate com mand on the Monitor menu If this privilege is removed and the Event Manage ment privilege is assigned then this message appears lt title lt Product gt Mes sage gt lt Warning gt Removing the Report privilege does not remove users ability to generate reports in Event Management You might also want to consider removing the Event Man agement privilege as well lt lt OK gt gt In this Appendix F Read Only Enables the Reports gt View command on the Monitor menu Disables the Reports gt Generate command on the Monitor menu Read Write Enables the Reports gt View command and the Reports gt Generate com mand on the Monitor menu Security Admin Allows you to enable and configure SANtegrity fea tures Disables the Security tab Disables the Security Log command on the Monitor gt Logs and the Security Center command in the View gt Show Panels menu Enables the Security tab Enables the Security Log command on the Monitor gt Logs and the Security Center
108. BLE 42 Field Definition Format Size WWN WWN of the NetApp Filer Varchar 255 INTERSYSTEMLINKCOUNT Intersystem link count of the Int 11 NetApp Filer ISCLUSTER IS Cluster of the NetApp Filer Varchar 255 EXPORTTIME Exported time Varchar 128 PORT Table TABLE 43 Field Definition Format Size DEVICEGUID Device GUID Varchar 128 PWWN Port world wide name Varchar 128 PORTNUMBER Port number Int 11 FABRICNAME Fabric name Varchar 128 FABRICADDRESS Address of the fabric to which Varchar 128 the port belongs TYPE Port type Varchar 128 STATE Port state Varchar 128 SUPPORTEDCOS Class of Service COS sup Varchar 128 ported by the port SUPPORTEDFC4TYPE FC4 type supported by the port Varchar 128 SYMBOLICNAME Symbolic Name of the port Varchar 128 OSDEVICENAME OS Device Name of the port Varchar 128 SPEED Port speed Varchar 128 SUPPORTEDSPEED Speed supported by the port Varchar 128 MAXFRAMESIZE Maximum frame size supported Varchar 128 by the port VLANENABLED VLAN enabled Varchar 128 VLANID ID of the VLAN Int 11 L2COS L2 Class of Service Int 11 MTUSIZE MTU size Int 11 ExportTime Exported time Varchar 128 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 REALTIMEPERFORMANCE Table In this Appendix TABLE 44 Field Definition Format Size DEVICEGUID Device GUID Varchar 128 PORTNUMBER Port number Int JA TX Transmit Int N A RX Receive Int N A CRC Invalid CRC count Int N A LOS Loss of signal Int A OOS Out of sync I
109. CE Tall isc issu ai a e R a E O E E dia eee ages tee A 258 FABRIC Table s cccc cca penne eea HEAR ea edna 258 HISTORICALPERFORMANCE Table 000eeeenee 259 HOST Tables ssectacvicdn oad bade wut een deaclachus REA 259 HOSTCONNECTION Table 0 0 c cece eee e eee eee 260 HOSTHBAS Table 0c cece cece eee eee teens 260 HOSTEUNS Tables udrea edad ica a nd ote ane tae cen ded 261 IFCPEINK Tabl acces irae sade thie eatin 261 CUN Table couma a aoe athe T ie witht nation etl a eae RT 262 LUNBINDING Table 0 0 c cece cece eee eens 262 LUNMASKING Table 0 0 0 0 c cece eee eee eee 263 MSAN Table senii orate oe dies sate die cuddle eka 263 NETAPPFILER Table 0 cece eee cece eee eens 264 PORT Table iiss ea a a sie 2 eet Siesta 264 REALTIMEPERFORMANCE Table 000eceeeeeeee 265 ROUTERFABRIC Table cece cece e eee eens 265 SANROUTERSYSTEM Table 00 cece cence eee eee 266 STORAGEDEVICES Table 0 000 cece cece eee eee ees 266 ZONE Tableiss cct stsc care aetdud E Pid a E AEA 267 ZONELIBRARY Table 00 cece e eee e teens 268 ZONEMEMBER Table 00c cece cece eee ee ene 268 ZONEMEMBERDOMAINPORT Table 00000 eee eee 269 ZONEMEMBERFABRICADDRESS Table 0 00005 269 ZONEMEMBERWWN Table 000 cece eee eens 269 ZONESET Tables s iache aie AE A ath nalts 270 ZONESETZONES Table 000 e cece cee eee eee ees 270 Appendix F User Privileges M CHIS APPE
110. CM 9 7 Server Users dialog box displays 2 Select a user from the Users list 3 Click the Find button The groups to which the user belongs are highlighted in the Groups list 4 Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 99 53 1000663 03 3 Configuring Remote Access Configuring Remote Access You can specify the network addresses that can have access to the Server 1 Select SAN gt Remote Access The Remote Access dialog box displays Figure 18 y Allow remote management sessions Maximum number of remote sessions 25 Allow Any network address to connect Only network addresses below to connect All network addresses EXCEPT those below to connect a oK Cancel Help FIGURE 18 Remote Access Dialog Box 2 Select the Allow remote management sessions check box to allow others to access the Server remotely Enter the maximum number of remote sessions you want to allow 4 From the Allow options choose whether to allow all or some network addresses to connect Optional If you selected Only network addresses below to connect or All network addresses EXCEPT those below to connect add and remove addresses in the table at the bottom of the dialog box Toadd an address click Add enter a network address and click OK To remove an address select the address from the table and click Remove The SAN Management application accepts IP address
111. E Do not install to the root directory for example C 5 On the Pre Installation Summary screen review the displayed installation summary and click Install 6 On the Installation Complete screen make sure the Launch EFCM Configuration check box is selected default and click Done EFC Manager Software User Manual 13 53 1000663 03 1 Installing the Application 10 11 12 13 14 15 The EFCM 9 7 Configuration screen displays On the Welcome screen click Next On the License Agreement screen read the agreement select Yes and click Next On the Copy Data and Settings screen click No and then click Next NOTE To migrate data from a previous version refer to the EFCM Upgrade Instructions On the EFCM 9 7 Server Name screen enter a name for the Server and click Next On the EFCM 9 7 Server License screen enter the serial number on the CD jewel case and license key on the Key Certificate and click Next The License Key field is not case sensitive A message displays that states configuration is about the start the server make sure that the Administrative Tools Services window is closed or the server may not start Click OK to close the message The EFCM 9 7 Log In dialog box displays In the User ID and Password fields enter your user ID and password The defaults are Administrator and password respectively If you are upgrading from a previous release your username and password do not
112. E You can also generate a report of the Connectivity Map by clicking Generate Reports or CTRL G on the right hand toolbox while viewing a discovered SAN 2 Select the types of reports you want to generate Product List Operating Status Change Performance Data Connectivity Map Port Usage Fabric Ports Storage Device Summary LUN Masking Summary Departmental Storage Allocation 3 Click OK The generated reports automatically display in the View Reports dialog box NOTE Hyperlinks in reports are active only as long as the source data is available 224 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Creating Reports 6 Viewing Reports You can view reports through the application or through an internet browser Reports are stored in lt Install_Home gt Server Reports 1 Select Monitor gt Reports gt View The Reports dialog box displays Figure 70 lt gt Show in Browser Delete Report Help E5 Al Reports lt T C tivit rt Jun 26 2007 3 24 54 PM MDT A By Report Type Connectivity Map Repo un amp Gey User E by Time Server DT82C7C91 IP address 172 16 7 212 C Jun 26 2007 2 55 11 PM MD E Jun 26 2007 3 24 52 PM MD ry Connectivity Map_Admin Switch Count 4 Bi Departmental Storage All K D Fabric Ports_Administrat c LUN Masking Summary _ GD Operating Status Chang A Pe
113. E You must specify the directory in a network share format for example network name share name directory Do not use the drive letter format C directory 7 In the Domain Workgroup field enter the name of the Windows domain or workgroup in which you are defined NOTE You must be authorized to write to the network device 8 Inthe User Name field enter your Windows login name In the Password field enter your Windows password 10 Click Apply or OK The application verifies that the device is accessible and that the server can write to it If the device does not exist or you are not authorized to write to the network drive an error message displays that states you have entered an invalid device path or invalid network credentials Click OK to go back to the Options dialog box and fix the error Backup occurs if needed at the interval you specified EFC Manager Software User Manual 29 53 1000663 03 30 1 Backing Up and Restoring Data Enabling Backup Backup is enabled by default However if it has been disabled complete the following steps to enable the function 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays 2 Inthe Category list select Backup Select the Enable backups check box 4 Click Apply or OK Disabling Backup Backup is enabled by default If you want to stop the backup process you need to disable backup To disable the backup function complete the following steps 1 Select
114. EL Volume Label of the LUN Varchar 255 MOUNTPATH Mount Path of the LUN Varchar 128 EXPORTTIME Exported time Varchar 128 IFCPLINK Table TABLE 37 Field Definition Format Size IFCPLINKID ID of iFCP link Varchar 255 SANROUTERWWN WWN of the SAN Router Varchar 255 LOCALIP Local IP Address of the SAN Router Varchar 255 REMOTEIP Remote IP Address of the SAN Varchar 255 Router LOCALPORT Local port number of the SAN Int 11 Router REMOTEPORT Remote port number of the SAN Int 11 Router STATUS Status of the SAN Router Varchar 259 EXPORTTIME Exported time Varchar 128 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 E 261 E 262 In this Appendix LUN Table TABLE 38 Field Definition Format Size LUNGUID LUN GUID Varchar 255 DEVICEGUID Device GUID to which the LUN Varchar 255 belongs NAME LUN name Varchar 255 ID Internal LUN ID ALU Int N A UNIQUEID Unique ID Varchar 255 ASSIGNED Masked Bound Unbound Varchar 128 STATE Normal Transitioning Faulted Varchar 128 Expanding Defragmenting HOTSPARES Number of hot spares in the LUN Int N A RAIDTYPE RAID type of the LUN Varchar 128 TOTALSIZE Total LUN size in GB MySQL Float DB2 Dou ble BLOCKSIZE Block size in B Int N A DISKCOUNT Number of disks the LUN is stripped Int N A across EXPORTTIME Exported time of the data Varchar 128 LUNBINDING Table TABLE 39 Field Definition Format Size LUNGUID LUN GUID Varchar 255 NWWN Node World Wide Name could be Varchar
115. Import 3 Importing Server HBA Mappings To import Server HBA Mappings csv complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Import The Import dialog box displays 2 Select Server HBA Mappings csv from the Import list 3 Inthe File Name field enter the path and file name or Browse to the file NOTE If you browsed to and selected the lt nstall_Home gt Server Universe_Home TestUniverse _Working directory or any files within that directory the Import Export might fail You must deselect the file or directory before you run the Import Export process again 4 Click OK On the Imported Results dialog box click OK Importing Storage Port Mappings To import a Storage Port Mappings csv complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Import The Import dialog box displays 2 Select Storage Port Mappings csv from the Import list 3 Inthe File Name field enter the path and file name or Browse to the file NOTE If you browsed to and selected the lt nstall_Home gt Server Universe_Home TestUniverse _Working directory or any files within that directory the Import Export might fail You must deselect the file or directory before you run the Import Export process again 4 On the Imported Results dialog box click OK Importing the Zone Set Activation History To import Zone set activation history zip complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Import The Import dialog box displays 2 Select Zone set activa
116. Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Glossary diskette A thin magnetic disk enclosed in a plastic jacket which is removable from a computer and is used to store and transport data D diskette drive The hardware mechanism by which a computer reads data from and writes data to removable diskettes D disk operating system DOS The computer program that controls the organization of data files and processes on the computer DNS name Domain name system or domain name service Host or node name for a managed product that is translated to an Internet protocol IP address through a domain name server domain A Fibre Channel term describing the most significant byte in the node port N_Port identifier for the Fibre Channel product It is not used in the Fibre Channel small computer system interface FC SCSI hardware path ID It is required to be the same for all SCSI targets logically connected to a Fibre Channel adapter domain ID Domain identifier A number that uniquely identifies a switch in a multiswitch fabric A distinct domain ID is automatically allocated to each switch in the fabric by the principal switch The preferred domain ID is the domain ID value that a switch requests from the principal switch If the value has not been allocated to another switch in the fabric it is granted by the principal switch and becomes the requesting switch s active domain ID The active domain ID is the domain ID that ha
117. Master LOS Setti Sessera 238 EFC Manager Software User Manual 237 53 1000663 03 B In this Appendix Specifying a Host IP Address in Multi NIC Networks When you have multiple network card server hosts two cards in the same machine you must configure the trap event distributor to know which network card it should listen to for receiving traps To change the IP address you need to edit the smp server edipaddress variable to instruct the trap event distributor to use a specific IP address To specify an IP address for the trap event distributor complete the following steps 1 Open the lt nstall_Home gt resources Server config properties file using a text editor for example Notepad 2 Add the following line smp server edipaddress x x x x where x x x x is the desired IP Address 3 Save the file and restart the server Editing Master Log Settings The application keeps a log of events that occur in the SAN By default the event history is kept for 45 days until 100 MB of disk space is taken up or when the number of entries reaches 2000 You can manually change the retention period and the disk space usage assigned to entries in the Master Log For a list of the editable parameters refer to Table 21 TABLE 21 Master Log Parameters Type Default Minimum Maximum Log Retention Days 45 days 1 day 365 days Log Disk Space 1000 MB 1MB 4096 MB To edit the master log settings complete the following steps 1 Op
118. NGIX icici eanas mp o a a ee dee eetoe See 271 About User Privileges 0 0 c cece eee 272 About User Groups and Access Levels 00000 eee 285 Appendix G Advanced Call Home Event Tables Mths Append riei vee planed tieabadwadadis A 287 Appendix H B Model Considerations In this Appendix iniia e a ee a ek es Sete eae dee EF 293 B Model Supported Traps 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 293 Index EFC Manager Software User Manual xiii 53 1000663 03 xiv EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 About this Document This publication provides instructions on using the EFC Manager EFCM application NOTE To improve readability this document refers to the release number of the application as 9 7 instead of the official release number 09 07 00 How This Document is Organized 0000 e eee eee eee XV e Supported Hardware and Software scaceceace crane eta a een ee ewe ne x xvi What s New h TIS DOCUMEN ci ertrini eta re eee eer ree rece na xvi Document BOTIVETIENOIS aare anse paina e E n a a mu a men xvii Additonal MOMA ee reran aa a eeee ye xviii DOCUWINENLTECUDACK srrrssrsrterri t traren Eu ENAA rE EEEn xix How This Document is Organized This publication is organized as follows Chapter 1 Getting Started provides system requirements and basic configuration instructions Chapter 2 Software Overview provides a high level overview of the user interface Chapter 3 Setting
119. OTE Servers running SANavigator cannot be discovered EFCM 9 0 and higher provides a Manager of Managers MoM feature that enables you to discover data from other servers target servers in the SAN and manage EFCM switches through the discovered target servers The discovering server MOM server can be used to communicate and access multiple versions of EFCM view performance across fabrics and perform select management actions such as zoning This allows you to create a consolidated single pane view across multiple fabrics and locations managed by multiple EFCM server instances Once the MoM server discovers the target server it obtains the basic discovery information through SNMP such as the target server description and sysObjectID The rest of the basic discovery information is from the EFCM switches currently being managed by the target server The management of the target server and its attached switches is through ECC API discovery The following table details the features which are available for this mode of discovery For the sake of simplicity the server being discovered is referred to as the target server and the server discovering other servers is referred to as MoM server Management of the Manager of Manager requires that any of the following ports must be accessible to allow EFCM to EFCM communications 51511 51513 52688 53865 55042 56219 57396 58573 or 1099 The following table is applicable only to the switches
120. Oring v ssa inca sew cans headed hae ob ne eR Hae Pew Bale 216 e Using Event Notification Features 0 0 eee eee 220 223 Creating REPOMts s sma ccs cise nee ea woe ta econ ae aaa aes eee eae 215 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 6 Event Monitoring Event Monitoring The application provides a variety of logs through which you can monitor the SAN Two daily files are maintained one that contains events and one that contains summary information The format of the daily event log file name is Event_YYYYMMDD log where YYYYMMDD is the date that the events took place and the log was created The daily summary file name format is Event_YYYYMMDD sum You can view all events that take place in the SAN through the Master Log at the bottom of the main window You can also view a specific log by selecting an option from the Monitor menu s Logs submenu The logs are described in the following list e Audit Log Displays a history of user actions performed through the application except login logout e Event Log Displays errors related to SNMP traps and Client Server communications e Fabric Log Displays the events related to the selected fabric The event types may include but are not limited to ISL added to fabric ISL removed from fabric Switch added to fabric Switch removed from fabric Fabric renamed Fabric persisted Fabric status changed Device unpersisted e Group Log Displays the event logs def
121. Other Application Ports Used by the EFCM Server UDP Product Port TCP Feature Client Server Management Editable 55555 TCP RMI calls to EFCM client YES YES 8080 TCP XML RPC zoning bb credit statistics YES 4430 TCP XMLRPC zoning bb credit statistics Secure YES 2049 TCP EFCM server to device 3016 3032 3216 3232 YES 4400 4500 4700 6064 and 6140 SSL 2048 TCP EFCM server to device 3016 3032 3216 3232 YES 4400 4500 4700 6064 and 6140 575 TCP Call home via call home service 161 UDP SNMP query YES 25 TCP E mail notifications via SMTP server YES You can edit the following default port numbers However some changes require coordinated changes on the managed products To edit the RMI calls to the EFCM Client port number 55555 refer to Configuring Client Export Port Settings on page 84 To edit E mail notification via SMTP server port number 25 refer to Configuring E mail Notification on page 220 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 1 System Requirements System Requirements NOTE When managing large fabrics we recommend that you use a platform meeting at least the recommended requirements for both server and client For the latest device compatibility information including model number and firmware levels please go to the http www brocade com support resources website and follow the instructions to access the Compatibility Matrix Server Requirements NOTE When mana
122. P failure 3 514 DVP LIM PORT SFP XFP optics failure 3 517 LIM LIM SPP Offline 3 530 LIM DVP LIM Power up diagnostic failure 3 604 SBAR SWM HW EOS SBAR module failure 3 607 SBAR SWM HW EOS Switch contains no operational SBAR cards 4 622 SBAR INFO SWM powered off 0 623 SBAR INFO SWM powered on 0 624 SBAR INFO SWM disengaged 0 EFC Manager Software User Manual 289 53 1000663 03 G In this Appendix TABLE 60 Thermal Event Reason Codes Event Reason Code FRU Code Event Type Description Severity 800 DVP LIM HW High temperature warning 3 801 DVP LIM HW Critically hot temperature warning 3 802 DVP LIM HW EOS Port card shutdown due to thermal violations 3 805 SWM SBAR HW High temperature warning 3 806 SWM SBAR HW Critically hot temperature warning 3 807 SWM SBAR HW EOS SBAR module shutdown due to thermal violations 3 810 CTP HW High temperature warning 3 811 CTP HW Critically hot temperature warning 3 812 CTP HW CTP shutdown due to thermal violations 3 850 CTP HW System shutdown due to CTP thermal threshold violations 4 TABLE61 QLogic Events Event Reason Code FRU Code Event Type Description Severity 895 1003 0017 A zone member defined by domain ID and port was received within a man 4 agement server AZSD command with a port number out of range 903 1003 0022 Modifications were being made to the security database while a security set 4 was being activated or deactivated from a remote swit
123. Pathlight ox Cancel Help FIGURE25 Define Tools Dialog Box 4 Inthe Tool Name field type the tool s name as you want it to appear on the Setup Tools dialog box In the Path field type or browse to the path of the executable file 6 Inthe Working Folder field type or browse to the path of the folder that you want to set as your working folder 7 To add the tool click Add The Setup Tools dialog box displays with the new tool added to the Tools Menu Item table NOTE You must click Add before clicking OK otherwise your changes will be lost 8 Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 123 53 1000663 03 3 Accessing Third Party Tools Removing a Tool You can remove a tool from the third party tool list 1 Select Tools gt Setup The Setup Tools dialog box displays Click the Tools Menu tab Click Define The Define Tools dialog box displays 4 Inthe Tools table select the row of the tool you want to remove Click Remove If the tool is not being utilized no confirmation message displays NOTE You must click Remove before clicking OK otherwise your changes will be lost 6 Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box Adding an Option to the Tools Menu You can add options to the Tools menu to launch tools directly from the application 1 Select Tools gt Setup The Setup Tools dialog box displays 2 Click the Tools Menu tab
124. Product Status Log For more information refer to Determining a Product s Operational Status on page 164 3 Fabric Status Displays the state of the fabric that is least operational based on ISL status The possible states are operational unknown degraded or failed Select a product or fabric from the Physical Map or Product List and click this button to open the related Fabric Log only available for persisted fabrics For more information refer to Viewing the Fabric Log on page 218 4 Attention Indicator This icon displays when at least one Brocade or IBM product in the SAN requires attention Click the icon to open the Service Request dialog box which lists all Brocade or IBM switches and directors with an attention indicator EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 User Interface Description 2 5 Call Home Status Displays a call home status icon when one or more fabrics are discovered which allows you to determine the current call home status For more information about Advanced Call Home status and icons refer to Viewing Call Home Status on page 45 6 Backup Status Displays a backup status icon which allows you to determine the current backup status Let the pointer pause on the backup status icon to display the following information in a tooltip e Backup in Progress icon Backup started at hh mm ss in progress XX files in lt directory_name gt are backed up e Countdown to Next Schedu
125. Properties dialog box 8 Repeat steps 1 through 8 for each device that you want to discover From the Available Addresses table select the IP address you want to add to discovery 10 Click the right arrow button next to the Selected Individual Address table The selected addresses display in the Selected Individual Address table 11 Click OK on the Discover Setup dialog box The selected devices display in the EFCM main window indicated by the Server icon 136 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Manager of Manager Discovery 4 License Discovery License discovery is only available with the EFCM 9 7 server If you discover a EFCM 7 X or 8 X server their licenses will not affect the MoM server license When configured correctly the MoM server obtains the license key and serial number from the target server and then updates its license information with any target server licensed port count and additional modules To configure the MoM server to obtain license information refer to Generating an Aggregate Advanced Module Licensed Port Count on page 137 The MoM server license updates every time a target server is added or removed from the active discovery list However the state of the target server offline online does not affect the license Note that when the MoM server detects a change in the licensed port count or modules it forces the clients connected to the MoM server to logout Same behavior as license updates
126. RL NumPad on the keyboard e Use the Zoom dialog box a Select View gt Zoom The Zoom dialog box displays Figure 20 25 Fit to Screen Percentage OK Cancel FIGURE20 Zoom Dialog Box b Select a zoom percentage c Click OK Zooming Out To zoom out of the Physical Map use one of the following methods e Click the zoom out icon amp on the toolbox e Press or CTRL NumPad on the keyboard e Use the Zoom dialog box a Select View gt Zoom The Zoom dialog box displays b Select a zoom percentage c Click OK EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 103 3 104 Customizing the Main Window Showing Levels of Detail on the Physical Map You can view different levels of detail on the Physical Map making SAN management easier View Fabrics To view only fabrics without seeing groups products or ports Select View gt Show gt Fabrics Only View Groups To view only groups and fabrics without seeing products or ports Select View gt Show gt Groups Only View Products To view products groups and fabrics Select View gt Show gt All Products View Ports To view all ports Select View gt Show All Ports Turning Flyovers On or Off Flyovers display when you place the cursor on a product They provide a quick way to view a product s properties To turn flyovers on or off select Enable Flyover Display from the View menu Viewing Flyovers
127. SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays 2 Inthe Category list select Backup Clear the Enable backups check box Click Apply or OK Viewing the Backup Status The SAN Management application enables you to view the backup status at a glance by providing a backup status icon on the Status Bar The following table illustrates and describes the icons that indicate the current status of the backup function TABLE 13 Backup Icons Icon Description Backup in Progress displays the following tooltip Backup started at hh mmiss in progress XX directories are backed up Countdown to Next Scheduled Backup displays the following tooltip Next backup scheduled Cai at hh mm ss on Backup Disabled displays the following tooltip Backup is disabled Backup Failed displays the following tooltip Backup failed at hh mm ss mm dd yyyy EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Backing Up and Restoring Data 1 Changing the Backup Interval When the backup feature is enabled your SAN is protected by automatic backups The backups occur every six hours 360 minutes by default However you can change the interval at which backup occurs ATTENTION DO NOT modify the backup properties file To change the backup interval complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays 2 Inthe Category list select Backup Select an interval from t
128. SNMP Agent gt Setup The SNMP Agent Setup dialog box displays 2 Select the community string you want to remove and click Remove The community string is removed without confirmation 3 Click OK EFC Manager Software User Manual 213 53 1000663 03 5 214 Configuring the SNMP Agent Changing the TCP IP Port for SNMP Trap Events 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select SNMP Trap Listening The SNMP Trap Listening fields display to the right of the Category list In the Server SNMP Trap Listening Port field enter the TCP IP port number NOTE The SAN Management application interprets trap data and displays the proper port value for all firmware levels When traps are generated on the switch for firmware versions 4 X and below the varbind shows the correct port number 0 as the first port however for firmware versions 5 X and above the varbind shows port number 1 as the first port and the label for the first port is O so you need to subtract 1 from the port number extracted from the varbind to correctly match the label Third party applications may not correctly interpret the information Click OK Restart the application for your changes to take effect EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Chapter 6 Monitoring SAN Products In this Chapter This chapter provides instructions for monitoring SAN products using the application Event MOnIt
129. See field replaceable unit FTP See file transfer protocol G Gb s Acronym for gigabits per second gateway address 1 In transmission control protocol Internet protocol TCP IP a product that connects two systems that use the same or different protocols 2 In TCP IP the address of a router to which a product sends frames destined for addresses not on the same physical network for example not on the same Ethernet as the sender The hexadecimal format for the gateway address is XXX XXX XXX XXX Gb See gigabit GB See gigabyte GbIC See gigabit interface converter Gbps Acronym for gigabits per second GHz See gigahertz generic port G_Port Physical interface on a director or switch that can function either as a fabric port F_Port or an expansion port E_Port depending on the port type to which it connects See also bridge port expansion port fabric loop port fabric port hub port node loop port node port segmented expansion port generic port module card GPM card A port card that implements four generic ports G_Ports and provides the physical connection point for links to Fibre Channel products EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Glossary gigabit Gb A unit of measure for data storage equal to approximately 134 217 728 bytes Approximately one eighth of a gigabyte gigabit interface converter GbIC A removable module that converts an electrical serial data stream
130. Starting Third Party Tools from the Application You can open third party tools from the Tools menu or a device s shortcut menu Remember that you cannot open a tool that is not installed on your computer You must install the tool on your computer and add the tool to the Tools menu or device s shortcut menu To open an application perform the following steps 1 Select the device 2 Use either of the following techniques e Select Tools gt Product Menu gt available tool e Right click the device and select the tool from the menu EFC Manager Software User Manual 129 53 1000663 03 3 Accessing Eclipse Management Applications Accessing Eclipse Management Applications 130 Use the following procedures to access the Eclipse SAN Router management applications from your SAN Management application If SANvergence Manager or SAN Router Element Manager do not appear in the menu refer to Adding a Tool on page 123 e SANvergence Manager Right click the SAN Router icon on the Physical Map and select SANvergence Manager from the menu e SAN Router Element Manager Right click the SAN Router icon on the Physical Map and select Element Manager from the menu You can also launch a SAN Router Element Manager from SANvergence Manager is operating by Select the SAN Router in an expanded mSAN list on the left pane of the SANvergence Manager window then click the Element Manager icon at the top of the SANvergence Mana
131. T 2 In a network the processing unit in which resides the access method for the network D hot spare An extra disk that is currently running in the RAID but is there for backup If a working disk fails its data can be reconstructed from the remaining disks and written to the hot spare HTTP See hypertext transport protocol hub In Fibre Channel protocol a product that connects nodes into a logical loop by using a physical star topology hub port H_Port In arbitrated loop products a port that uses arbitrated loop protocols The physical interface that attaches to a loop product either an end product or another loop interconnect product hub hyperlink A predefined link for jumping from one location to another within the same computer or network site or even to a location at a completely different physical location Commonly used on the world wide web for navigation reference and depth where published text does not suffice hypertext transport protocol HTTP A simple protocol that allows world wide web pages to be transferred quickly between web browsers and servers ID See identifier EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 identifier ID 1 One or more characters used to identify or name a data element and possibly to indicate certain properties of that data element D T 2 A sequence of bits or characters that identifies a program device or system to another program device or syst
132. TE You must click Edit before clicking OK otherwise your changes will be lost If you changed the name of a tool you are prompted to verify the change Accept the change Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box Removing an Option from the Tools Menu You can remove an option listed on the Tools menu 1 Select Tools gt Setup The Setup Tools dialog box displays Click the Tools Menu tab 3 Select the tool you want to remove from the Tool Menu Items table The settings for the selected tool displays in the fields at the top of the dialog box 4 Click Remove NOTE You must click Remove before clicking OK otherwise your changes will be lost 5 Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 125 53 1000663 03 3 Accessing Third Party Tools Adding an Option to a Device s Shortcut Menu You can add an option to a device s shortcut menu 1 Select Tools gt Setup The Setup Tools dialog box displays 2 Click the Product Menu tab The Product Popup Menu Items table displays all configured shortcut menu options In the Menu Text list type or select the text as you want it to appear on the menu Select Match Conditions or All Select Match Conditions to display the menu option only for devices that meet the conditions listed Select All to display the menu option on the shortcut menus for all devices If you selected All skip to step 7 O
133. UDP number enter the UDP port number in the UDP Port field NOTE The SAN Management application interprets trap data and displays the proper port value for all firmware levels When traps are generated on the switch for firmware versions 4 X and below the varbind shows the correct port number 0 as the first port however for firmware versions 5 X and above the varbind shows port number 1 as the first port and the label for the first port is O so you need to subtract 1 from the port number extracted from the varbind to correctly match the label Third party applications may not correctly interpret the information In the Community String field select the trap recipient community 8 Click OK EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 5 210 Configuring the SNMP Agent Editing Trap Recipients To edit an existing trap recipient during SNMP agent configuration use the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt SNMP Agent gt Setup The SNMP Agent Setup dialog box displays Click the Trap Recipients tab Select the trap recipient you want to edit and click Edit The Edit Trap Recipient dialog box displays Figure 64 Trap Recipient y Activate IP Address 192 52 22 2 UDP Port 162 Community String public v OK Cancel FIGURE 64 Edit Trap Recipient Dialog Box 4 Edit the trap recipient as necessary a Clear the Activate check box to deactivate the trap recipient b Inthe IP Address field edit the
134. Up the Application describes how to set up and customize the application to manage users and user groups set up servers and clients customize the main window customize device properties and import or export files Chapter 4 Discovering a SAN describes how to discover SANs and configure storage port mapping using the application Chapter 5 Configuring SAN Products and Fabrics describes how to configure the SAN devices Topics include managing devices configuring nicknames enterprise fabric mode fabric binding port fencing trap forwarding frame sniffer and SNMP agent as well as working with HBAs and servers Chapter 6 Monitoring SAN Products describes how to monitor the SAN s events and how to create reports that show information about the SAN Appendix A Troubleshooting provides a list of common problems with and recommended solutions Appendix B Editing Configuration Properties Files provides instructions for editing configuration properties files to perform various tasks Appendix C Reference provides supplemental information including compatibility information an icon legend and keyboard shortcuts Appendix D Configuring EFCM Through a Firewall provides information on configuring through a firewall EFC Manager Software User Manual XV 53 1000663 03 Supported Hardware and Software Appendix E MySQL and DB2 Database Fields provides reference information related to database exporting Appendix F Use
135. User Manual 53 1000663 03 Product Licensing Overview 1 Depending on whether you are installing for the first time adding additional features adding ports or upgrading to a new version you need to complete the following steps e Obtain the license key e Enter the software serial number e Enter the license key Table 1 12 outlines which steps you must perform to complete the installation or upgrade process TABLE 11 License Key Requirements Obtain Enter Serial Enter License License Key Number Key Install the software application for the first time xt X X Purchase Additional Software Modules X X Purchase Ports X X Upgrade EFCM X X X 1 Depending on your vendor you may or may not receive the license key directly and consequently skip this step Obtaining a License Key To activate the application you must request a license key If you just purchased the application use these instructions to obtain your license key 1 Go to the URL listed on the transaction code certificate 2 Enter your username and password and click Login NOTE If you do not have a username and password click the Please Register Here link 3 Inthe Serial Number field type the serial number The serial number on the back of the software CD case 4 Inthe Transaction Code fields type the transaction codes shipped with the software and click Next 5 Confirm the features to be enabled and click Next The license key and all enabled featur
136. Varchar 128 ZONE Table TABLE 48 Field Definition Format Size ID Zone set ID Varchar 255 ZONELIBRARYID ID of zone library the zone set Varchar 255 belongs to NAME Name of the zone set Varchar 255 MINGUARANTEEDBANDWIDTH Minimum guaranteed bandwidth Int 11 EFC Manager Software User Manual 267 53 1000663 03 E In this Appendix TABLE 48 Field Definition Format Size MAXALLOWEDBANDWIDTH ISISNSIMPORTED ISNS imported Maximum allowed bandwidth 11 Varchar 128 EXPORTTIME Exported time of the data Varchar 128 ZONELIBRARY Table TABLE 49 Field Definition Format Size ID Library ID Varchar 255 FABRICNAME Name of the fabric the library Varchar 128 belongs to TYPE Discovered or name of SAN Man Varchar 128 agement application ACTIVEZONESETID ID of the active zone set if any Varchar 255 EXPORTTIME Exported time of the data Varchar 128 ZONEMEMBER Table TABLE 50 Field Definition Format Size ID Zone member ID MySQL Int N A unsigned DB2 Int ZONEID ID of the zone the member belongs Varchar 255 to MEMBERTYPE Type of the member WWN Varchar 128 Domain Port FabricAddress EXPORTTIME Exported time of the data Varchar 128 268 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 ZONEMEMBERDOMAINPORT Table In this Appendix E TABLE 51 Field Definition Format Size ID ID of the member in the ZoneMem MySQL Int N A ber tabl
137. abric Mode dialog box Enables access to the Event Management tab and enables all functions on the tab 273 F In this Appendix TABLE 56 Privilege Export Privileges and Application Behavior Description Allows you to export SAN files Performance data Master logs Connectivity map Connectivity XML Product list Reports Nicknames Status and Zone set activation his tory No Privilege Disables the Export com mand on the SAN menu Disables the Master Log right click Export com mand If this privilege is removed and the Event Manage ment privilege is assigned then give this message lt title lt Product gt Mes sage gt lt Warning gt Removing the Export privilege does not remove users ability Export in Event Manage ment You might also want to consider remov ing the Event Manage ment privilege as well lt lt OK gt gt Read Only Enables the Export com mand on the SAN menu Allows you to open the Export Discovered SAN dialog box however dis ables the OK and Apply buttons Read Write Enables the Export com mand on the SAN menu Enables all functions in the Export Discovered SAN dialog box Fabric Binding Allows you to define the switches allowed to joina fabric Allows you to control access to the Fabric Bind ing dialog box from the Configure menu Disables the Fabric Bind ing command on the Con figure menu Enables the Fabric Bind ing command on
138. accepts the following IPv6 address formats e AAAA OAAA 0000 AAAA AAAA AAAA AAAA AAAA Complete address including leading zeros e AAAA AAA 0 0 AAAA AAAA AAAA AAAA Compressed format with leading zeros omitted This is the default display e AAAA AAA AAAA AAAA AAAA AAAA Compressed format with double colons for successive hexadecimal fields of zeros e lt Pv6_Address gt lt Port_Number gt Any IP IPv6 address format and port number The default port number is 51511 The Server s name displays in the Server Name field Enter your user ID and password Click Forget password or Save password to select whether you want the application to remember your password the next time you log in Click Login Changing Your Password 1 Select Start gt Programs gt EFCM 9 7 gt EFCM 9 7 to open the application The EFCM 9 7 Log In dialog box displays Enter your user name in the User ID field Enter your password in the Password field Click Change The Change Password dialog box displays Enter your new password in the Secure Password and Retype Password fields and click OK Click Login Logging Out of a Server Select SAN gt Log Out You are logged out of the current Server and the EFCM 9 7 Log In dialog box displays For instructions on logging in to a new Server refer to Logging In to a Server on page 73 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring a Server 3 Adding a Server
139. ain window The following lists outline the many functions available on each menu SAN Menu The SAN menu provides the following commands Log Out Select to log off the SAN Management application Shutdown Select to close the SAN Management Client and Server Users Select to configure users and user groups Active Sessions Select to display all active sessions on the server Remote Access Select to configure remote access Server Properties Select to display the Server properties Options Select to configure the SAN Management application options Export Select to export files Import Select to import files New Plan Select to configure a new planned SAN Open Plan Select to open an existing planned SAN Save Plan Select to save a planned SAN with the same name Save Plan As Select to save a planned SAN with a new name Exit Select to close the SAN Management Client Edit Menu The Edit menu provides the following commands Cut Select to cut information and move it to another location Copy Select to copy information and move it to another location Paste Select to paste information in another location Delete Select to delete the selected information Delete All Select to delete all information in a specific dialog box Clear ISL Alert s Select to remove ISL alerts from the selected object Show Connections Select to show connections in a group Select Connections Select to select a connection Select At
140. al subordinate object you must create a new threshold with a maximum limit of events allowed and a minimum time period then assign the new threshold to the subordinate object To turn off port fencing inheritance complete the following steps 1 Select Configure gt Port Fencing The Port Fencing dialog box displays Select a threshold type from the Violation Type list In the Name field type a name for the new threshold for example TurnOfflSL From the Threshold errors violations list select the maximum number of errors or violations allowed From the Threshold minutes seconds list select the minimum time period available Click OK on the Add Threshold dialog box Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Port Fencing 5 Editing Thresholds The SAN Management application allows you to edit the name number of events needed and time period of ISL Protocol Link and Security thresholds Editing ISL Protocol Thresholds To edit ISL protocol thresholds complete the following steps 1 Select Configure gt Port Fencing The Port Fencing dialog box displays 2 Select ISL Protocol from the Violation Type list 3 Select the threshold you want to change and click Edit The Edit ISL Threshold dialog box displays Figure 48 Block a port when one of the following ISL protocol error types meets the threshold ISL Bouncing ISL Segmentation ISL Protocol Mismatch Name Pr
141. all Home Centers table select the devices to which you want to apply the event filter Click gt right arrow button For existing event filters a confirmation messages displays 5 Click Yes The selected event filters are applied to the selected devices The event filter displays beneath the specified device or all of the devices under the specified call home center 6 Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 49 53 1000663 03 50 1 Configuring Advanced Call Home Removing an Event Filter from a Call Home Center To remove all event filters from a call home center complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays 2 Inthe Call Home Centers table choose one of the following e Right click a call home center and select Remove Filters e Select the call home center and click lt left arrow button All event filters assigned to the call home center are removed 3 Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box Removing an Event Filter from a Device To remove all event filters from a call home center complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays 2 Inthe Call Home Centers table choose one of the following e Right click an event f
142. all administrators must set which ports are used by the Client and Server by editing parameters in EFCM M batch files Use of the following procedures depend on how the firewall is set up If the firewall prevents the Client from connecting to arbitrary ports on the Server then you must fix both the Server s registry and export port If the firewall prevents the Server from connecting to arbitrary ports on the Client then you must fix the Client s export port 252 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 In this Appendix D If the firewall prevents the Client from connecting to arbitrary ports on the Server then perform both of these procedures Forcing Port in RMI Registry on page 253 Forcing Server and Client Export Port Number on page 253 NOTE Configure the Server s export port only If the firewall prevents the Server from connecting to arbitrary ports on the Client then configure the Client s export port using the following procedure Forcing Server and Client Export Port Number on page 253 Forcing Port in RMI Registry To force the RMI registry to use a particular TCP port for an RMI server you must configure the Server Connection Port 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select Server Connection The Server Connection fields display to the right of the Category list In the Server Connection Port field enter the TCP port number betw
143. alling from UNIX Systems 0 00002 eee eee eee 21 Headless Uninstall from UNIX Systems 0 00005 22 Starting the Application 0 0 0 ccc eee 23 Starting EFCM on Windows Systems 2200000 23 Starting EFCM on UNIX Systems 0020 cee ee eee 24 What is Backed Up 2 2 2 00 eee 25 Management Server Backup 000 c ee eee eee eee 26 Configuring Backup to a Writable CD 0 27 Configuring Backup to a Hard Drive 00000 28 Configuring Backup to a Network Drive 005 29 Enabling Backup siss cece eee eee ce eee eee eee es 30 Disabling Backup 2 0 2 eee eee 30 Viewing the Backup StatuS 0 00 cee eee eee 30 Changing the Backup Interval 000 cee eee eens 31 Starting Immediate Backup 000 cece eee eee 31 Reviewing Backup Events e eee eee eee 32 Restoring Data e s c ccs ee eee eee eee beet bee eee 33 Restoring Data from the Brocade Supplied Rack Mount Management Server s ssss essei urusi eee 34 Restoring Data from CD 1 eee eee 34 Restoring Data from the Hard Drive 0005 35 Restoring Data from a Network Drive 2 00005 36 Configuring Advanced Call Home 020 0c cece eee eee 37 Showing a Call Home Center 00 0c eee eee eee 39 Hiding a Call Home Center 0 000 c ee eee eee 39 Editing a Call Home Center 000 c eee eee eee 40
144. allowed for the threshold from the Threshold errors list if necessary Change the time period for the threshold from the Threshold Seconds list if necessary Click OK on the Edit Link Threshold dialog box If the threshold has already been assigned to ports an Are you sure you want to make the requested changes to this threshold on X ports message displays Click OK to close To assign this threshold to fabrics switches or switch ports refer to Assigning Thresholds on page 187 Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Port Fencing Editing Security Thresholds To edit security thresholds complete the following steps 1 Select Configure gt Port Fencing The Port Fencing dialog box displays Select Security from the Violation Type list Select the threshold you want to change and click Edit The Edit Security Threshold dialog box displays Figure 50 Block a port when one of the following security violation types meets the threshold Authentication Fabric Binding Switch Binding Port Binding ISL Security N Port Connection Not Allowed Name Security Default Threshold 5 errorsper 5 Minutes OK Cancel Help FIGURE 50 Edit Security Threshold Dialog Box 5 4 Change the name for the threshold in the Name field if necessary Change the number of port events allowed for the threshold from the Threshold errors list if necessary 6 C
145. alog box 7 Click OK Ensure that you ve selected to view the fabric that includes the discovered devices Ensure that only one copy of the application is being used to monitor and manage the same devices in a subnet Discovery is not enabled 1 Select Discover gt Setup 2 Select the General tab 3 Select either the Out of Band Discovery check box or the In Band Discovery check box or both Refer to Setting Up Discovery on page 139 for instructions 4 Click OK Discovery is turned off Select Discover gt On Discovery of a Cisco 5428 device failed This product may not respond to broadcast discovery Add the specific IP Address of the device to the Selected Individual Addresses table of the Discover Setup dia log box to discover the device Refer to the related Help or user manual for more information Discovery of a SAN Router device failed Reason 1 Inband IP address of the SAN Router has not been setup This can occur after user sets the SAN Router to factory defaults Workaround Set the inband IP address to a valid value Reason 2 SNS not initialized in the firmware This can occur in older Eclipse SAN Routers 3300 and 4300 if all ports are set to gigE non iSCSI and non iFCP and there are no FC ports Also the FC task in the SAN Router can fail to initialize and the SNS task will not start Workaround None contact Brocade technical support Reason 3 Bad VPD setu
146. ame Y X Nickname we Operational Status Tyee Description inport a l Detached WAAN Neineme a E R FIGURE 39 Configure Nicknames Dialog Box From the Scope list select Nickname Enter the nickname you want to search for in the Search field You can search on partial nicknames 5 Click Search All devices with the specified nickname or partial nickname are highlighted in the Display table You may need to scroll to see all highlighted nicknames 6 Click OK to close the Configure Nicknames dialog box 168 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Nicknames 5 Searching by WWN The SAN Management application allows you to search for objects switch fabric MSAN product ports or N Ports by WWN world wide name 1 Select Configure gt Nicknames The Configure Nicknames dialog box displays Figure 37 Cespiay A Nicknames X Scope Nciname Y Nickname wel Operational Status Tyee Descrigtion la l R E R FIGURE 40 Configure Nicknames Dialog Box 2 From the Display list select All WWNs Only objects with a WWN display Nickname we Operations Status Tyee Description la 3 R R FIGURE 41 Configure Nicknames Dialog Box From the Scope list select WWN Enter the WWN you want to search for in the Search field You can search on partial WWNs 5 Click Search All devices with the specified WWN or partial WWN are highlighted in the Display table You may need to scroll to see all highli
147. and Restoring Data 7 Install the formatted disc into the CD drive To back up to a writable CD you must have CD writing software installed The disc must be formatted by the CD writing software so that it behaves like a drive 8 Click Apply or OK The application verifies that the backup device exists and that the server can write to it If the device does not exist or is not writable an error message displays that says you have entered an invalid device Click OK to go back to the Options dialog box and fix the error Backup occurs if needed at the interval you specified Configuring Backup to a Hard Drive NOTE This requires a hard drive The drive should not be the same physical drive on which your Operating System or EFCM is installed To configure the backup function to a hard drive complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays 2 Select Backup in the Category list The currently defined directory displays in the Backup Output Directory field Select the Enable backups check box if necessary In the Next Backup Start Time Hours and Minutes fields enter the time using a 24 hour clock you want the backup process to begin Select an interval from the Backup Interval drop down list to set how often backup occurs Click Browse to choose the hard drive and directory to which you want to back up your data Click Apply or OK The application verifies that the backup device exists
148. and manage Brocade Access Gateway Switches and Directors You can open Web Tools directly from the application For more information about Web Tools refer to the Brocade Web Tools Administrator s Guide For more information about Brocade Access Gateway Switches and Directors refer to the documentation for the specific device On the Physical Map right click the B model device you want to manage and select Element Manager NOTE You must have Device Administration privileges for the selected device to launch Web Tools If you do not have Device Administration privileges you will need to enter those credentials to launch Web Tools Web Tools displays EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Accessing Third Party Tools 3 Launching FCR Configuration Use FCR Configuration to launch the FC Routing module which enables you to share devices between fabrics without merging the fabrics You can open the FC Routing module directly from the SAN Management application For more information about FC Routing refer to the Brocade Fabric Manager Administrator s Guide or Brocade Web Tools Administrator s Guide The FCR Configuration option is available only for the following devices with FOS level 5 0 or higher e Brocade 7500 switch e Brocade director s configured with an FR4 18i blade On the Physical Map right click the Brocade device you want to configure and select FCR Configuration The FC Routing module displays
149. and that the server can write to it If the device does not exist or is not writable an error message displays that states you have entered an invalid device Click OK to go back to the Options dialog box and fix the error Backup occurs if needed at the interval you specified 28 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Backing Up and Restoring Data 1 Configuring Backup to a Network Drive To back up to a network drive your workstation can be either in the same domain or in the same workgroup However you must have rights to copy files for the network drive NOTE It is recommended that this configuration be completed on the Local client the client application running on the Server so that the backup path and location can be confirmed step 5 To configure the backup function to a network drive complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays 2 Select Backup in the Category list The currently defined directory displays in the Backup Output Directory field Select the Enable backups check box if necessary In the Next Backup Start Time Hours and Minutes fields enter the time using a 24 hour clock you want the backup process to begin Select an interval from the Backup Interval drop down list to set how often backup occurs 6 Click Browse to choose the network share and directory to which you want to back up your data or enter the network share and directory path NOT
150. anges to this option take effect after an application restart EFC Manager Software User Manual 87 53 1000663 03 88 3 Configuration Options Configuring Server Connection Settings The SAN Management application allows you to configure client server connectivity settings so that you can assign a server connection port for the initial contact from the client assign a server export port from communications between server and client and set the server export port to be SSLenabled To configure server connection settings complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select Server Connection to configure client server connectivity settings In the Server Connection Port field enter a port number for the initial contact from the client In the Server Export SSL Port field enter a port number for communications between the client and the server Click Enable SSL to enable this function for the server export port Click Apply or OK to save your work NOTE Changes to this option take effect after an application restart Configuring SNMP Discovery Settings To configure SNMP discovery settings complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select SNMP Discovery to set the number of retries and timeout for SNMP discovery between the client and server In the SNMP Timeout field e
151. apter This chapter provides an overview of the user interface The Lite Cycle of a SAN issi wees rna epee ee Mere whereas baa 54 e User Interface Description 0 000 c eee eee 55 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 53 1000663 03 2 The Life Cycle of a SAN The Life Cycle of a SAN 54 The application enables you to proceed through the managed life cycle of the SAN with confidence a gt FIGURE 3 The Life Cycle of a SAN The first stage of a SAN s life cycle is to Plan the SAN Use paper and pen or a software application to plan the SAN The second stage of the life cycle is to Discover the SAN The SAN Management application establishes contact with many SAN devices gathers embedded information and then depicts it in the Physical Map or topology The application discovers the devices attached to the SAN and presents an intuitive visual map of devices and their connections The third stage of the life cycle is to Configure the SAN during which you configure SAN devices and fabrics The final and longest stage of the life cycle is to Monitor the SAN The application generates events and messages about product and property status The user interface features an animated display of the data flow and error rates over the entire topology The application s self monitoring event logging and event notification features allow you to stay informed about the state of the SAN At any point a discovered SAN can be us
152. arts in CLI mode Choose from the following install sets and press Enter 1 Server and Client 2 Client Type the installation folder path and press Enter if necessary To accept the default installation path press Enter The pre Installation summary displays Review the installation settings and press Enter to continue The application is installed After installation is complete type 1 and press Enter to run Configuration or press Enter to run Configuration later Installation Complete message displays Press Enter to complete the installation To support headless mode correctly complete the following steps in the lt nstall_Home gt bin directory NOTE If you do not complete these steps server java errors can occur in functions such as discovery and performance a Execute EFCM_mgr stop b Open the serverParameters properties file and insert the parameter java awt headless true c Execute nohup EFCM_mgr start EFC Manager Software User Manual 19 53 1000663 03 1 Installing the Application Linux Installation Troubleshooting If you have completed all of the Linux Pre Installation requirements and you are still unable to install the application run the following commands on the host 1 Go to lt nstall_Home gt the directory containing install bin 2 Execute strace f F v s 1024 o efcm9install txt install bin 3 Execute rpm ga gt gt system txt 4 Execute ps elf gt gt system
153. ate simultaneously switchover Changing a backup field replaceable unit FRU to the active state and the active FRU to the backup state switch priority Value configured into each switch in a fabric that determines its relative likelihood of becoming the fabric s principal switch Lower values indicate higher likelihood of becoming the principal switch A value of 1 indicates the highest priority 225 is the lowest priority A value of 225 indicates that the switch is not capable of acting as the principal switch The value O is illegal System Automation for Operating System 390 SA 0S 390 IBM licensed software that provides System 390 Parallel Sysplex management automation capabilities and integrated systems and network management SA OS 390 manages host remote processor and I O operations SA OS 390 integrates the functions of Automated Operations Control for Multiple Virtual Storage MVS ESCON Manager and Target System Control Facility D T TB See terabyte EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 TCP IP See transmission control protocol Internet protocol technical support Single point of contact for a customer when assistance is needed in managing or troubleshooting a product Technical support provides assistance 24 hours a day seven days a week including holidays The technical support number is 877 948 4448 Synonymous with customer support telnet The Internet standard proto
154. ation data files to another disk Allows you to turn product discovery on and off Disables the Backup Now and Configure com mands on the Backup icon right click menu on the application status bar Disables all controls for Backup on the Options dialog box Disables the On and Off commands in the Dis cover menu Disables the Configure command on the Backup icon right click menu on the application status bar Disables all controls for Backup on the Options dialog box Same as No Privilege Enables the Backup Now and Configure com mands on the Backup icon right click menu on the application status bar Enables all functions for Backup on the Options dialog box Enables the On and Off commands in the Dis cover menu EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 TABLE 56 Privilege Discovery Setup Privileges and Application Behavior Description Allows you to configure discovery setup No Privilege Disables Setup on the Discover menu and tool bar In this Appendix F Read Only Enables Setup on the Dis cover menu and toolbar Allows you to open the Discovery Setup dialog box however disables the OK button Read Write Enables Setup on the Dis cover menu and toolbar Enables all functions in the Discovery Setup dia log box E mail Event Notification Setup Allows you to define the e mail server used to send e mail Disables Event Notifica tion E mail command
155. ation of the SAN Router system Varchar 255 CONTACT Contact name of the SAN Router Varchar 255 system EXPORTTIME Exported time Varchar 128 STORAGEDEVICES Table NOTE The storage devices table is only populated with information about the storage devices when the server is able to discover the LUNs on the storage The server must have the LUN Management license and the storage device must be discovered using a specialized mechanism such as API s or CLI s LUN Management is an optional module available to previous LUN Management licensed customers EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 In this Appendix E TABLE 47 Field Definition Format Size DEVICEGUID Storage device GUID Varchar 255 NAME Storage device name Varchar 255 MODEL Model name Varchar 255 VENDOR Vendor name Varchar 255 TOTALSIZE Total size of the device MySQL N A Float DB2 Double FREESPACE Free space available on the MySQL N A device Float DB2 Double FREESPACECOUNT Number of Free spaces available Int N A on the device ASSIGNEDLUNSPACE Total Size of the LUNs assigned MySQL N A Float DB2 Double ASSIGNEDLUNCOUNT Total number of LUNs assigned Int N A FREELUNSPACE Total Size of all the LUNs which MySQL N A have not been assigned Float DB2 Double FREELUNCOUNT Total number of LUNs which have Int N A not been assigned ASSIGNEDHOSTSCOUNT Total number of hosts which have Int N A been assigned EXPORTTIME Exported time of the data
156. ault RMI server host IP address complete the following steps NOTE This configuration option replaces the Djava rmi server hostname value used in previous releases 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays 2 Inthe Category list select IP Configuration to set the IP address and subnet mask 3 Inthe Server IP Configuration list choose from one of the following options e Select Automatic Go to step 5 e Select Manual Continue with step 4 4 Inthe Return Address area choose from one of the following options e If your operating system has IPv4 only complete the following steps a Inthe Subnet Mask field enter the subnet mask address for the server b Inthe Return Address field enter the return address for the server Continue with step 5 e If your operating system has IPv6 only complete the following steps a Inthe IPv6 Address field enter the subnet mask address for the server b Inthe Prefix Length field enter the prefix length Continue with step 5 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuration Options 3 e If your operating system has IPv4 and IPv6 select one of the following options If your operating system has IPv4 select the IPv4 Address option and complete the following steps a Inthe IPv4 Address field enter the return address for the server b In the Subnet Mask field enter the subnet mask address for the server Continue with step 5 If your o
157. automatically removed The SAN Management application also allows you to remove thresholds from an individual Fabric Switch or Switch Port from all Fabrics Switches and Switch Ports at once as well as from the Threshold table Removing Thresholds From Individual Objects To remove thresholds from the All Fabrics object an individual Fabric Switch or Switch Port complete the following steps 1 Select Configure gt Port Fencing The Port Fencing dialog box displays 2 Select a threshold type from the Violation Type list In the Ports table select the object with the threshold you want to remove Click the left arrow NOTE If the selected object inherits a threshold assignment from an object higher in the tree you cannot remove the threshold You may assign a different threshold directly to the selected objects or change the assignment on the higher object An icon displays next to every instance where the threshold was removed from an select object but which now inherits a threshold from higher in the tree An amp icon displays next to the each select object which does not inherit a threshold from higher in the tree 5 Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box 192 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Port Fencing 5 Removing Thresholds From the Thresholds Table To remove thresholds from all Fabrics Switches and Switch Ports as well as the Threshold table complete the following steps 1 Select Con
158. available Click Show in Browser The selected report displays in your default Web browser Select File gt Print in the Web browser The Print dialog box displays Select the printer to which you want to print and click Print Click the Close button in the Web browser Click the Close button in the View Reports dialog box Printing a Connectivity Map Report You 1 226 can print a Connectivity Map report through a photo editor application Browse to lt nstall_Home gt Server Reports and select the Connectivity Map report you want to print Open the folder of the Connectivity Map report you want to print Open the image san jpg in a photo editor application Select File gt Print The Print dialog box displays Select the printer to which you want to print and click Print Click the Close button in the photo editor Click the Close button on the View Reports dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Creating Reports 6 Deleting Reports You can delete reports using the View Reports dialog box 1 Select Monitor gt Reports gt View The View Reports dialog box displays 2 Select the report you want to delete in the left pane of the dialog box ATTENTION Once you click Delete Report the report is deleted without confirmation Click Delete Report Click the Close button in the View Reports dialog box Generating Router Reports Generated reports are saved to lt nstall_Home gt Ser
159. ays 4 Specify the IP addresses you want to discover a On the IP Address tab enter a description for the device at the new IP address b Select IPv4 Address or IPv6 Address e If you selected IPv4 Address enter the IP address and subnet mask for the device e If you selected IPv6 Address enter the IP address and prefix length for the device c Inthe Data Source for Domain area select the Use auto detection option EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 135 4 Manager of Manager Discovery d Optional To generate a sequence of IP addresses complete the following steps NOTE You can only generate a sequence of IP addresses using the IPv4 format 1 Inthe Add Multiple area click Generate a sequence of IP addresses This eliminates the need to add each IP address individually 2 In the Last IP field enter the last IP address in the sequence All IP addresses in a Sequence must be on the same subnet and have the same first three octets 5 Click the SNMP tab and edit the default settings if needed To change the SNMP default settings refer to Configuring an SNMP Community String on page 147 6 Click the Product Type and Access tab a From the Product Type list select EFCM Server b Inthe User ID field enter a user ID NOTE Make sure your User ID has Administration rights to the EFCM Server you discover c Inthe Password and Retype Password fields enter the password Click OK on the Address
160. ays 2 Select the tab on which you want to edit a property Right click the label for the property you want to edit 4 Select Edit The Edit Property dialog box displays 5 Change the label and description for the property as needed EFC Manager Software User Manual 105 53 1000663 03 3 Customizing Device Properties 6 From the Type list change the property type if available 7 From the Icon list select an icon to display in the column 8 Click OK Deleting a Property Field You can delete any field on any of the tabs from the Properties dialog box NOTE Not available in the Planned SAN view 1 Right click any product icon and select Properties The Properties dialog box displays 2 Select the tab on which you want to delete a property Select Delete 4 Right click the label for the property you want to delete A message box displays asking you to confirm the deletion 5 Click Yes The property you selected is deleted Hiding a Property Field You can hide any field on any of the tabs from the Properties dialog box NOTE Not available in the Planned SAN view 1 Right click any product icon and select Properties The Properties dialog box displays Select the tab on which you want to hide a property Right click the label for the property you want to hide Select Hide The property you selected is removed from the dialog box 106 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Customizing Device Pro
161. ble TABLE 27 RMI Protocol Level RMI RMI TCP IP TCP IP As shown in the following figure the EFCM Server and Clients communicate with each other through the RMI Server This is a full duplex function However before the RMI Server on the EFCM Client can communicate with the RMI Server on the EFCM Server it must know the TCP port number of the RMI Server The function of the RMI registry is to communicate this TCP port number to the EFCM Client Once this is done successfully communication can take place between the RMI Server on the EFCM Server and the EFCM Client The EFCM Server obtains the TCP port number of the RMI Server on the Client during initial communications EFCM Server EFCM Client RMI Server RMI Registry RMI Registry RMI Server RMI Server s TCP Port RMI Server s TCP Port Full Duplex Communication FIGURE 73 EFCM Server and Client Communications The TCP port numbers of the RMI server are randomly and automatically selected on both the EFCM Server and Client as a full duplex function This poses a major problem for firewalls because the Client must be able to address the Server s RMI registry and the Server s remote objects Also the Server must be able to address the Client s remote objects Firewalls are configured to block all unknown incoming connections with no mapping of outgoing connections based on a socket part of TCP and IP To work around this problem for EFCM firew
162. bre Channel I O controller FCFE See Fibre Channel fabric element EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 FCFE MIB See Fibre Channel fabric element management information base FCIA See Fibre Channel Industry Association FC IP See Fibre Channel IP address FCMGMT See Fibre Channel management framework integration FC PH See Fibre Channel physical and signaling interface feature key A unique key to enable additional product features This key is entered into the Configure Feature Key dialog box in the Element Manager application to activate optional hardware and software features Upon purchasing a new feature McDATA provides the feature key to the customer fiber The fiber optic cable made from thin strands of glass through which data in the form of light pulses is transmitted It is used for high speed transmissions over medium 200 m to long 10 km distances fiber optic cable Synonym for optical cable fibre A generic Fibre Channel term used to cover all transmission media types specified in the Fibre Channel Physical Layer FC PH standard such as optical fiber copper twisted pair and copper coaxial cable Fibre Channel FC Integrated set of standards recognized by American National Standards Institute ANSI which defines specific protocols for flexible information transfer Logically a point to point serial data channel structured for high performance Fibre Channel adapter FC adap
163. bre Channel protocol building blocks composed of one or more nonconcurrent sequences expansion port E_Port Physical interface on a Fibre Channel switch within a fabric that attaches to an E_Port on another Fibre Channel switch through an interswitch link ISL to form a multiswitch fabric See also fabric loop port fabric port hub port node loop port node port explicit fabric login The process by which a node port N_Port learns the characteristics of the fabric to which it is attached by sending a fabric login command FLOGI frame to the fabric port F_Port address FFFFFE hexadecimal extended distance feature XDF A means to extend the propagation distance of a fiber optic signal F fabric Entity that is capable of routing switching Fibre Channel frames using the destination ID information in the Fibre Channel frame header accompanying the frames fabric element Any active director switch or node in a switched fabric fabric group A collection of interconnected SAN devices discovered by the SAN Management application Fabric groups display with a blue background on the Physical Map 305 Glossary fabric login The process by which node ports N_Ports establish their operating parameters During fabric login the presence or absence of a fabric is determined and paths to other N_Ports are mapped Specific operating characteristics for each port such as buffer to buffer credit BB_Credit a
164. by E IBM Dictionary of Computing ZC20 1699 Definitions from this text are identified by D Information Technology Vocabulary developed by Subcommittee 1 SC1 Joint Technical Committee 1 JTC1 of the International Organization for Standardization ISO and the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Definitions of published parts of this vocabulary are identified by I Definitions taken from draft international standards committee drafts and working papers developed by ISO IEC SC1 JTC1 are identified by T indicating that final agreement has not been reached among the participating national bodies of SC1 EFC Manager Software User Manual 295 53 1000663 03 Glossary A accelerator A short cut keystroke method to perform a menu operation Menu options may have accelerator keys listed to the right of the menu option Use the listed accelerator to perform the menu option s function when no menu is selected for the window D access The ability and means necessary to store data in to retrieve data from to transfer data into to communicate with or to make use of any resource of a storage product a system or area such as random access memory RAM or a register access control A list of all products that can access other products across the network and the permissions associated with that access See also persistent binding zoning access time The amount of time including seek time latency and co
165. ces refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 To get the latest information about sessions that displays in the frame sniffer you should refresh the Frame Sniffer dialog box 1 Select Monitor gt Frame Sniffer The Frame Sniffer dialog box displays 2 Click Refresh The information for all the running sessions is updated including finish time frame count and session status 3 Click OK EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring the SNMP Agent 5 Configuring the SNMP Agent The following sections provide instructions for configuring the SNMP agent Setting Up the SNMP Agent The simple network management protocol SNMP agent instruments the objects defined in the Fibre Channel Management FCMGMT Management Information Base MIB Version 3 1 and a small number of objects defined in MIB II Through instrumentation of these MIB objects the agent acts as a translator of information stored on the Server into a form usable by SNMP management stations You can configure network addresses and community names for up to 12 SNMP trap recipients which receive messages through SNMP for specific events that occur on the Server To configure the SNMP agent that runs on the Server and implements the Fibre Alliance MIB use the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt SNMP Agent gt Setup The SNMP Agent Setup dialog box displays 2 Inthe SNMP Agent Setup dialog box click the Community String tab Figure 60
166. cess Gateway is physically connected in the Product List If discovered indirectly discover the edge switch to which Access Gateway is physically connected Access Gateway does not display in the Topology Map All connected end devices display as an collapsed NPIV host group connected to an edge switch in the Topology Map For more information about Web Tools refer to the Brocade Web Tools Administrator s Guide For more information about Brocade Access Gateway refer to the Brocade Access Gateway Administrator s Guide 138 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 N_Port ID Virtualization Discovery 4 N_Port ID Virtualization Discovery EFCM 9 6 and higher supports discovery of N_Port ID Virtualization NPIV devices and virtual N_ports logged into B model devices NPIV devices display as a single host icon in the Topology Map and as the real N_port with the corresponding virtual ports below in the Product List To view a NPIV virtual port right click the host icon in the Product List and select Port Display gt Occupied Product Ports Setting Up Discovery To discover specific IP addresses or subnets set up discovery NOTE Only one copy of the application should be used to monitor and manage the same devices in a subnet 1 Select Discover gt Setup The Discover Setup dialog box displays 2 Click the General tab Figure 26 General Out of Band Polling Delay 16 seconds Y Out of Band Discovery
167. cessary add or remove trap recipients Refer to Adding Trap Recipients on page 198 and Removing Trap Recipients on page 198 for instructions 3 Inthe Configure Trap Forwarding dialog box select the recipient from the Available Recipients table and add it to the Selected Recipients table by clicking the right arrow 4 To forward all traps received by the application to the recipients listed in the Selected Recipients table select the Enable Trap Forwarding option 5 Click OK EFC Manager Software User Manual 197 53 1000663 03 5 198 Configuring Trap Forwarding Adding Trap Recipients 1 Select Monitor gt Trap Forwarding The Configure Trap Forwarding dialog box displays Figure 55 Click Add The Add Trap Recipient dialog box displays Figure 56 Description ins IP Address 172 0 0 2 Port 162 OK Cancel FIGURE 56 Add Trap Recipient Dialog Box Optional In the Description field enter a description of the trap recipient In the IP Address field enter the trap recipient s IP address The SAN Management application accepts IP addresses in IPv4 or IPv6 formats In the Port field enter the trap recipient s TCP IP port number NOTE The SAN Management application interprets trap data and displays the proper port value for all firmware levels When traps are generated on the switch for firmware versions 4 X and below the varbind shows the correct port number 0 as the first port howev
168. ch 907 1003 0031 A device supporting management server has sent an Activate Zoneset Direct 4 AZSD command that did not follow the expected standard layout 992 3003 0003 Diagnostic testing has determined that there is a failure on specified I O 4 blade The blade did not pass the Power On Self Test POST 993 3004 0001 A non fatal hardware error was discovered during the Power On Self Test 4 POST phase of startup 994 3004 0002 Diagnostic testing has determined that there is a partial failure on specified 4 1 0 blade Most likely at least one of the ports did not pass the Power On Self Test POST 999 6001 0001 The Hotreset command has failed due to insufficient memory on the switch 4 The switch has been returned to its state before the Hotreset command was entered 290 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 TABLE 62 Brocade Events In this Appendix Event Reason Code FRU Code Event Type Description Severity 1009 MS 1009 Error in registered link incident record RLIR 4 1050 EM 1050 FRU removed 2 1426 FW 1426 Faulty or Missing Power supply 3 1427 FW 1427 Faulty Power supply 3 1428 FW 1428 Missing Power supply 3 1429 FW 1429 Problem in power supply arrangement 3 1430 FW 1430 Faulty Temperature sensors 3 1431 FW 1431 Faulty fans 3 1432 FW 1432 Faulty WWN Cards 3 1433 FW 1433 Faulty CPs 3 1434 FW 1434 Faulty Blades 3 1402 FW 1402 Flash usage is out of range 3 1436 FW 143
169. ch partition as a separate hard drive Each partition has a unique drive letter 318 PC See personal computer persistent binding A form of server level access control that uses configuration information to bind a server to a specific Fibre Channel storage volume or logical device using a unit number See also access control personal computer PC A portable computer that consists of a system unit display keyboard mouse one or more diskette drives and internal fixed disk storage D physical map The map of the topology that displays when you select the View tab on the main window of the SAN Management application The Physical Map displays devices and their connections and ports point to point A Fibre Channel protocol topology that provides a single direct connection between two communication ports The director or switch supports only point to point topology D See also arbitrated loop polling delay The time in seconds between successive discovery processes during which discovery is inactive port Receptacle on a device to which a cable leading to another device can be attached Ports provide Fibre Channel connections D port address name A user defined symbolic name of 24 characters or less that identifies a particular port address port authorization Feature of the password definition function that allows an administrator to extend operator level passwords to specific port addresses for each dir
170. change Click Login Click OK on the EFCM Login Banner For the latest information about this release refer to the software release notes Go to the http www brocade com support resources website and follow the instructions to access the Brocade EFCM 9 7 Release Notes EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Installing the Application Post Installation Requirements If you are running in a dual NIC environment make sure that the Server and FTP Server IP addresses are correct To edit the Server and FTP Server IP address parameters complete the following steps 1 Open the lt nstall_Home gt resources Server config properties file using a text editor for example Notepad Go to the following line smp switchToServerIPAddress Enter the IP address of the Server Save and close the file Open the lt nstall_Home gt ftpServer apps ftp conf ftpd conf file using a text editor for example Notepad Go to the following line FtpServer server config host 0 0 0 0 where 0 0 0 0 is the current Server IP address Change the IP address Uncomment the FtpServer server config host parameter delete the Save and close the file 10 Stop and restart the server and the FTP server EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 1 15 1 Installing the Application Installing on UNIX Systems Follow these instructions to install the application on UNIX Servers NOTE If you are upgrading
171. ches ISLs and end nodes in the virtual SAN 3 View the switch s properties using the Properties dialog box or the Product List 4 View the VSAN s name and principle switch s WWN through the Fabric Properties dialog box Fibre Channel networks use World Wide Names to uniquely identify nodes and ports within nodes For many devices the 64 bit WWNs are fixed and their assignment follows conventions established by the IEEE For other devices the WWNs may be set or modified by the user World Wide Names are a special concern for the SAN Management application because of the following reasons WWNs are used as the primary keys to identify network elements Experience has been that an ill formed WWN is evidence of a malfunctioning device Proper operation with the SAN Management application requires that WWNs be unique within the network and well formed they must be 64 bits in length and the first byte cannot be zero EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Customizing the Main Window 3 Customizing the Main Window You can customize the main window to display only the data you need by displaying different levels of detail on the Physical Map topology or Product List Zooming In and Out of the Physical Map You can zoom in or out of the Physical Map to see products and ports Zooming In To zoom in on the Physical Map use one of the following methods e Click the zoom in icon on the toolbox e Press CT
172. ck OK The Event Filter name and the description are displayed in the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box 7 Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box Assigning an Event Filter to a Call Home Center Event filters allow call home center users to log in to a EFCM server and assign specific event filters to the devices This limits the number of unnecessary or acknowledge events and improves the performance and effectiveness of the call home center You can only select one event filter at a time however you can assign the same event filter to multiple devices or call home centers When you assign an event filter to a call home center the event filter is assigned to all devices in the call home center For more information about Call Home events refer to Appendix page 287 NOTE You cannot assign an event filter to call home center that does not contain devices To assign an event filter to a call home center complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays In the Call Home Event Filters table select the event filters you want to assign In the Call Home Centers table select the call home centers to which you want to assign the event filter 4 Click gt right arrow button The selected event filters are assigned to the selected call home centers 5 Click OK to close the Advanced Ca
173. col for remote terminal connection over a network connection terabyte TB One thousand 1 000 gigabytes one terabyte of text on paper would consume 42 500 trees At 12 characters per inch 1 TB of data in a straight line would encircle the earth 56 times and stretch some 1 4 million miles equalling nearly three round trips from the earth to the moon text box A box in a dialog box into which you can type data Threshold Alert Log Director or switch Threshold Alert Log Log displayed through the Element Manager application that provides details of threshold alert notifications for an individual director or switch The log displays the date and time an alert occurred and displays details about the alert as configured for the product The information is useful to maintenance personnel for fault isolation and repair verification See also Audit Log master log Hardware Log Link Incident Log TL_Port See translated loop port topology Logical and or physical arrangement of devices on a network transfer rate The speed with which data can be transmitted from one device to another Data rates are often measures in megabits Mbps or megabytes MBps per second or gigabits Gbps or gigabytes per second GBps EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Glossary transmission control protocol Internet protocol TCP IP A layered set of protocols network and transport that allows sharing of applications among devices
174. command in the View gt Show Panels menu however disables all functional buttons in the Users Software Devices IP Access Con trol and Radius Servers tabs in the Security Cen ter Disables the Clear button the Security Log dialog box Enables the Export button in the Security Log dialog box Enables the Security tab Enables the Security Log command on the Monitor gt Logs and the Security Center command in the View gt Show Panels menu Enables all func tions in the Security Cen ter Enables all functions in the Security Log dialog box Servers Allows you to identify all the HBAs that are in the same server EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Disables the Servers command from the Dis cover menu Disables the Server right click command on HBAs Enables Servers com mand from the Discover menu and right click menu however disables the Create Delete and OK buttons Enables Servers com mand from the Discover menu and right click menu Enables all functions in the Servers dialog box 279 F In this Appendix TABLE 56 Privilege Setup Tools Show Route Privileges and Application Behavior Description Allows you to define and place commands on prod uct icons and in the Tools menu Allows you to highlight the route through the fabric that two end nodes use to communicate No Privilege Disables the Setup Tools command on the Tools menu Any existi
175. complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays 2 Click Add Remove Centers beneath the Call Home Centers table The Call Home Centers dialog box displays with a predefined list of call home centers 3 Clear the checkboxes of the call home centers you want to hide and click OK The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays with only selected call home centers listed in the Call Home Centers table EFC Manager Software User Manual 39 53 1000663 03 40 1 Configuring Advanced Call Home Editing a Call Home Center NOTE Advanced Call Home is supported on Windows systems for all Call Home Centers and is supported on Solaris for the SUN E mail Call Home Center To edit a call home center select from the following procedures e Editing the Brocade International or IBM Call Home Center 40 e Editing the Brocade North America or HP Modem Call Home Center 41 e Editing the EMC Call Home Center 06 00 eee 41 e Editing the HP LAN Call Home Center 0 0c eee eee eee eee 42 e Editing the IBM E mail or SUN E mail Call Home Center 42 Editing the Brocade International or IBM Call Home Center To edit a call home center complete the following steps 1 10 Tti 12 13 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Hom
176. cover Setup dialog box displays 2 Select the IP address you want to edit from the Available Addresses area and click Edit If the IP address you want to edit is in the Selected Individual Addresses area of the Discovery Setup dialog box then an message displays telling you that you must remove the IP Address from the Selected Individual Addresses area before editing Click OK to close the message Remove the IP address from the Selected Individual Addresses tab of the Discovery Setup dialog box then repeat this step to edit the IP address NOTE You can also enable extended discovery when you are adding an IP address For more information refer to Adding an IP Address on page 142 3 Select the Enable check box to allow extended discovery support for a device The SAN Management application discovers all devices in the same fabric as the discovered device 4 Click OK on the Address Properties dialog box Move the IP address to the Selected Individual Addresses area 6 Click OK on the Discover Setup dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 145 53 1000663 03 4 146 Configuring Address Properties Disabling Extended Discovery When you disable extended discovery support for a device the SAN Management application only discovers the devices connected to the specified device Extended discovery is enabled by default You should disable extended discovery if the following conditions exist e The fabric is an edge fabric rout
177. cribes the effect that each user privilege has on the application when placed in one of the three available configurations no privilege read only and read write User privilege is EFCM s method of providing roll based access control RBAC to the software s user administrator This appendix provides information about user privileges and access levels About User Privileg eS sinnnnni a a 272 e About User Groups and Access Levels s11scsccssssssstecssssssssecsesssseneees 285 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 271 F In this Appendix About User Privileges TABLE 56 Privilege Active Session Manage ment Add Delete Properties Advanced Call Home In EFCM groups are assigned privileges and views Privileges are not directly assigned to users users get privileges because they belong to groups If a user is assigned to two or more groups they receive the highest level no privilege read only read write for the privilege assigned to any of the groups to which they belong The following table defines all the privileges in EFCM and the behavior of the application if the privilege is not given read only or read write Privileges and Application Behavior Description Allows you to view and disconnect client ses sions Allows you to define new properties as well as remove them Allows you to configure call home centers devices and event filters No Privilege Disables the Active Ses
178. cription 67 toolbox description 68 tools accessing 123 adding 123 adding to Tools menu 124 changing on Tools menu 125 opening from 129 removing 124 Tools menu 66 adding an option 124 changing an option 125 removing an option 125 topology See physical map total user count 69 trap forwarding feature 286 trap forwarding configuring 197 trap recipients adding 198 209 211 configuring 207 editing 210 overview 207 removing 198 211 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 troubleshooting addresses 229 discovery 230 fabric binding 233 import issue 235 installation issue 235 LUNs 233 managing Cisco switches 236 mapping loop to hub 235 miscellaneous problems 234 products 234 server startup issue 236 server client communication issue 235 Windows service issue 236 turning off discovery 151 turning on discovery 151 U unassociating HBA to server 77 uninstalling EFCM 21 from AIX systems 22 from HP UX systems 22 from Linux systems 22 from Solaris systems 22 from UNIX systems 21 on Windows systems 21 UNIX installing on 16 uninstalling from 21 UNIX terminating the application 16 unknown device icon 244 unknown icon 246 unpersisting fabrics 194 unpersisting products 194 upgrading license key 10 SAN Management application 10 user group access levels 285 privileges 272 user groups creating 94 editing 96 removing 97 user ID determining
179. ct List as product labels Nicknames must have been defined in the Node List View of the SAN Management application Nicknames defined in the Configure Ports area is not imported For step by step instructions about importing nicknames refer to Importing Nicknames on page 120 If the WWN identifies a port or both a port and a node the following actions occur The nickname is always given to the port If special handling is selected for the port s node either HBA or Storage Tape Bridge the nickname is also given to the node NOTE The Storage Tape Bridge special handling selection may not work if you use LUN Management LUN Management is an optional module available to previous LUN Management licensed customers Ifthe node has multiple ports the nickname from the first port on the device is given to the node If the WWN identifies a node of any kind the nickname is always given to the node never to the node s ports EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Export and Import 3 e Properties csv Imports properties of products and ports including nicknames and IP addresses The general format for this import is in comma separated value CSV ASCII format The first line defines the kind of import Node or Port and lists the properties and columns in the Product List The first column must be either Node Name or Port Name Subsequent columns contain property column names These properties may be standard for
180. ct Type in SANPilot or EFCM Basic b Verify that the Type Number is one of the following 003016 003032 003216 003232 004300 004500 005000 006064 006140 c Verify that the World Wide Name has the correct syntax XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX EFC Manager Software User Manual 153 53 1000663 03 4 Troubleshooting Discovery 4 Verify SNMP connectivity a Use a third party MIB browser to verify the SNMP connection b Change the SNMP default timeout 1 Stop the Server 2 Increase the default SNMP settings If the device is running heavy traffic or is known to have slow SNMP response time moderately increase the SNMP timeout default time out is one second and retry count default count is one retry These two values are controlled by two VMParameters residing in the bin EFCMService ini file when the application is running as a Windows service smp snmp timeout and smp snmp retries For example specifying _Dsmp snmp timeout 5 and Dsmp snmp retries 1 instructs the server to use five seconds as the SNMP time out and one retry as the retry count NOTE The higher the values the longer discovery spends waiting for an SNMP response This translates into slower system performance 3 Restart the server 154 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Storage Port Mapping 4 Configuring Storage Port Mapping The SAN Management application enables you to see multiple ports on your storage devices in
181. ctions when any of those sub pages are selected Trap Forwarding Allows you to specify where to forward the traps it receives from other systems Disables the Trap For warding command from the Monitor menu Enables the Trap Forward ing command from the Monitor menu however disables the Add Remove and OK buttons Enables the Trap Forward ing command from the Monitor menu Enables all functions in the Config ure Trap Forwarding dia log box User Management Allows you to create and the define users groups as well as assign privi leges and views to groups EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Disables the Users com mand on the main SAN menu and the Users but ton on the main tool bar Disables the User List button in the Event Notifi cation Setup dialog box Enables the Users com mand on the SAN menu and the Users button on the main tool bar how ever disables the Add Edit and Remove Users Add and Remove Groups and OK buttons on the Users dialog box Enables the Edit Groups button to display the Group dialog box with OK button dis abled Enables the Users com mand on the SAN menu and the Users button on the main tool bar Enables all functions on the Users dialog box and the secondary Group dia log box 281 F In this Appendix TABLE 56 Privilege View Management Privileges and Application Behavior Description Allows you to create edit
182. customer service troubleshoot problems as well as configure TFTP root path properties e Router Consistency Select to display the router s properties e Log Viewer Select to generate a log file e Save To Flash Select to save changes to the Router Port Configuration or SAN Router Configuration to flash memory e Zoning Select to configure zones in SANs e List Zone Members Select to display all members in a zone e LUN Management Select to configure logical unit numbers LUNs for your SANs LUN Management is an optional module available to previous LUN Management licensed customers e Port Fencing Select to configure port fencing to protect your SAN from repeated operational or security problems experienced by ports e Enterprise Fabric Mode Select to activate Enterprise Fabric Mode which enables Fabric Binding Switch Binding Domain RSCNs and Insistent Domain ID e Fabric Binding Select to configure whether switches can merge with a selected fabric which provides security from accidental fabric merges and potential fabric disruption when fabrics become segmented because they cannot merge EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 User Interface Description 2 Monitor Menu The Monitor menu provides the following commands e Performance Select to monitor SAN devices e Setup Select to start performance monitoring e Latency Graphs Select to monitor the time it takes for data to go from an HBA to a device
183. d The unit of signaling speed expressed as the maximum number of times per second the signal can change the state of the transmission line or other medium The units of baud are seconds to the negative 1 power Note With Fibre Channel scheme a signal event represents a single transmission bit BB_Credit See buffer to buffer credit beaconing Use of light emitting diodes LEDs on ports port cards field replaceable units FRUs and directors to aid in the fault isolation process When enabled active beaconing causes LEDs to flash to enable the user to locate field replaceable units FRUs switches or directors in cabinets or computer rooms ber See bit error rate bidirectional In Fibre Channel protocol the capability to simultaneously communicate at maximum speeds in both directions over a link bit Abbreviated as b 1 Binary digit the smallest unit of data in computing with a value of zero or one D 2 A bit is the basic data unit of all digital computers It is usually part of a data byte or data word however a single bit can be used to control or read logic ON OFF functions 3 A bit is a single digit in a binary number Bits are the basic unit of information capacity on a computer storage product Eight bits equals one byte bit error rate Abbreviated as ber Ratio of received bits that contain errors to total of all bits transmitted EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 blocked connec
184. d login and password account on the new Server The Server s name displays in the Server Name field Enter your user ID and password Click Forget password or Save password to select whether you want the application to remember your password the next time you log in 5 Click Login The application logs into the Server located at the specified network address EFC Manager Software User Manual 75 53 1000663 03 3 76 Configuring a Server Viewing Server Properties Select SAN gt Server Properties The EFCM 9 7 Server Properties dialog box displays Figure 12 Name pte2crcs1 CHAP Secret Retype Secret Encryption Key Login Security Allow clients to save password on login X P Address 172167 212 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Wing2 Service yes Started At 9 25107 11 35 40 AM MDT RMI Registry Port 51511 RMI Export Port 51510 Trap Listening Port 162 Java VM Version 11 5 0_09 b01 Java VM Vendor Sun Microsystems Inc Java VM Name Java HotSpot TM Server VM OS Architecture x86 OS Name Windows XP OS Version 54 Region us Time Zone America Denver Free Memory 3178072 Total Memory 19914752 MIB Version 9 6 0 31 20564 MPI Version 04 06 00 2 August 16 2007 ECC API Version 414 ok Cancel FIGURE 10 EFCM 9 7 Server Properties dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring a Server 3 Configuring HBAs and Servers The SAN Management application allows you to associat
185. ddress Properties In the Target Port field enter the target port In the Time out sec field enter the duration in seconds after which the application times out In the Retries field enter the number of times to retry the process 8 From the SNMP Version drop down list select the SNMP version e If you selected v1 or v2c continue with step 9 e Ifyou select v3 the SNMP tab displays the v3 required parameters Go to step 14 9 At the Read option select Default public or Custom 10 If you selected Custom enter the community string in the Custom and Confirm Custom fields 11 At the Write option select Default private or Custom 12 If you selected Custom enter the community string in the Custom and Confirm Custom fields Go to step 22 13 If you are configuring a MiLOK director select the Configure for Intrepid LOK check box e If you selected Configure for Intrepid 10K go to step 16 e If you did not select Configure for Intrepid 10K continue with step 14 14 In the User Name field enter a user name IP Address SNMP Product Type and Access Target Port 161 Time out sec 5 Retries 2 SNMP Version Ww Presets C Configure for Intrepid 10K User Name Context Name Auth Protocol None v Priv Protocol None v OK Cancel Help FIGURE 30 Address Properties Dialog Box SNMP Tab v3 15 In the Context Name field enter a context name 16 In the Auth Protocol field sel
186. determining status 68 determining status of 166 persisted determining status 195 persisting 194 unpersisting 194 unpersisting product 194 viewing 218 failed icon 246 FCIP bridge group icon 245 FCIP bridge icon 244 FCIP gateway group icon 245 FCIP gateway icon 244 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 feature active session management 285 add delete properties 285 backup 285 call home event notification 285 device administration 285 device maintenance 285 device operation 285 discover on off 285 discovery setup 285 e mail event notification setup 285 enterprise fabric mode 285 event management 285 export 285 fabric binding 285 frame sniffer 285 group manager create event log 285 group manager firmware install 285 group manager run data collection 285 import 285 license update 285 log management 285 LUN management 285 map editing 285 map HBA to server 285 map loop to hub 285 map port to storage 285 monitor ethernet event 286 performance 286 persist fabric 286 planning 286 port fencing 286 properties edit 286 remote access 286 report 286 security admin 286 setup tools 286 show route 286 shutdown 286 SNMP agent configuration 286 software configuration properties 286 trap forwarding 286 user management 286 view management 286 virtual fabric 286 feature documentation 235 files exporting 109 importing 109 116 filtering events in master log 2
187. devices from the call home centers e Define filters from the list of events generated by Brocade devices e Edit and remove filters available in the Call Home Event Filters table e Apply filters to and remove filters from the devices individually or in groups e Edit individual call home center parameters to dial a specified phone number or email a specific recipient e Enable and disable individual devices from contacting the assigned call home centers e Show or hide call home centers on the display e Enable and disable call home centers System Requirements Advanced Call Home requires the following hardware equipment e 1U Server or any Windows Server with an internal external modem connection e Analog telephone EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Advanced Call Home 1 Showing a Call Home Center To show a call home center complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays Click Add Remove Centers beneath the Call Home Centers table The Call Home Centers dialog box displays with a predefined list of call home centers Select the checkboxes of the call home centers you want to display and click OK The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays with the selected call home center listed in the Call Home Centers table Hiding a Call Home Center To hide a call home center
188. dialog box displays In the Display table select the nickname of the device you want to remove Click Remove An application message displays asking if you are sure you want clear the selected nickname Click Yes Click OK to close the Configure Nicknames dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 173 53 1000663 03 5 Configuring Enterprise Fabric Mode Configuring Enterprise Fabric Mode NOTE Enterprise Fabric Mode is only available on M model fabrics The Enterprise Fabric Mode option is available on the Configure menu This option automatically enables features and operating parameters that are necessary in multiswitch Enterprise Fabric environments When Enterprise Fabric Mode is enabled each switch in the fabric automatically enforces a number of security related features including Fabric Binding Switch Binding Insistent Domain IDs and Domain Register for State Change Notifications RSCNs About Enterprise Fabric Mode Activating Enterprise Fabric Mode enables the following features e Fabric Binding Allows or prohibits switches from merging with a selected fabric NOTE Fabric Binding cannot be disabled while Enterprise Fabric Mode is active even if the switch is offline e Switch Binding This feature enabled through a product s Element Manager allows or prohibits switches from connecting to switch E_Ports and products from connecting to F_Ports NOTE Switch binding can be disabled while Enterprise Fabric Mod
189. discov ered Ensure that your SNMP communication parameters are set correctly to discover manageable switches For a list of manageable products refer to Table 22 Prod uct Icons on page 243 Devices cycle between online and offline Select SAN gt Options Select the SNMP Discovery under Software Configuration Increase the value in the SNMP Timeout field Select the Apply settings to all currently defined IP addresses check box Click OK aFWNE EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Problem Discovered devices are not being displayed In this Appendix A Resolution To correctly discover all SAN devices specify each device in the Out of Band dialog box either by the individual IP address or by subnet 1 Select Discover gt Setup 2 Select the General tab 3 Select the Out of Band Discovery check box 4 Select the Out of Band tab to specify the IP addresses you want to discover through out of band discovery 5 Add change and remove IP addresses as necessary Refer to Configuring Address Properties on page 142 for instructions 6 Select IP addresses from the Available Addresses table and add them to the Selected Subnets or Selected Individual Addresses tables by clicking the appropriate right arrow NOTE If you change the password on the Switch or Director you must enter the new password during discovery on the Product Type and Access tab of the Address Properties di
190. discovered by the target server Switches directly managed by the MoM server have all the capabilities TABLE 18 Manager of Manager ECC API Discovery MoM Server Target Server Only MPI managed switches see below display in the topology All managed switches display in the topology with the specific icons with the generic icon All switches connected to the managed switches display with the generic Brocade M4700F Switch icons Brocade M 6140 Director Brocade M i10K Director ED 5000 Director Sphereon 3016 Switch Sphereon 3032 Switch Sphereon 3216 Switch Sphereon 3232 Switch Sphereon 4400 Switch Sphereon 4500 Switch Sphereon 4710 Switch Intrepid 6064 Director All switches connected to the managed switches display with the generic icons Devices display as unmanaged switches gray The MoM server displays a consolidated view of the discovered servers Call Home is not available Call home is available Element Manager cannot be launched for devices discovered Element Manager can be launched through a target server Enterprise Fabric Mode is not available Enterprise Fabric Mode is available 134 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 TABLE 18 Manager of Manager ECC API Discovery MoM Server Events are not passed back to the MoM server Manager of Manager Discovery 4 Target Server Events are available Fabric Binding is not available Fabric Binding is available Firmware
191. dvanced Call Home This information is shown in the following Event Tables Call Home Eyent TADIG isani 288 FECONSRY EYO ssis aa 289 Thermal Event REASON CodeS wwissisecisessrsasiseesursaatsscstvanassacsusenvascene 290 QLOGIC EVENS srini riina anaa Ea ENTANA IE VANT 290 Brocade Events EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 287 G In this Appendix TABLE 58 Call Home Event Table Event Reason Code FRU Code Event Type Description Severity 10 None SW Login Server unable to synchronize databases 2 11 None SW Login Server database found to be invalid 2 20 None SW Name Server unable to synchronize databases 2 21 None SW Name Server database found to be invalid 2 40 None SW Operator panel has failed 2 50 None SW Management Server unable to synchronize databases 2 51 None SW Management Server database found to be invalid 2 60 None SW Fabric Controller unable to synchronize databases 2 61 None SW Fabric Controller database found to be invalid 2 90 None SW Database replication time out 2 153 PWR HW ifcpBackupActivated 4 154 PWR HW ifcpRemoteConnectionDown 4 155 PWR HW CallHomeRPortError 3 200 None SW Power supply AC voltage failure 3 201 PWR HW Power supply DC voltage failure 3 202 PWR HW Power supply thermal failure 3 208 PWR HW Power supply false shutdown 3 300 FAN HW A cooling fan propeller has failed 3 301 FAN HW A c
192. e SAN including configuration and discovery events Mb Megabit MB See megabyte Mbps Megabits per second MBps Megabytes per second media access control address MAC address Hardware address of a node device connected to a network megabyte MB A unit of measure for data storage equal to 1 048 576 bytes Generally approximated as one million bytes memory A device or storage system capable of storing and retrieving data EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Glossary menu A list of items displayed on a monitor from which a user can make a selection menu bar The menu bar is located across the top of a window Pull down menus are displayed by clicking on the menu bar option with the mouse or by pressing ALT with the underlined letter of the name for the menu bar option D message path controller card MPC card In the ED 5000 Director a card that provides the mechanism for messages to be sent and received between ports on the director The card also provides a system clock source and central control and distribution of clocks for MPC G_Port module GPM and central memory module CMM cards See also Fibre Channel 1 0 controller metropolitan area network MAN A network capable of high speed communications over distances up to about 100 kilometers See also local area network storage area network wide area network MIB See management information base microsecond us mirr
193. e rights Displays the message You do not have rights to perform this action Same as No Privilege Enables the functions described in the Element Manager User Manual Product Operation NOTE This privilege affects M EOS and M EOSn switch product Element Managers An Element Manager priv ilege that enables opera tor functions Disables the functions described in the Element Manager User Manual for which you do not have rights Displays the message You do not have rights to perform this action Same as No Privilege Enables the functions described in the Element Manager User Manual Properties Edit Allows you to edit many director and switch prop erties Enables the Properties command on Edit menu and right click menus Disables edit function removes green triangles from editable property fields Same as No Privilege Enables Properties com mand on Edit menu and right click menus Enables editable proper ties marked by a green triangle in the Product List and the Properties Sheets Remote Access 278 Allows you to limit access of clients coming from specific IP addresses Disables the Remote Access command on the SAN menu Enables the Remote Access command on the SAN menu Allows you to open the Remote Access dialog box however disables the OK button EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Enables the Remote Access command on the S
194. e Configuration dialog box displays In the Call Home Centers table select the call home center you want to edit Click Edit Centers beneath the Call Home Centers table The Configure Call Home Center dialog box displays In the Call Home Centers list select Brocade International or IBM Select Enable to enable this call home center To set the interval at which to check the call home center select the Set the heartbeat interval at days 1 28 check box and enter the interval in the field In the Call Home Center Primary Connection field enter the primary phone number or extension of the call home center In the Call Home Center Backup Connection field enter the backup phone number or extension of the call home center In the Local Server Phone Number field enter the phone number or extension of the local server In the Local Server Server ID field enter the identification number of the local server Click Send Test to test the phone number The selected call home center must be enabled to test the phone number Click OK The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays with the call home center you edited highlighted in the Call Home Centers table Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Advanced Call Home 1 Editing the Brocade North America or HP Modem Call Home Center To edit a call home center complete the
195. e Enterprise Fabric Mode was enabled Disable the Enterprise Fabric Mode through the Enterprise Fabric Mode dialog box before disabling Fabric Bind ing Enabling secure socket shell SSH service errors This feature is dependent on having the Element Manager feature installed If the error message received error in attempt to release admin privileges rea son no response displays while configuring the SSH service for Switch Blades using Element Manager you must install the Blade Switch Element Manager HBAs not connected to SAN Check your physical cables and connectors Switches not connected to Ethernet Check your physical cables and connectors Switches not connected to SAN Miscellaneous Problems 234 Problem Cannot delete text in Telnet session window in Linux sys tem Check your physical cables and connectors Resolution On Linux systems you must use CTRL BACKSPACE to delete text in the Telnet session window Code Execution Error Array Index Out Of Bounds dis plays Retry the command or action If the problem persists contact Customer Support Code Execution Error Inter nal Exception displays Retry the command or action If the problem persists contact Customer Support Code Execution Error Invalid Product Type displays Code Execution Error Miss ing Property File displays Retry the command or action If the p
196. e Storage Port Mapping dialog box choose from one of the following approaches Select a storage port icon in the topology view then select Discover gt Storage Port Mapping Right click any storage port icon in the topology view and select Storage Port Mapping Right click any storage port in the Device Tree and select Storage Port Mapping The Storage Port Mapping dialog box displays 2 Select a storage port from the Storage Array list and click the left arrow button The selected storage port is removed from the Storage Array list and added to the Storage Ports table 3 Click OK 156 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Storage Port Mapping 4 Reassigning Mapped Storage Ports 1 To open the Storage Port Mapping dialog box choose from one of the following approaches Select a storage port icon in the topology view then select Discover gt Storage Port Mapping Right click any storage port icon in the topology view and select Storage Port Mapping Right click any storage port in the Device Tree and select Storage Port Mapping The Storage Port Mapping dialog box displays 2 Select a storage port from the Storage Array list and click the left arrow button The selected storage port is removed from the Storage Array list and added to the Storage Ports table Make sure that the storage port you want to reassign is still selected Select the storage array to which you want to r
197. e Subnet Mask field enter the subnet mask address for the server Continue with step 5 If your operating system has IPv6 select the IPv6 Address option and complete the following steps a Inthe IPv6 Address field enter the return address for the server b Inthe Prefix Length field enter the prefix length Continue with step 5 5 Click Apply or OK to save your work NOTE Changes to this option take effect after an application restart EFC Manager Software User Manual 85 53 1000663 03 3 86 Configuration Options Configuring the Application to Use Dual Network Cards Issues with Client to Server connectivity can be due to different causes Some examples are e The computer running the Server has more than one network interface card NIC installed e The computer running the Server is behind a firewall that performs network address translation To make sure that Clients can connect to the Server you may need to edit the IP configuration setting in the Options dialog to manually specify the IP address that the Server should use to communicate to its Clients NOTE The server binds using IPv6 address by default if your Operating System is IPv6 enabled dual mode or IPv6 only Server binds using IPv4 address by default if your Operating System is IPv4 enabled Servers running in dual mode allow the client to communicate from both IPv6 and IPv4 addresses To configure the IP address and subnet mask to override the def
198. e an HBA to a Server unassociate an HBA from a Server rename a Server and delete a Server Associating an HBA to a Server ATTENTION Discovered information overwrites your user settings 1 On the Physical Map right click an HBA icon and select Server HBA Mapping from the menu The Create servers and assign HBAs dialog box displays Figure 11 Create servers and assign HBAs HBAs Servers HBA HBA Port Name Connected Device Por B a Host For Qlogic ELI Create E Qlogic 200000E08B06EAA0 4500 1 ja Qlogic gt Qlogic 200000E08B0303BC ED 6064 z gt Alogic RI Delete gt Qlogic 200000E08B09D81B Brocade2250_a E gt Emulex 20000000C92241EF 6064 i gt Properties gt Qlogic 2001 00E08B290543 gt Emulex 20000000C92F 3553 Brocade2250_a gt Qlogic 200000E08B071F78 Brocade2250_a gt Qlogic 200000E08B07590E Brocade2250_a lt gt Qlogic 200000E0858081F33 Brocade2250_a E SN 10000001730027D7 4500 1 Emulex 20000000C921B180 ED 6064 gt Qlogic 200000E08B085186 Brocade2250_a OK Cancel Help FIGURE 11 Create Servers and Assign HBAs Dialog Box 2 In the Servers table select the server to which you want to assign HBAs NOTE To add or remove servers click Create or Delete To rename a server click the server name once wait then click it again Type the new name over the old name 3 Select the HBA from the table on the left and click the right arrow The HBA displays in the Servers table The HBA
199. e and select Reports gt Zone Library OR e Select Configure gt Zoning then click Report on the Zoning dialog box The zoning report automatically displays in the View Reports dialog box NOTE Hyperlinks in reports are active only as long as the source data is available 3 To print the report click Show in Browser and complete the following steps The selected report displays in your default Web browser a Select File gt Print in the Web browser The Print dialog box displays b Select the printer to which you want to print and click Print c Select File gt Close to close the Web browser 4 To delete the report click Delete Report ATTENTION Once you click Delete Report the report is deleted without confirmation 5 Click Close to close the View Reports dialog box 228 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Appendix Troubleshooting A In this Appendix This appendix provides troubleshooting information Problems With ACLCSSES sssccccscsssserseceessssssecsssssansecsssseassesessseanenes 229 e Problems with Discovery e Problems with Fabric Binding sccssscecccsecesceceeceeeeseeeceseesesaeseeeeeeeeeeas 233 Problems WIth LUNS si sassdacciszsieccneds cedecensdisedeectsds weiecentdesestedvsdesseeeessiace 233 Problems With Products ccscssecccesseeessesecseesssesecsesssensecsscssessecsesssanseees 234 Miscellaneous PLODICINS ssssccccscssersccecessenscsnsessensenscesssasenscessan
200. e gt bin Double click restore bat A DOS window opens 6 Atthe Command Prompt enter the path to the backup source directory and press Enter The default is lt Hard Drive gt Backup 7 Atthe Command Prompt enter the path to the destination directory and press Enter The default is lt Install_Home gt EFCM 9 7 8 When you receive the Restore completed message press any key to close the DOS window 9 Restart the SAN Management application 10 Log back into the application 11 Make sure discovery is turned on If it is not select Discover gt On EFC Manager Software User Manual 35 53 1000663 03 1 Backing Up and Restoring Data Restoring Data from a Network Drive 1 Reinstall the application For step by step instructions about installing the application refer to Installing the Application on page 13 Open the SAN Management application and complete the configuration screens Stop the Backup Services a Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services The Services dialog box displays b Right click EFCM 9 7 Backup and select Stop 4 Change the directory to lt nstall_Home gt bin Double click restore bat A DOS window opens 6 Atthe Command Prompt enter the path to the backup source directory and press Enter The default is lt Network Drive gt Backup 7 Atthe Command Prompt enter the path to the destination directory and press Enter The default is lt Install_H
201. e is active if the switch is offline e Domain RSCNs This feature enabled through a product s Element Manager indicates that an event occurred to a switch in a fabric The only cause would be a switch entering or leaving the fabric Notifications are sent fabric wide and are not constrained by a zone set Domain RSCNs are not sent between end products e Insistent Domain ID This feature enabled through a product s Element Manager sets the domain ID as the active domain identification when the fabric initializes When Insistent Domain ID is enabled the switch isolates itself from the fabric if the preferred domain ID is not assigned as the switch s domain ID 174 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Enterprise Fabric Mode Setting Enterprise Fabric Mode NOTE Enterprise Fabric Mode is only available on M model fabrics 1 Select Configure gt Enterprise Fabric Mode The Enterprise Fabric Mode dialog box displays Figure 42 Enterprise Fabric Mode activates Fabric Binding Switch Binding Insistent Domain ID and Domain RSCNs Once activated deactivating Enterprise Fabric Mode will NOT disable these features Each feature may need to be disabled separately Current Status Fabric is not being managed Fabric Name 100008008840E010 sins Enterprise Fabric Mode Unknown Cancel Help FIGURE 42 Enterprise Fabric Mode Dialog Box 5 2 From the Fabric Name list select the fabric for which you
202. e product This field is editable at the fabric and device level e Device Type Displays the type of device Domain ID Displays the Domain ID for the product in the format xx yy where xx is the Brocade normalized value and yy is the actual value on the wire Driver Displays the product s driver Driver Version Displays the product s driver version Enclosure Displays the enclosure of the product This field is editable at the device level Fabric Displays the fabric nickname of the port EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 User Interface Description 2 e FC Address Displays the Fibre Channel address of the port e Firmware Displays the firmware version of the product This field is editable at the device level IP Address Displays the IP address IPv4 or IPv6 format of the product This field is editable at the device level iSCSI Alias Displays the name of the alias target iSCSI Node Name Displays the node name of the product iSCSI Node Type Displays the node type of the product Location Displays the physical location of the product This field is editable at the fabric and device level Management Link Displays whether the management link for the product is up or down Max Frame Size bytes Displays the maximum frame size in bytes of the port Model Displays the model number of the product This field is editable at the device level Name Port Displays the name of the port Name Display
203. e selected icon to identify either a planned or an installed device Discover Menu The Discover menu provides the following commands e On Select to turn on Discovery e Off Select to turn off Discovery e Setup Select to set up Discovery e Servers Select to create servers and assign HBAs e Storage Port Mapping Select to manually map Storage Ports to a Storage Device or other Storage Ports e Map to Hub Select to place each hub in the appropriate location of the topology EFC Manager Software User Manual 63 53 1000663 03 2 User Interface Description Configure Menu The Configure menu provides the following commands e Element Manager Select to launch the element manager for a selected device e Group Manager Select to manage a group of switches and directors e Virtual Switches Select to configure virtual switches in the SAN Virtual switches are created from multiple directors e Nicknames Select to provide familiar simple names to products and ports in your SAN e SAN Routing Select to interconnect storage area network SAN islands separately designated logical portions of a SAN within a larger network e Router Port Configuration Select to view the R_Ports on a SAN router e SAN Router Configuration Select to configure the Cluster ID SNTP Date and Time SNMP Traps or iFCP ID for an individual SAN Router or a group of SAN Routers e Configuration Archive Select to archive files and reports which help
204. e to respond to a request The specified time applies to one retry only 321 Glossary SNMP trap events SNMP is based on a manager agent model SNMP includes a limited set of management commands and responses The management system issues messages telling an agent to retrieve various object variables The managed agent sends a Response message to the management system That message is an event notification called a trap that identifies conditions such as thresholds that exceed a predetermined value state The state of the switch or director Possible values include online offline testing and faulty See offline state online state static random access memory SRAM SRAM is microprocessor cache random access memory It is built internal to the microprocessor or on external chips SRAM is fast but relatively expensive D Contrast with dynamic random access memory storage area network SAN A high performance data communications environment that interconnects computing and storage resources so that the resources can be effectively shared and consolidated See also local area network metropolitan area network wide area network stored addresses In FICON management style a method for configuring addresses subnet A portion of a network that shares a common address component On transmission control protocol Internet protocol TCP IP networks subnets are defined as all devices whose IP addresses have the same pref
205. e unsigned DB2 Int DOMAIN Domain MySQL Smallint N A unsigned DB2 Smallint PORT Port MySQL Smallint N A unsigned DB2 Smallint EXPORTTIME Exported time of the data Varchar 128 ZONEMEMBERFABRICADDRESS Table TABLE 52 Field Definition Format Size ID ID of member inthe ZoneMember MySQL Int N A table unsigned DB2 Int FABRICADDRESS Fabric address Varchar 128 EXPORTTIME Exported time of the data Varchar 128 ZONEMEMBERWWN Table TABLE 53 Field Definition Format Size ID ID of the member in the ZoneMember _ Int 11 table WWN World wide name Varchar 128 EXPORTTIME Exported time of the data Varchar 128 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 269 E In this Appendix ZONESET Table TABLE 54 Field Definition Format Size ID Zone set ID Varchar 255 ZONELIBRARYID ID of zone library the zone set Varchar 255 belongs to NAME Name of the zone set Varchar 255 ISACTIVE Active Varchar 128 ExportTime Exported time of the data Varchar 128 ZONESETZONES Table TABLE 55 Field Definition Format Size ZONESETID ID of the zone set Varchar 255 ZONEID ID of the zone Varchar 255 IFCPLINKID ID of the iFCP link Varchar 255 ExportTime Exported time of the Varchar 128 data 270 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Appendix User Privileges F In this Appendix EFCM provides the User Administrator with a high level of control over what functions your users can see and or use This section des
206. eassign the storage port and click the right arrow button The storage port moves from the Storage Ports table to the selected storage array 5 Click OK Creating a Storage Array 1 To open the Storage Port Mapping dialog box choose from one of the following approaches Select a storage port icon in the topology view then select Discover gt Storage Port Mapping Right click any storage port icon in the topology view and select Storage Port Mapping Right click any storage port in the Device Tree and select Storage Port Mapping The Storage Port Mapping dialog box displays 2 Click Create A new storage array displays in the Storage Array list Double click on the new array to rename the new storage array and press Enter Add storage ports to the new storage array For step by step instructions about adding port to an array refer to Adding Storage Ports to a Storage Array on page 156 NOTE You must add storage ports to the new storage array to save the new array in the system 5 Click OK EFC Manager Software User Manual 157 53 1000663 03 4 158 Configuring Storage Port Mapping Editing Storage Array Properties 1 To open the Storage Port Mapping dialog box choose from one of the following approaches Select a storage port icon in the topology view then select Discover gt Storage Port Mapping Right click any storage port icon in the topology view and select Storage Port Mapping
207. ect the authorization protocol 17 In the Auth Password field enter the authorization password 18 In the Retype Password field re enter the authorization password e If you selected Configure for Intrepid 10K go to step 22 e If you did not select Configure for Intrepid 10K continue with step 19 19 In the Priv Protocol field select the privacy protocol 20 In the Priv Password field enter the privacy password 21 In the Retype Password field re enter the privacy password EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Address Properties 22 Click OK on the Address Properties dialog box 23 Click OK on the Discover Setup dialog box Reverting to a Default SNMP Community String 1 Select Discover gt Setup The Discover Setup dialog box displays 2 Click the Out of Band tab Select an IP address from the Available Addresses table 4 Click Edit The Address Properties dialog box displays 5 Click the SNMP tab 6 Click Default public and Default private 7 Click OK on the Address Properties dialog box 8 Click OK on the Discover Setup dialog box Configuring the Product Type and Access You can specify the product type and set a user name and password for the address NOTE The Product Type and Access tab may not be available in all situations 1 Select Discover gt Setup The Discover Setup dialog box displays Click the Out of Band tab Click Add The Address Properties d
208. ect to displays only fabrics Groups Only Select to displays only groups All Products Select to displays all products All Ports Select to displays all ports e Enable Flyover Display Select to enable flyover display e Show Ports Select to show utilized ports on the selected device e Show Connected End Devices Select to show all connected end devices EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 61 2 User Interface Description e Map Display Layout Select to customize a group s layout to make it easier to view the SAN and manage its devices e Default For Group Select to display the devices in the default format e Custom Grid Select to drag and drop device or group icons Devices can only be moved within a group and groups can only be moved within a fabric After selecting Custom Grid click device or a group and drag it to the desired location Square Select to display the device icons in a square configuration Vertical Select to display the device icons vertically Horizontal Select to display the device icons horizontally Most Connected at Center Select to display the node that has the most connections at the center of the topology e Directional Select to display the internal nodes in a position where they mirror the external groups to which they are connected e Background Color Select to customize the topology by changing background color e Default Select to select the default background color
209. ections change to yellow dashed lines If one or some of the connections are disconnected but not all the enabled connections appear as black lines and the disabled connections display as yellow dashed lines with an interswitch link ISL alert To remove an ISL alert right click the connection and select Clear ISL Alert s If an ISL is added the ISL appears as a black line NOTE In a persisted fabric or switch group to see ISL Alerts you must set the line type to Straight right click the group and select Line Types then Straight If the line type is set to Orthogonal or None ISL alerts do not appear 1000080088002101 Clearing ISL Alerts To clear a single ISL alert right click the ISL and select Clear ISL Alert s To clear all ISL alerts select Edit gt Clear ISL Alert s Merging Persisted Fabrics When you merge two persisted fabrics the fabric whose principal switch will be the principal switch in the merged fabric will become the real fabric It will include the switches of both fabrics in the Physical Map and the Product List The other fabric will become a ghost fabric On the Physical Map the ghost fabric displays its original products with minus symbols On the Product List the fabric displays as offline and no products display under the fabric The ghost fabric will not be updated The Fabric Log is reset after the fabric merge Splitting Persisted Fabrics When you split persisted fabrics
210. ector or switch definition managed by a personal computer PC Port authorization affects only operator level actions for active and saved matrices D port card Field replaceable hardware component that provides the port connections for fiber cables and performs specific device dependent logic functions EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 port card map Map showing port numbers and port card slot numbers inside a hardware cabinet port name Name that the user assigns to a particular port through the Element Manager application See also identifier Synonymous with address name POST See power on self test power on self test POST Series of diagnostic tests that are run automatically by a device when the power is turned on preferred domain ID Configured value that a switch requests from the Principal Switch If the preferred value is already in use the Principal Switch assigns a different value principal switch In a multiswitch fabric the switch that allocates domain IDs to itself and to all other switches in the fabric There is always one principal switch in a fabric If a switch is not connected to any other switches it acts as its own principal switch private device A loop device that cannot transmit a fabric login command FLOGI command to a switch or director nor communicate with fabric attached devices Contrast with public device private loop A freestanding Arbitrated Loop with no fab
211. ed as a starting point to plan a new SAN completing the life cycle EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 User Interface Description 2 User Interface Description The main window contains a number of areas Descriptions are listed below the graphic NOTE Some panels may be hidden by default To view all panels select View gt Show Panels gt All Panels or press F12 walle ever Mensgomen sezat tenet Newmd s BD ooozeocezo1ce B BS svtch ocuwp Bera 114 S i lt a CEEE Suelo Grow fa OO0780C8 0 ICEF lt Mest Z ie O Any events tor aned view cosnd Ba E nmo R rosonnen 5 u pase ad in r ANIN 00 10 La APMP Traz dvb dar can started on hast 1727 0 20 _ i zion vennnrerevrTOovovsrttOTeVVOPSTrvere TO MreTvOT TOO s a aisee sere 1 samne FIGURE 4 Main Window 1 Menu Bar Lists commands you can perform on the SAN 2 Toolbar Provides buttons that enable quick access to dialog boxes and functions The buttons vary with the licensed modules on your system 3 View tab Displays the Master Log Utilization Legend Minimap Physical Map topology and Product List For more information refer to View Tab 4 Event Management tab Displays the tools you need to automate tasks performed on the SAN You can configure the application to perform any of the following functions automatically e Sending an e mail message when ev
212. ed through a B model router e The event log contains bogus events which you want to eliminate and the SAN Management server is managing all of the device in the fabric NOTE Enabling or disabling extended discovery for any IP address causes discovery to reload To disable extended discovery complete the following steps 1 Select Discover gt Setup The Discover Setup dialog box displays 2 Select the IP address you want to edit from the Available Addresses area and click Edit If the IP address you want to edit is in the Selected Individual Addresses area of the Discovery Setup dialog box then an message displays telling you that you must remove the IP Address from the Selected Individual Addresses area before editing Click OK to close the message Remove the IP address from the Selected Individual Addresses tab of the Discovery Setup dialog box then repeat this step to edit the IP address NOTE You can also disable extended discovery when you are adding an IP address For more information refer to Adding an IP Address on page 142 Clear the Enable check box Click OK on the Address Properties dialog box Move the IP address to the Selected Individual Addresses area oa Fw Click OK on the Discover Setup dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Address Properties 4 Removing an IP Address You can remove IP addresses from the Discover Setup dialog box 1 Select Discover gt Se
213. ee eee eee XV Supported Hardware and Software 0000 c cee eee eee xvi What s New in This Document 00 000 anuara eee Xvi Document ConventionS 0 0c cece eee eee xvii Text OKMAING soo woos ove ee ae ee Vee eee Resa eee ne xvii Notes cautions and warnings 0c eee eee eee xvii KEV TEMS ss c 2atcetariwiaendanedodaeawentae sae aee med xviii Additional information 60 asaan anaana xviii Brocade re SOUICES sa idae eee xviii Other industry reSOUICES 1 eee xviii Document feedback 0 00 ccc eee xix Getting Started Wh THIS CHA pter ss erie posia Rie poaa Gaal wa SOS Ba okies eae 1 OVERVIEW is cach oS a noe ea oe Maa Seas hee ele be ae 1 UDP and TCP Port Requirements 0 0c eee ee eee 2 System Requirements 0 00 cece eee eee ees 4 Server Requirements 000 c eee eee eee 4 Product Licensing Overview 0 0 cee eee eee 8 LICENSE KEYS ss rocissa rinio tise vee ew tee eee ee ea ee ee 8 Feature Keys Switch or Director Element Managers 12 Installing the Application 0 00 nunnana eee eee 13 Installing on Windows SysteMS 02 earrannan 13 Installing on UNIX SysteMS 0 0 0 0 16 Headless Installation on UNIX Systems 200505 18 Linux Installation Troubleshooting 20 00 eee 20 Uninstalling the Application 0 0 00 cece eee 21 Uninstalling from Windows SystemS 2 00000 eee 21 Uninst
214. een 0 65535 Click OK NOTE Changes to this option take effect after a application reboot Restart the application for your changes to take effect Forcing Server and Client Export Port Number To force the Server and Client to export a specific TCP port number for an RMI server you must configure the client and the server export ports Note that the server and the client export ports are different ports Although the server export number could match the client export port it is not necessary 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select Client Export Port The Client Export Port fields display to the right of the Category list In the Client Export Port field enter the TCP port number number between O 65535 Click Apply In the Category list select Server Connection The Server Connection fields display to the right of the Category list EFC Manager Software User Manual 253 53 1000663 03 D In this Appendix 6 Inthe Server Export SSL Port field enter the TCP port number 7 Click OK NOTE If the firewall prevents the Server from connecting to arbitrary ports on the Client then you must force the export port of the Client If the firewall prevents the Client from connecting to the Server then just force the export port of the Server NOTE Changes to this option take effect after a application reboot 8 Restart the application for your changes to
215. elete 3 Click Delete The server is deleted 4 Click OK to save your changes and close the Create servers and assign HBAs dialog box Removing a Server You can remove Servers from the list in the EFCM 9 7 Log In dialog box 1 Select Start gt Program Files gt EFCM 9 7 gt EFCM 9 7 or double click the desktop icon The EFCM 9 7 Log In dialog box displays 2 From the Network Address list select the Server you want to remove The selected Server s IP address displays in the Network Address field 3 Click Delete A confirmation message displays to confirm you want to delete the selected server 4 Click OK 78 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring the Client Configuring the Client 1 Select Start gt Program Files gt EFCM 9 7 gt EFCM 9 7 or double click the desktop icon The EFCM 9 7 Log In dialog box displays Click Setup The Client Setup dialog box displays In the Client Export Port field enter a new TCP port number if necessary In the Memory Allocation field enter a new value if necessary Click OK Configuration Options EFCM enables you to configure the following options Backup End Node Display Flyovers FTP Nicknames Reset Display Software Configuration Configuring Backup Settings NOTE You must have Backup Read Write privileges to configure Backup settings To configure backup settings complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options
216. em See also port name IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IML See initial machine load in band Transmission of management protocol over the Fibre Channel transport See also out of band in band discovery The process through which the SAN Management application Server gathers data about the in band data flow and LUNs from the HBA driver The HBA driver must support the Fibre Alliance HBA API for in band discovery to work properly See also out of band discovery in band management Management of the director or switch through Fibre Channel An interface connection to a port card Contrast with out of band management industry standard architecture ISA Bus architecture designed for personal computers PCs that use an Intel 80386 80486 or Pentium microprocessor ISA buses are 32 bits wide and support multiprocessing information message Message notifying a user that a function is performing normally or has completed normally See also error message warning message information services IS IS is the name of the department responsible for computers networking and data management See also information technology information technology IT The broad subject concerned with all aspects of managing and processing information especially within a large organization or company Because computers are central to information management computer departments within companies and universities are o
217. en the lt nstall_Home gt resources Server config properties file using a text editor for example Notepad 2 Add the following lines Maximum space reserved for the log where XxX is a value between 1MB and 1024MB inclusive smp log maxLogDiskSpace xx Maximum number of days to retain the log where xx is the number of days between 1 and 365 to retain the log smp log maxLogRetentionDays xx 3 Save the file and restart the server 238 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 In this Appendix B Configuring the ECCAPI Port Number To change the ECCAPI port number complete the following steps 1 Open the lt nstall_Home gt resources Server config properties file using a text editor for example Notepad 2 Go to the following line smp server ecc api export port xxxxx where xxxxx is the current port number Change the port number Save the file and restart the server Configuring the CLI Proxy Listening Port Number To change the ECCAPI port number complete the following steps 1 Open the lt nstall_Home gt resources Server config properties file using a text editor for example Notepad 2 Goto the following line smp server cliProxyListeningPort xxxxx where xxxxx is the current port number Change the port number Save the file and restart the server EFC Manager Software User Manual 239 53 1000663 03 B In this Appendix 240 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 0
218. ent 2 When logging into remote clients login is based on first time input therefore whichever login type Server IP Address or Network Address you choose for the first time login is the only login type allowed for all future login attempts Server to Client communica tion is inhibited In some cases a network may utilize virtual private network VPN or firewall tech nology which can prohibit communication between Servers and Clients In other words a Client can find a Server appear to log in but is immediately logged out because the Server cannot reach the Client To resolve this issue the application automatically detects the network configuration and run the Client in polling mode when necessary When the Client is not running in polling mode the Server calls the client when ever it has new data EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 235 A 236 In this Appendix Problem Server doesn t seem to be starting Resolution Examine the Server log lt nstall_Home gt Server Universe_Home TestUni verse _Working EventStorageProvider Event_YYYYMMDD log for diagnostic information System reboots or is unable to gather SNMP information Multiple SNMP calls are being sent to a device that can t handle the constant requests for information To resolve this issue verify that the devices you are discovering are not being dis covered by another Server Discovering devices usi
219. ents or errors occur e Exporting data e Playing sound to notify you of specific events For more information refer to the Event Management User Manual 5 Security tab Displays the tools you need to manage the authentication settings of all SANtegrity capable switches and directors in the installation For more information refer to the Security Software User Manual 6 Product List Lists the devices discovered in the SAN Topology Physical Map Displays the SAN topology including discovered and monitored devices and connections 8 Toolbox Provides tools for viewing the Physical Map Master Log Displays all events that have occurred on the SAN EFC Manager Software User Manual 55 53 1000663 03 56 User Interface Description 10 Utilization Legend Indicates the percentage ranges represented by the colored dashed lines on the Physical Map 11 Minimap Displays a bird s eye view of the entire SAN 12 Status Bar Displays data regarding the Server connection device and fabric View Tab The View tab displays the Master Log Utilization Legend Minimap Physical Map topology and Product List To open all areas of the View window select View gt Show Panels gt All Panels or press F12 You can change the default size of the display by placing the cursor on the divider until a double arrow displays Click and drag the adjoining divider to resize the window You can also show or hide an area by clickin
220. er In the Service Gateway field enter the IP address of the call home center Click Send Test to test the phone number The selected call home center must be enabled to test the phone number Click OK The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays with the call home center you edited highlighted in the Call Home Centers table Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box Editing the IBM E mail or SUN E mail Call Home Center To edit a call home center complete the following steps 1 w oN Oa SS Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays In the Call Home Centers table select the call home center you want to edit Click Edit Centers beneath the Call Home Centers table The Configure Call Home Center dialog box displays In the Call Home Centers list select IBM E mail or SUN E mail Select Enable to enable this call home center In the Customer Details Name field enter the customer contact name In the Customer Details Company field enter the company name In the Customer Details Phone Office field enter the phone number of the customer contact In the Customer Details Phone Mobile field enter the mobile phone number of the customer contact EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Configuring Advanced Call Home 1 In
221. er for firmware versions 5 X and above the varbind shows port number 1 as the first port and the label for the first port is O so you need to subtract 1 from the port number extracted from the varbind to correctly match the label Third party applications may not correctly interpret the information Click OK on the Add Trap Recipient dialog box Click OK on the Configure Trap Forwarding dialog box Removing Trap Recipients 1 Select Monitor gt Trap Forwarding The Configure Trap Forwarding dialog box displays Figure 55 In the Available Recipients table select the recipient you want to remove Click Remove Click OK EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Frame Sniffer 5 Configuring Frame Sniffer NOTE Frame Sniffer procedures should only be performed by advanced users and are only available with M Model manageable switches running M EOS 5 0 or higher For a list of manageable devices refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 The frame sniffer feature enables you to count frames passed by a switch port that meet user specified criteria You can view configure run and stop tests and their sessions using the Frame Sniffer dialog box When you run or stop a test through the Frame Sniffer dialog box the application logs the action in the master log file For more details about information provided in the Master Log refer to Master Log on page 58 Frame Sniffer Requirements To run Fra
222. er UNIX system that has an X based desktop e Make sure that the DISPLAY environment variable is correctly defined in the shell with a valid value for example to display to the local console export DISPLAY 0 0 or to display to a remote system that has an X Server running export DISPLAY remoteipaddress 0 0 To display to a remote system you need to permit the remote display of the X Server by running command xhost IP where IP is the IP address of the EFCM server host on a local terminal window of the X based desktop of the remote system You may also need to consider a firewall that might block the display to the X Server which listens by default on TCP port 6000 on the remote host To display to a remote system you need to permit the remote display of the X Server by running command xhost IP where rp is the IP address of the EFCM server host from the X based desktop of the remote system e Make sure to test the DISPLAY definition by running the command xterm from the same shell from which you run install bin A new X terminal window to the destination X Server display should open EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Installing the Application 1 Headless Installation To perform a headless installation through the CLI complete the following steps 1 Insert the installation CD into the CD ROM drive and open the following file lt CD drive gt lt Unix_Platform gt install bin i console The installation st
223. er and the Client The Server is installed on one machine and stores SAN related information it does not have a user interface To view SAN information through a user interface you must log in to the Server through a Client The Server and Clients may reside on the same machine or on separate machines The server relies on DataFabric Manager to discover the SAN storage devices and hosts To configure SAN Manager to connect to DataFabric Manager see Configuring the Product Type and Access on page 149 In some cases a network may utilize virtual private network VPN or firewall technology which can prohibit communication between Servers and Clients In other words a Client can find a Server appear to log in but is immediately logged out because the Server cannot reach the Client To resolve this issue the application automatically detects the network configuration and runs the Client in polling mode when necessary When the Client is not running in polling mode the Server calls the Client whenever it has new data When the Client is running in polling mode the Server queues up the data and the Client periodically checks in approximately every five or ten seconds and gets the data Logging In to a Server You must log into a Server to monitor a SAN NOTE You must have an established login and password account on the Server to log in 1 Select Start gt Program Files gt EFCM 9 7 gt EFCM 9 7 or double click the deskt
224. er specification partitions a computer network into independent modules from the lowest physical layer to the highest application layer D network address Name or address that identifies a device on a transmission control protocol Internet protocol TCP IP network The network address can be either an IP address in dotted decimal notation composed of four three digit octets in the format xxx xxx xxx xxx or a domain name as administered on a customer network network attached storage NAS Storage connected directly to the network through a processor and its own operating system Lacks the processor power to run centralized shared applications network interface card NIC An expansion board inserted into a computer so the computer can be connected to a network Most NICs are designed for specific types of networks protocols and medias although some can serve multiple networks 316 network management The broad subject of managing computer networks There exists a wide variety of software and hardware products that help network system administrators manage a network Network management covers a wide area including security performance and reliability never principal The setting that prevents the product from becoming the principal switch for a fabric nickname Alternate name assigned to a world wide name for a node director or switch in the fabric NL_Port See node loop port node In Fibre Channel pro
225. erational icon 246 ordering upgrades 10 out of band discovery overview 132 setting up 139 P pasting events from logs 219 performance feature 286 persist fabric feature 286 persisted fabrics clearing alerts 196 connection status determining 196 determining status 195 finding devices in 197 icon 195 icons 195 layout changes 196 merging 196 minus icon 195 plus icon 195 principal switches in 196 splitting 196 persisting fabrics 194 physical map exporting 109 printing 226 zooming in 103 zooming out 103 Plan menu 63 planning feature 286 plus icon persisted fabrics 195 polling client 250 configure for faster logins 250 forcing all clients as polling 251 polling delay setting 141 polling parameters changing 141 port fencing feature 286 PORT table for MySQL 264 principal switches in persisted fabrics 196 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 printing physical map 226 topology 226 printing reports 226 privileges user groups 272 product list exporting 109 overview 56 viewing 56 product status icons 246 product status log copying from 219 overview 216 product status determining 164 products changing properties 163 changing types 163 determining problems 164 determining status 164 finding 163 finding in persisted fabrics 197 icons 243 searching for 163 status icons 246 status determining 68 unpersisting 194 properties edit feature 286 prop
226. erties device route 166 R read write permissions assigning to views 95 REALTIMEPERFORMANCE table for MySQL 265 release 2 7 upgrading from 10 remote access configuring 100 remote access feature 286 removing community strings 213 device shortcut menu option 127 IP addresses 147 servers 78 tools 124 Tools menu options 125 trap recipients 198 users 91 removing trap recipients 211 removing user groups 97 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 removing users from groups 99 renaming servers 78 report feature 286 reports deleting 227 generating 224 generating for routers 227 generating for zone library 228 overview 223 printing 226 viewing 225 requirements system 4 retrieving license key 11 routed in fabric group icon 245 routed in group icon 245 routed in router fabric group icon 245 routers blocked broadcast request 230 routes hiding 166 showing 165 viewing 166 running EFCM 23 S SAN files exporting 109 importing 116 SAN Management application starting 23 SAN menu 60 SAN Router group icon 245 SAN router icon 243 searching for products 163 online help 52 security admin feature 286 server icon 244 server name determining 69 servers adding 75 78 associating to HBAs 77 determining name 69 logging in 73 logging out 74 removing 78 renaming 78 sessions 101 333 service requesting 164 session log copying from 219 overview 216 se
227. es Files li CHIS APPENGIX eect ie eek Sea a genet ete ieee te Sea ee 237 Specifying a Host IP Address in Multi NIC Networks 238 Editing Master Log Settings 0 c cee eee eee 238 Configuring the ECCAPI Port Number 20 0000e 239 Configuring the CLI Proxy Listening Port Number 239 Appendix C Reference ln this APPeCNGIXs sec kee oe a al ee keds il od tiene d ht 241 Compatibility with Other Applications 00005 242 Changing the TCP IP Port for SNMP Trap Events 242 Icon K S nds sires eee eee eee ee vee ee E 243 Keyboard Shortcuts 000 c eee eee 247 Appendix D Configuring EFCM Through a Firewall lnsthis APPENGIX cciitee ere deo patlee aAa o Ae chad r RA 249 Polling Client Function 0 0 0 cece eee eee 250 Configuring for Faster Logins 000 e eee eee eee 250 Configuring TCP Port Numbers to Allow Firewall Access 252 EFCM with RMI at TCP Port Level 0 000 e eee eeee 252 Forcing Port in RMI Registry 2 0c eee eee eee 253 Forcing Server and Client Export Port Number 253 xii EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Appendix E MySQL and DB2 Database Fields inthis APPENGIX ss acne eens wine a eee alain ae wl 255 MySQL and DB2 Database Fields 000 cee eee 256 ADAPTER Tables vesca0d 208i ett tee taed bye ea eie Gita eed 257 CONNECTION Table 0 0 ccc eee cee eee eee 257 DEVI
228. es display 6 Print or e mail the license key and enabled features information to retain a copy for your records Enter this key during the installation process For step by step instructions for installation refer to Installing the Application on page 13 TIP To e mail a copy of the license key and enabled feature information type an e mail address in the E mail Key To field and click Send TIP To print the certificate and instructions use the Certificate and Instructions links 1 10 Product Licensing Overview Requesting a License Key 1 Go to the Brocade Product Feature Enabling System for Hardware and Software web page at http mcdata getkeys com 2 Enter your username and password and click Login NOTE If you do not have a username and password click the Please Register Here link 3 Inthe Serial Number field type the serial number and click Next You can find the serial number on the back of the software CD case The license key and all enabled features are displayed 4 Print or e mail the license key and enabled features information to retain a copy for your records You need to enter this key during the installation process For step by step instructions for installation refer to Installing the Application on page 13 Ordering Additional Features To order new features or increase managed port capabilities contact your sales representative or the Solution Center at 877 948 4448 or 303
229. es in IPv4 and IPv6 formats IPv4 addresses are normally written as four groups of three decimals IPv6 addresses are normally written as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits The SAN Management application accepts the following IPv6 address formats e AAAA 0AAA 0000 AAAA AAAA AAAA AAAA AAAA Complete address including leading zeros e AAAA AAA 0 0 AAAA AAAA AAAA AAAA Compressed format with leading zeros omitted This is the default display e AAAA AAA AAAA AAAA AAAA AAAA Compressed format with double colons for successive hexadecimal fields of zeros 6 Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box 100 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Viewing Active User Sessions 3 Viewing Active User Sessions Since more than one Client can access a Server at a time monitoring Clients can be an important part of maintaining the SAN View active user sessions to determine which Clients are logged into the Server 1 Select SAN gt Active Sessions The Active Sessions dialog box displays Figure 19 The Active Sessions dialog box lists the connected users their network addresses and the date and time when they logged in If a user is logged in from more than one location there is a separate entry for each session D Description Network Address Connected admin Default Admin 172 18 3 205 Jul 03 2003 16 20 37 Disconnect User OK Cancel Help FIGURE 19 Active Sessions Dialog Box
230. escription naana nanana 55 MIGW Tale oe Siete SS oe i aie E E E E ete 56 Product LIST irae p45 oleae Sees Ca a eee ee i 56 Mastertog uo raaa hes Bee ee ee ee ee ek ees 58 Mihia pesua a ct ee ener ed Seis eae era Aa 59 MENU Batis oitea seg te Sia eh Siddall enat aat iah 60 Toolbar dass eiae a a deer die edi Bee eee ete aa 67 TOOIDOX 245 0 A Ghee a bi abe nee a teeta ad 68 Status Bale iiaea dates Hee ee Ya a eee ee 68 Chapter 3 Setting Up the Application In this C apte isi atin an a ne ie wie ea a e Ba ee eves 71 Server and Client Communication Requirements 72 Configuring a Server eect eee 73 Logging In to a Server cece eee eee 73 Changing Your Password 1 2 0 0c eee eee eee eee eee 74 Logging Out of a Server 1 cee eee 74 Adding SOrVe lr a Ane SS Bid ihe Aa EE ETSEN 75 Viewing Server Properties 00 c cece eee eee 76 Configuring HBAs and Servers 000 eee ee eee eee 77 Removing a Server 0 eee eee eee 78 Configuring the Client 2 0 2 00 cece ee eee 79 Configuration OptionS 0 0 c eee eee 79 Configuring Backup SettingS 00 00 c eee eee 79 Configuring End Node Display 00 00ee ee eeee 80 Configuring Flyover Settings 0000 ee eee ee eee 80 Configuring FTP Server SettingS 000 aana 81 Configuring Nickname Settings 000 ee eeee 82 Editing Duplicate Nicknames 000 cence eee 8
231. escription for the group in the fields provided 4 To allow access to specific features click the Features tab Otherwise skip to step 5 NOTE You must assign a feature to the Read Write or Read Only list for the new group to have access to a selected feature a Inthe list on the left select features to which you want to allow read and write access Press CTRL and click to select multiple features NOTE Depending on your licensed modules the list of features may differ b Click the right arrow next to the Read Write list The features are moved to the Read Write list c Inthe list on the left select features to which you want to allow read only access Press CTRL and click to select multiple features d Click the right arrow next to the Read Only list The features are moved to the Read Only list 5 To change permissions to use certain views click the Views tab Otherwise skip to step 6 a Inthe list on the left select views to which you want the user group to have access Press CTRL and click to make multiple selections b Click the right arrow next The views are moved to the Selected Views List EFC Manager Software User Manual 95 53 1000663 03 3 Managing User Groups 6 Click OK to save the new group and close the Group dialog box The new group displays in the Groups list of the EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box To add users to this group follow the instructions in Assigning Users to Groups on page 98
232. eshold to fabric director switch port type and port objects complete the following steps 1 Select Configure gt Port Fencing The Port Fencing dialog box displays 2 From the Violation Type list select a threshold type From the Thresholds table select the threshold you want to assign 4 From the Ports table select the objects All Fabrics Fabric Director Switch Port Type Security only and or Port to which you want to assign the threshold 5 Click the right arrow A directly assigned icon displays next to the objects you selected in the Ports table to show that the threshold was applied at this level and was inherited by every subordinate object below it in the tree if not affected by lower level direct assignments An icon appears next to every object in the tree to which the new threshold is applied 6 Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 187 53 1000663 03 5 188 Port Fencing Turning Off Port Fencing Inheritance When you directly assign a threshold to an object the threshold is inherited by all subordinate objects unless it already has a directly assigned threshold in the tree You can not remove an inherited threshold from a subordinate object However the SAN Management application allows you to effectively turn off inheritance for individual subordinate objects while maintaining inheritance for other subordinate objects To turn off inheritance for an individu
233. etwork wide area network logical port address In a director or switch the address used to specify port connectivity parameters and to assign link addresses for the attached channels and control units logical switch number LSN A two digit number used by the I O configuration program IOCP to identify a director or switch D 313 Glossary logical unit number LUN In Fibre Channel addressing a logical unit number is a number assigned to a storage product which in combination with the storage product s node port s world wide name represents a unique identifier for a logical product on a storage area network Peripherals use LUNs to represent addresses A small computer system interface SCSI product s address can have up to eight LUNs login server Entity within the Fibre Channel fabric that receives and responds to login requests loop A loop is a configuration of products connected to the fabric via a fabric loop port FL_Port interface card loop address In Fibre Channel protocol a term indicating the unique ID of a node in Fibre Channel loop topology sometimes referred to as a loop ID loop group A collection of SAN devices that are interconnected serially in a single loop circuit Loop groups discovered by the SAN Management application display with a gray background on the Physical Map loop initialization primitive LIP In an arbitrated loop product a process by which devices connected to
234. ev fie Suve iever Product State Event Fatal Product State Event Warning A J Product State Event Informational D SNMP Trap Event Fatal x SNMP Trap Event warning A SNMP Trap Event Informational D User Action Event Informational i Client Server Event Warning A Advanced Filtering Filters Defined 6 OK Cancel Help FIGURE 14 Define Filter Dialog Box Move events between the tables by selecting the event and clicking the appropriate arrow 4 Toset up advanced event filtering click Advanced Filtering For more information about advanced event filtering refer to Setting Up Advanced Event Filtering on page 93 Click OK 6 On the EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box turn on event notification for the user by selecting the check box next to Filter 7 Click OK to save your changes and close the EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box 92 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Managing Users 3 Setting Up Advanced Event Filtering To set up advanced event filtering on the selected events complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Users The EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box displays 2 Inthe E mail column click the Filter link associated with the user for whom you want to filter events The Define Filter dialog box displays The Selected Events table includes the events of which this user is notified The Available Events table includes all other events 3 Click Advanced Filtering
235. fer to Assigning Thresholds on page 187 8 Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box Adding Link Thresholds To add Link Thresholds complete the following steps 1 Select Configure gt Port Fencing The Port Fencing dialog box displays Select Link from the Violation Type list Click Add The Add Link Threshold dialog box displays Figure 46 Block a port when link level hot I O errors meet the threshold Name Threshold 90 errorsper 5 Seconds 1 to 65 535 OK Cancel Help FIGURE 46 Add Link Threshold Dialog Box 4 Enter a name for the threshold in the Name field 5 Select the number of port events allowed for the threshold from the Threshold errors list 6 Select the time period for the threshold from the Threshold Seconds list 7 Click OK to add the Link threshold to the table and close the Add Link Threshold dialog box To assign this threshold to fabrics switches or switch ports refer to Assigning Thresholds on page 187 8 Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 185 53 1000663 03 5 Port Fencing Adding Security Thresholds To add Security Thresholds complete the following steps 1 Select Configure gt Port Fencing The Port Fencing dialog box displays Select Security from the Violation Type list Click Add The Add Security Threshold dialog box displays Figure 47 Block a port when one of the following security violation types meets the th
236. figure gt Port Fencing The Port Fencing dialog box displays 2 Select a threshold type from the Violation Type list In the Thresholds table select the threshold you want to remove 4 Click Delete A icon displays next to the selected threshold in the Thresholds table when you click Delete 5 Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 193 53 1000663 03 5 Persisting and Unpersisting Fabrics and Switch Groups Persisting and Unpersisting Fabrics and Switch Groups Persisting fabrics or switch groups takes a snapshot of the current products and connections in the fabric or switch group as a reference point for comparison to future changes You can export the topology including persisted fabric or switch group information Refer to Exporting Data to Disk or E mail NOTE If the fabric or switch group s principal switch changes the new fabric or switch group must be manually persisted Persistence does not follow the new fabric or switch group even if only one switch is removed from the original fabric or switch group The principal switch should always be managed Also the principal switch must be a manageable switch or director to administer the devices in the fabric or switch group refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 Persisting a Fabric or Switch Group To persist a fabric or switch group e Select a fabric or switch group in the Physical Map or Product List then select Monitor
237. for a selected router Name Server Requires a SAN router Displays the port information available in the router s Name Server table If the primary server is available then the report will be generated based on the primary name server If not the report will be generated based on a secondary server Backup Server R Port Requires a SAN router Displays configuration information for the SAN Router R_ports EFC Manager Software User Manual 223 53 1000663 03 6 Creating Reports e Router Configuration Requires a SAN router Displays the following configuration information System properties Address configuration Boot configuration and Trap configuration e Zone Library Requires a zone library be configured for a router switch or director Displays the zoning information of a zone library of the selected device s fabric The zone library is either a fabric associated library or the global library Generating Reports You can generate various reports of the SAN Generated reports are saved to lt nstall_Home gt Server Reports 1 Select Monitor gt Reports gt Generate The Select Template dialog box displays Figure 71 Select Output Template y Product List y Operating Status Change VY Performance Data y Connectivity Map v Port Usage y Fabric Ports y Storage Device Summary V LUN Masking Summary y Departmental Storage Allocation OK Cancel Help FIGURE 71 Select Template Dialog Box NOT
238. ften called IT departments See also information services EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Glossary initial machine load IML Hardware reset for all installed control processor CTP cards on the director or switch This reset does not affect other hardware It is initiated by pushing the IML button on a director s or switch s operating panel initial program load IPL The process of initializing the product and causing the operating system to start An IPL may be initiated through a menu option or a hardware button initial program load configuration IPL configuration In FICON management style information stored in a director or switch s nonvolatile memory that contains default configurations The director or switch loads the file for operation when powered on input output I O 1 Pertaining to a device whose parts can perform an input process and an output process at the same time I 2 Pertaining to a functional unit or channel involved in an input process output process or both concurrently or not and to the data involved in such a process 3 Pertaining to input output or both D 4 An operation or product that allows input and output Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE An organization of engineers and technical professionals that promotes the development and application of electronic technology and allied sciences interface 1 A shared boundary between two
239. functional units defined by functional signal or other characteristics The concept includes the specification of the connection of two products having different functions T 2 Hardware software or both that link systems programs or products D Internet protocol IP Network layer for the transmission control protocol Internet protocol TCP IP protocol used on Ethernet networks IP provides packet routing fragmentation and reassembly through the data link layer D Internet protocol address IP address Unique string of numbers in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX that identifies a product on a network interoperability Ability to communicate execute programs or transfer data between various functional units over a network 311 Glossary interoperability mode Interpol mode A management style set through management software that allows products to operate in homogeneous or heterogeneous fabrics interop mode See interoperability mode interrupt A signal sent by a subsystem to the central processing unit CPU that signifies a process has either completed or could not be completed interswitch link ISL Physical expansion port E_Port connection between two directors in a fabric intranet A private version of the Internet that provides a cost effective way to publicize critical information and provide an interactive communication path for heterogeneous systems Internal to a specific organizational st
240. g the left or right arrow on the divider Product List The Product List located on the View tab displays an inventory of all discovered devices and ports The Product List is a quick way to look up product and port information including serial numbers and IP addresses To display the Product List select View gt Show Panels gt Product List or press F9 NOTE Nicknames of attached end nodes also display in the Product List You can edit information in the Product List by double clicking in a field marked with a green triangle You can sort the Product List by clicking a column heading The following columns in alphabetical order are included in the Product List Active FC4 Types Displays the active Fibre Channel 4 types of the port Address Displays the address of the port Alert Displays any alerts on the product All Levels Displays all discovered fabrics groups devices and ports Attached Port Displays the number of the attached port Block Configuration Displays the blocked configuration of the port Class Displays the class to which the product belongs Class of Service Displays the class of service for the port Comments Displays any comments about the product This field is editable at the fabric and device level e Contact Displays the name of the person or group you should contact about the product This field is editable at the fabric and device level e Description Displays the description of th
241. ge e Displays The current number of managed ports exceeds your license of x ports You have a buffer range of up to y ports before functionality is limited Please contact your storage vendor to purchase additional port licenses or reduce the number of ports being discovered through the Discovery Setup dialog box if the discovered port count exceeds your license and the grace period Click OK to enable the software The information will be set on the Server only after you click OK The client automatically logs out and the EFCM 9 7 Log In dialog box displays Log in using the instructions in Logging In to a Server on page 73 Retrieving Lost Keys If you have lost your license key complete these steps 1 Goto the URL listed on the transaction code certificate 2 Enter your username and password and click Login NOTE If you do not have a username and password click the Please Register Here link Click the Unit Information menu Enter your product s serial number or key and click Next The product license information displays EFC Manager Software User Manual 11 53 1000663 03 1 Product Licensing Overview Feature Keys Switch or Director Element Managers Feature keys allow you to access the software features that you purchase within the Switch or Director The feature key which is encoded with a Switch or Director s serial number can only be configured on the Switch or Director to which it is assigned Following
242. ge that object and are indicated by the standard product icons For a list of the product icons refer to Icon Legend on page 243 However virtual switches display when you have the privileges to manage the fabric that contains the virtual switch and are indicated by the virtual icon i You can only directly assign thresholds to ports on a virtual switch To assign a threshold to the virtual switch or its port types you must assign the threshold to the associated physical switch or to another object above it in the hierarchy If no thresholds are set above the virtual switch in the hierarchy the ISL Protocol Link or Security Threshold field in the Ports table displays a Limited Fencing Support message For more information about port fencing operation when virtual switches are configured refer to Chapter 1 in the Open VSANs User Manual Requirements To configure port fencing the following requirements must be met e All switches and directors must be one of the following models and must be running firmware M EOS 7 0 or higher 12 Port 16 Port 1 GB 16 Port 2 GB 16 Port 4 GB 24 Port 2 GB 32 Port 4 GB 64 Port 140 Port 256 Port e M EOS 7 X only supports ISL Protocol fencing e M EOS 8 X and above firmware supports ISL Protocol Link and Security fencing e All switches must be discovered directly using MPI EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Port Fencing 5 Thresholds You can create ISL Prot
243. ger Data Imports an mSAN List created using SANvergence Manager which contains the discovered mSAN IDs user defined labels SAN Router details and Zoning files as well as other information For step by step instructions about importing SANvergence Manager data refer to Importing SANvergence Manager Data on page 119 NOTE You must exit SANvergence Manager before starting an import from the SAN Management application SANvergence Manager only stores the contents of the discovered devices after you exit the application Therefore if SANvergence Manager is running during the SAN Management import you may not receive all IP addresses from the mSAN list NOTE SANvergence Manager has a different zone data structure than the SAN Management application therefore it must be converted into a data structure that can be re used by SAN Management application When using SAN Management application to import zones SAN Management application only converts the data into the SAN Management application data structure and stores the data xml files in the lt nstall_Home gt directory lt nstall_Home gt Client Data Zoning where you can access them using the Import button on the Zoning dialog box to save them into the current Zone Library For more information refer to the Zoning User Manual or Zoning Online Help Nicknames Imports the nicknames that were assigned using the SAN Management application and displays them on the Physical Map and Produ
244. ger window Select the SAN Router in the SAN Routers table in the right pane of the SANvergence Manager window when an mSAN cloud is selected then click the Element Manager icon at the top of the SANvergence Manager window NOTE You cannot launch SANvergence Manager or Element Managers by selecting the router proxy port icons domain IDs 30 and 31 You must select the icon for the actual SAN Router For details on using SANvergence Manager to manage Eclipse SAN Routers in your SAN refer to the SANvergence Manager User Manual For details on using Element Manager applications to configure specific SAN Routers refer to the following publications e Eclipse 1620 SAN Router Administration and Configuration Manual e Eclipse 3300 4300 SAN Routers Administration and Configuration Manual e Eclipse 2640 SAN Router Administration and Configuration Manual EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Chapter Discovering a SAN 4 In this Chapter The SAN Management application discovers products fabrics and connections in a SAN Through this powerful tool you can manage and monitor your SAN in real time ensuring that any issues are resolved immediately This chapter provides instructions for configuring the discovery feature How Discovery WorkS 000 cee eee eee 132 e Manager of Manager Discovery 000 ccc cece eee eee eee 134 Setting Up DISCOVENY lt ss ssa sie ba twa cette Nee ea tweed Meee enex eves
245. gh Fibre Channel When the devices respond the libraries deliver information about the discovered ports back to the application For information about supported HBA driver levels please go to the http www brocade com support resources website and follow the instructions to access the Compatibility Matrix 132 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 DataFabric Manager Interaction Requirements 4 DataFabric Manager Interaction Requirements Gathering DataFabric Manager Device Discovery Data You must configure SAN Manager to gather device discovery data directly from DataFabric Manager For more information see Configuring the Product Type and Access on page 149 SNMP Trap Listener Conflict DataFabric Manager also listens for SNMP traps on UDP port 162 If you install the SAN Manager server and DataFabric Manager on the same machine you must do the following to avoid a port conflict with the DataFabric Manager SNMP trap listener 1 Specify a port other than 162 in the SNMP Trap Listener Port option banner gt Options link gt SNMP Trap Listener Options in DataFabric Manager 2 Configure SAN Manager to forward traps to the SNMP trap listener on the port that you specified in Step 1 For more information about configuring SNMP trap forwarding see Configuring Trap Forwarding on page 197 EFC Manager Software User Manual 133 53 1000663 03 4 Manager of Manager Discovery Manager of Manager Discovery N
246. ghted WWNs 6 Click OK to close the Configure Nicknames dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 169 53 1000663 03 5 Configuring Nicknames Assigning a Nickname to an Existing Device The SAN Management application allows you to assign a nickname to an existing device 1 Select Configure gt Nicknames The Configure Nicknames dialog box displays 2 From the Display list select how you want to display devices You can display devices by All Nicknames All WWNs Only Fabrics And mSANs Only Products Only Ports or Switch and N Ports All discovered devices display In the Display table select the device to which you want to assign a nickname Double click in the Nickname column for the selected device and enter a nickname for the device If you set nicknames to be unique on the Options dialog box and the nickname you entered already exists the entry is not accepted NOTE If you segment a fabric the Fabric s nickname follows the assigned principal switch 5 Click OK to close the Configure Nicknames dialog box Adding a Nickname to a New Device The SAN Management application allows you to add a new device 1 Select Configure gt Nicknames The Configure Nicknames dialog box displays In the Detached WWN field enter the WWN of the device 3 Inthe Nickname field enter a nickname for the device If you set nicknames to be unique on the Options dialog box and the nickname you entered already exists the ent
247. ging large fabrics we recommend that you use a platform meeting at least the recommended requirements for both server and client You have the choice of running the SAN Management application on a management server supplied by Brocade or IBM or providing your own management server When using a management server supplied by Brocade or IBM the recommended configuration is already set However when using your own management server use the following recommendations for your platform TABLE 3 1 U Server Requirements Minimum Recommended Processor 2 0 GHz Intel Pentium 4 3 0 GHz Intel Pentium 4 Hardware CD ROM CD ROM Windows 2000 Professional with service pack 4 Windows 2003 Server Standard Edition with service pack 1 NOTE IPv6 addresses are not supported in Windows Operating System 2000 Windows 2003 Server Standard Edition with service pack 1 Memory 1 GB 2 GB Graphics Card 8MB VGA 256 32 MB VGA 256 Hard Drive 40 GB 40 GB ATA 100 IDE 7200 rpm Modem 56K v 92 data fax modem PCI 56K v 92 data fax modem PCI Ethernet NIC 10 100 Mbps Ethernet LAN card 10 100 Mbps Ethernet LAN card 4 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 System Requirements 1 TABLE 4 Windows Server Requirements Processor 2 0 GHz Intel Pentium 4 Hardware CD ROM Windows 2000 Professional with service pack 4 Operating System NOTE IPv6 addresses are not supported in Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Server with service pack 4 Windows 2000 Advanced
248. h a host computer maintains a cache of address translations allowing the physical address of the computer to be derived from the Internet address D agent Software that processes queries on behalf of an application and returns replies alarm 1 A notification of an abnormal condition within a system that provides an indication of the location or nature of the abnormality to either a local or remote alarm indicator 2 Asimple network management protocol SNMP message notifying an operator of a network or product problem alias A nickname representing a world wide name WWN allowed connection In FICON management style in a director or switch the attribute that when set establishes dynamic connectivity capability Contrast with blocked connection See connectivity attribute See also dynamic connectivity unblocked connection allowed port connection In FICON management style this attribute establishes dynamic connectivity capability AL_PA See arbitrated loop physical address EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 American National Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII A standard character set consisting of 7 bit coded characters 8 bit including parity check used for information exchange between systems and equipment D American National Standards Institute ANSI A national organization consisting of producers consumers and general interest groups that establishes procedures by w
249. h an internet browser Consistency Select to view the Consistency Report iFCP Connections and Zones Select to view the iFCP Connections and Zone Report LUN Mapping Select to view the LUN Mapping Report Name Server Select to view the Name Server Report R Port Select to view the R Port Report Router Configuration Select to view the Router Configuration Report Zone Library Select to view the Zone Library Report EFC Manager Software User Manual 65 53 1000663 03 2 66 User Interface Description Logs Select to display logs e Audit Select to display a history of user actions performed through the application except login logout e Event Select to display errors related to SNMP traps and Client Server communications Fabric Select to display the events related to the selected fabric Group Select to display the event logs defined on the Group Management screen Product Status Select to display operational status changes of managed products Session Select to display the users who have logged in and out of the Server Security Select to display security information Persist Fabric Select to take a Snapshot of the current products and connections in the fabric as a reference point for comparison to future fabric changes Unpersist Fabric Select to unpersist a fabric Unpersist Product Select to unpersist a single product in a persisted fabric if the product is no longer part of the fabric Show
250. hange the time period for the threshold from the Threshold Minutes list if necessary Click OK on the Edit Security Threshold dialog box If the threshold has already been assigned to ports an Are you sure you want to make the requested changes to this threshold on X ports message displays Click OK to close To assign this threshold to fabrics switches or switch ports refer to Assigning Thresholds on page 187 8 Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box Finding Assigned Thresholds The SAN Management application allows you to find all ports with a specific threshold applied To find assigned thresholds complete the following steps 1 Select Configure gt Port Fencing The Port Fencing dialog box displays 2 Selecta threshold type from the Violation Type list 3 Select a threshold from the Threshold table 4 Click Find 5 Every port which uses the selected threshold is highlighted in the Ports table 6 Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 191 53 1000663 03 5 Port Fencing Viewing Thresholds 1 Select Configure gt Port Fencing The Port Fencing dialog box displays 2 Selecta threshold type from the Violation Type list 3 Review the Thresholds and Ports tables 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as necessary 5 Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box Removing Thresholds When you assign a new threshold to an object the threshold that was active on that object is
251. hat can be potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to you Safety labels are also attached directly to products to warn of these conditions or situations EFC Manager Software User Manual xvii 53 1000663 03 Additional information Key terms For definitions specific to Brocade and Fibre Channel see the Brocade Glossary For definitions specific to EFCM see the Glossary on page 295 For definitions of SAN specific terms visit the Storage Networking Industry Association online dictionary at http www snia org education dictionary Additional information This section lists additional Brocade and industry specific documentation that you might find helpful Brocade resources To get up to the minute information join Brocade Connect It s free Go to http www brocade com and click Brocade Connect to register at no cost for a user ID and password For practical discussions about SAN design implementation and maintenance you can obtain Building SANs with Brocade Fabric Switches through http www amazon com For additional Brocade documentation visit the Brocade SAN Info Center and click the Resource Library location http www brocade com Release notes are available on the Brocade Connect Web site and are also bundled with the Fabric OS firmware Other industry resources e White papers online demos and data sheets are available through the Brocade Web site at http www brocade com products sof
252. have enabled Fabric Binding use the Fabric Membership List to add switches that you want to allow into the fabric NOTE Fabric Binding is only supported on B model FOS level 6 0 or higher and M model manageable switches and fabrics For a list of manageable devices refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 1 Select Configure gt Fabric Binding The Fabric Binding dialog box displays Figure 43 Fabric List Binding Status Fabric Name Enable Disable Action Fabric Nickname Oo Available Switches Membership List of Nickname Node Name Domain Fabric Name Nickname Node Name Domain Fabric Name 1000080088 22 100000051E050 1000080088 15 100000051 E050 d q e Refer help if you have any issues setting up p fabric binding for B Model or M Model products OK Cancel Help FIGURE 43 Fabric Binding Dialog Box 2 Inthe Fabric List table click the Enable Disable check box for fabrics for which you want to configure fabric binding For instructions on adding and removing switches from the membership list refer to Adding Switches to the Fabric Binding Membership List on page 179 and Removing Switches from Fabric Binding Membership on page 181 3 Click OK 178 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Fabric Binding 5 Disabling Fabric Binding Fabric Binding can be disabled while Enterprise Fabric Mode is active if the switch is offline This disables fabric binding and Enterp
253. he Backup Interval drop down list to set how often backup occurs Click Apply or OK The minimum value is 15 minutes and the maximum value is 24 hours Starting Immediate Backup NOTE You must have backup privileges to use the Backup Now function To start the backup process immediately complete one of the following procedures Using the Backup Icon right click the Backup icon and select Backup Now OR 1 Using the SAN menu select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select Backup Click Backup Now The backup process begins immediately There is no confirmation message EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 31 32 1 Backing Up and Restoring Data Reviewing Backup Events The Master Log which displays in the lower left area of the main window lists the events that occur on the SAN If you do not see the Master Log select View gt All Panels The following backup events appear in the Master Log Backup started Backup ended Backup error Backup Enabled Backup Disabled User selects Backup Now Backup destination change Backup interval change Backup start time change Domain workgroup change User name change User password change User set backup interval to an invalid value in the properties file User changed backup interval options in the properties file Network share access problem when backup starts or during backup not when the backup configuration i
254. he product described by this document may contain open source software covered by the GNU General Public License or other open source license agreements To find out which open source software is included in Brocade products view the licensing terms applicable to the open source software and obtain a copy of the programming source code please visit http www brocade com support oscd Brocade Communications Systems Incorporated Corporate Headquarters Asia Pacific Headquarters Brocade Communications Systems Inc Brocade Communications Singapore Pte Ltd 1745 Technology Drive 9 Raffles Place San Jose CA 95110 59 02 Republic Plaza 1 Tel 1 408 333 8000 Singapore 048619 Fax 1 408 333 8101 Tel 65 6538 4700 Email info brocade com Fax 65 6538 0302 Email apac info brocade com European and Latin American Headquarters Brocade Communications Switzerland Sarl Centre Swissair Tour A 2 me tage 29 Route de l A roport Case Postale 105 CH 1215 Gen ve 15 Switzerland Tel 41 22 799 56 40 Fax 41 22 799 56 41 Email emea info brocade com Document History Title Publication number Summary of changes Date EFC Manager Software User Manual EFC Manager Software User Manual 620 000170 000 Rev A 620 000170 010 Rev A Initial release of the manual to support release 8 0 Revised to support release 8 1 01 October 2003 01 January 2004 EFC Manager Software User Manual 620 000170 020 Rev
255. hich accredited organizations create and maintain industry standards in the United States A ANSI See American National Standards Institute API See application program interface application 1 The use to which a data processing system is put for example a payroll application an airline reservation application or a network application 2 A collection of software components used to perform specific types of work on a computer D application client The source object of the small computer system interface SCSI commands and destination for the command responses application program 1 A program that is specific to the solution of an application problem Synonymous with application software 2 A program written for or by a user that applies to the user s work Such as a program that does inventory control or payroll 3 A program used to connect and communicate with stations in a network enabling users to perform application oriented activities l application program interface API A set of programming functions and routines that provides access between protocol layers such as between an application and network services EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Glossary application specific integrated circuit ASIC An asynchronous transfer mode ATM local area network wide area network LAN WAN circuit using cell relay transport technology ASICs are designed fora specific application or pur
256. ialog box displays 4 On the Address Properties dialog box click the Product Type and Access tab Figure 31 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 4 149 4 Configuring Address Properties IP Address SNMP Product Type and Access Product Type Switch inii User ID Password Retype Password OK Cancel Help FIGURE31 Address Properties Dialog Box Product Type and Access Tab 5 Select the type of device from the Product Type list If you selected lt not specified gt from the Product Type list go to step 8 If you selected Switch from the Product Type list go to step 6 If you selected IBM ESS Storage from the Product Type list go to step 6 If you selected HDS from the Product Type list go to step 6 If you selected Clariion from the Product Type list go to step 8 If you selected CIM WBEM Services from the Product Type list enter a name in the Name Space field and go to step 6 If you selected Symmetrix from the Device Type list go to step 8 If you select NetApp DFM from the Product Type list from the Protocol list select the product protocol In the DFM Port field enter the product DFM port number Then go to step 6 If you select HP XP Storage from the Product Type list continue with step 6 6 Inthe User ID field enter a user ID In the Password and Retype Password fields enter the password NOTE If you change the password on the Switch or Director you must en
257. ication Management software that provides easy centralized management of a SAN and quick access to all device configuration applications electronic data interchange EDI The electronic transfer of preformatted business documents such as purchase orders and bills of lading between trading partners Electronic Industries Association EIA The governing body that publishes recommended standards for physical products and associated interfaces For example RS 232 is the EIA standard that defines computer serial port connectivity D 304 electronic mail E mail Any communications service that permits the electronic transmission and storage of messages and attached or enclosed files Element Manager application Application that implements the management user interface for a director or switch 1 In your SAN management application application the software component that provides a graphical user interface for managing and monitoring switch products When a product instance is opened from your SAN management application the corresponding Element Manager application is invoked e mail See electronic mail enhanced availability feature EAF A backup field replaceable unit backup FRU that is ordered and installed to provide redundancy and reduce disruption in case of failure D enterprise The entire storage system The series of computers employed largely in high volume and multi user environments such as servers or
258. igning 90 changing 91 removing 91 access levels defined 285 user groups 285 activating discovery 141 active session management feature 285 active sessions viewing 101 ADAPTER table for MySQL 257 add delete properties feature 285 adding community strings 212 device shortcut menu option 126 IP addresses 142 servers 75 78 tool 123 Tools menu option 124 trap recipients 198 users 90 adding trap recipients 209 211 adding users to groups 98 admin access assigning 90 91 administrator access defined 285 AIX uninstalling from 22 alerts clearing ISL alerts 196 applications opening 129 applications opening from the application 123 ASM switch icon 244 assigning users to groups 98 associating HBAs to servers 77 attention products needing 164 audit log copying from 219 overview 216 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 B B model products managing M model products managing 128 back up and restore rack mount unit 26 34 backup feature 285 blade switch icon 244 bridge group icon 245 bridge icon 244 browse access assigning 90 91 C call home event notification feature 285 call home status determining 69 changing device s shortcut menu 127 fabric properties 166 IP addresses 144 nicknames of fabrics 166 product properties 163 product types 163 TCP IP ports 242 Tools menu 125 user accounts 91 users 91 view options 103
259. ile is not in Verify that the symapi jar file has been copied into EFCM sdirectory the class path 232 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 In this Appendix A Problems with Fabric Binding Problem Mode is active Cannot disable Fabric Bind ing while Enterprise Fabric Resolution You may have attempted to disable Fabric Binding through the Fabric Binding dia log box while Enterprise Fabric Mode was enabled Disable the Enterprise Fabric Mode through the Enterprise Fabric Mode dialog box before disabling Fabric Bind ing the switch Problems with LUNs Problem The application cannot currently manage LUNs on this device Fabric Binding failed because data cannot be populated to The following list provides the possible causes of Fabric Binding failure e Fabric is busy or is rebuilding Switch is busy e insistent Domain ID is not checked for all switches in the fabric Firmware doesn t support Fabric Binding SAN Routers with firmware below version 4 7 non manageable switches For a list of manageable products refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 Network failure Switch is undergoing firmware upgrade downgrade or NDCLA Non disruptive Code Load Activation Switch is offline Binding feature not licensed B model switch ACL Connection Control Policy is set to NOT accept distribution B model switch discovered using invalid credentials
260. ilter assigned to a device and select Remove Filter e Right click a device to which the event filter is assigned and select Remove Filter e Select an event filter assigned to a device and click lt left arrow button Press CTRL and click to select multiple event filters assigned to multiple devices All event filters assigned to the device are removed 3 Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box Removing an Event Filter from the Call Home Event Filters Table 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays 2 Inthe Call Home Event Filters table select the event filter you want to remove 3 Click Remove e If the event filter is not assigned to any devices a confirmation message displays asking if you want to remove the event filter click Yes e If the event filter is assigned to any devices a confirmation message displays informing you that removing this event filter will remove it from all associated devices click Yes The event filter is removed from any associated devices and the Call Home Event Filters table To determine to which devices the event filter is assigned select the event filter then click gt find button 4 Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Miscellaneous 1 Searching for an Assigned Event Filter To find all device
261. in the R Port WWN field c Enter the node WWN for domain ID 30 of the SAN router in the Node WWN for Domain ID 30 field d Enter the node WWN for domain ID 31 of the SAN router in the Node WWN for Domain ID 31 field 6 If you selected SANRouter gt 5 0 firmware complete the following steps a Enter the R port domain ID of the SAN router in the RPort Domain ID field b Enter the R port WWN of the SAN router in the RPort WWN field c Enter the domain ID of the SAN router in the Domain ID field d Enter the node WWN of the SAN router in the Node WWN field Click OK on the Add Detached Product dialog box Click the right arrow to move the switches to the Membership List table Click OK on the Fabric Binding dialog box 180 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Fabric Binding 5 Removing Switches from Fabric Binding Membership Once you have enabled Fabric Binding refer to Enabling Fabric Binding on page 178 you can remove switches from the membership list NOTE Fabric Binding is only supported on B model FOS level 6 0 or higher and M model manageable switches and fabrics For a list of manageable devices refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 1 Select Configure gt Fabric Binding The Fabric Binding dialog box Figure 43 displays 2 Select the switches you want to remove from the selected fabrics Fabric Membership List FML in the Membership List table 3 Click the left arrow
262. in window For more information refer to Master Log on page 58 NOTE The e mail filter in EFCM is overridden by the firmware e mail filter When the firmware determines that certain events do not receive e mail notification an e mail is not be sent for those events even when the event type is added to the Selected Events table in the Define Filter dialog box 1 On the Master Log click the Filter hyperlink The Define Filter dialog box displays Figure 68 Include extended events Available Events Type Subtype Levai Selected Events Type Product State Evert Product State Event Product State Event SNMP Trap Event SNMP Trap Event SNMP Trap Event User Action Event Client Server Event _ Bi Subtype Cavell Fatal 6 i Warning A F Informational Fatal Warning ry Informational Q Informational Warning A x Advanced Filtering Filters Defined 6 OK Cancel Help FIGURE 68 Define Filter Dialog Box 2 Select the Include extended events check box to include extended events in the log 218 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Event Monitoring 6 3 Include or exclude event types To include an event type in the filter select the event from the Available Events table and click the right arrow To exclude an event type from the filter select the event from the Selected Events table and click the left arrow 4 Click OK On the Master Log perform one of the
263. ined on the Group Management screen e Product Status Log Displays operational status changes of managed products e Security Log Displays the following security information Severity User Reason Description Date and Time Count Category IP Role Interface e Session Log Displays the users who have logged in and out of the Server The application also has an event notification feature By configuring event notification you can specify when the application should alert you of an event For details refer to Using Event Notification Features on page 220 For information about the Master Log interface fields and icons refer to Master Log on page 58 Viewing Logs You can view log data through the Master Log on the main window However if you want to see only certain types of events for example only login logout events Session events open a specific log through the View Logs dialog box 216 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Event Monitoring 6 To view a log complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Logs gt lt og_type gt The View Logs dialog box displays the kind of log you selected Review the information in the log To clear the log click Clear Click Close Clearing Logs To clear a log complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Logs gt lt og_type gt The View Logs dialog box displays the kind of log you selected Click Clear 3 Click Close Expo
264. ing an error condition error log See master log error message Indication that an error has been detected D See also information message warning message ESA See Enterprise Systems Architecture ESCON See Enterprise Systems Connection ESCON Director See Enterprise Systems Connection Director Ethernet A widely implemented local area network LAN protocol that uses a bus or star topology and serves as the basis for the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE 802 3 standard which specifies the physical and software layers Ethernet hub A product used to connect a server and the switches it manages event code A three digit number that specifies the exact event that occurred This code provides information on system failures such as hardware failures failure locations or general information on normal system events EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Glossary event log Displays errors related to SAN management such as SNMP traps or Client Server communications event notification A process by which the SAN Management application informs remote users and workstations of certain classes of events that occur on the system E mail notification and the configuration of simple network management protocol SNMP trap recipients are two examples of remote notification programs that can be implemented through the application exchange A term that refers to one of the Fi
265. inistrator Product Administrator Device Maintenance System Administrator Maintenance Device Operation Discover On Off System Administrator Operator System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Discovery Setup System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator E mail Event Notification Setup System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Enterprise Fabric Mode System Administrator Security Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Event Management System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Export System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator FabricBinding System Administrator Security Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Frame Sniffer System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Group Manager Create Event Log System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Group Manager Firmware Install System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Group Manager Run Data Collection System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Import System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator License Update System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Log Managemen
266. ion at the receiver 2 The maximum number of frames a port can transmit without receiving a receive ready signal from the receiving product BB_Credit can be adjustable to provide different levels of compensation bus The path that carries data between the computer microprocessor and peripheral products An IDE interface cable and a small computer system interface SCSI cable are both examples bypassed port If a port is bypassed all serial channel signals route past the port A product attached to the port cannot communicate with other products in the loop byte Abbreviated as B A byte generally equals eight bits although a byte can equal from four to ten bits 299 Glossary c cache Random access memory RAM that is used by the redundant array of independent disks RAID controller to increase O throughput If write back caching is enabled this RAM can contain data that is not yet written to the disks in the array In normal circumstances this data is flushed from the RAM to the disk drives in the array with a maximum latency of 64 ms If power fails to the subsystem preventing the data from being written to the disk drives in the array the battery holds the data for approximately 72 hours If power is restored within that period the data is flushed into the array and operation continues normally If power has not been restored within 72 hours the data is lost cache memory A memory subsystem that stores
267. ion event user datagram protocol UDP A connectionless protocol that runs on top of Internet protocol IP networks User datagram protocol Internet protocol UDP IP offers very few error recovery services instead providing a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network UDP IP is primarily used for broadcasting messages over an entire network 324 V vendor Developer or manufacturer of software or hardware virtual machine VM 1 A virtual data processing system that appears to be at the exclusive disposal of a single user but whose functions are accomplished by sharing the resources of a real data processing system 2 A functional simulation of a computer system and its associated devices multiples of which can be controlled concurrently by one operating system D T VM See virtual machine W WAN See wide area network warning message A message that indicates a possible error has been detected See also error message information message web server interface The interface provides a graphical user interface GUI similar to the Element Manager application and supports director or switch configuration statistics monitoring and basic operations With director or switch firmware installed administrators or operators with a browser capable personal computer PC and an Internet connection can monitor and manage the director or switch through an web server interface wide area networ
268. ions on the Storage Port Map ping dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 TABLE 56 Privilege Monitor Ethernet Event Privileges and Application Behavior Description Allows you to enable events for loss of Ethernet connection No Privilege Disables Ethernet Event on the Monitor menu In this Appendix F Read Only Enables Ethernet Event on the Monitor menu Allows you to open the Configure Ethernet Event dialog box however dis ables the Enable Ethernet check box the Ethernet Timeout text box and the OK button Read Write Enables Ethernet Event on the Monitor menu Enables all functions on the Configure Ethernet Event dialog box Performance Allows you to configure the performance sub system the display of per formance graphs and threshold settings Disables entire Perfor mance submenu off the Monitor menu as well as the right click Perfor mance Graph s com mand on ports and switch products Enables entire Perfor mance submenu off the Monitor menu as well as the right click Perfor mance Graph s com mand on ports and switch products Allows you to open the Performance Setup dialog box however disables the OK button No changes can be made Allows you to open the Performance Graphs dia log box and enables all controls however dis ables the check boxes under the Set Thresholds label on the individual port dialog box dou ble click a g
269. ise Servers See also open systems management style management style 308 field replaceable unit FRU Assembly removed and replaced in its entirety when any one of its components fails D See active field replaceable unit file server A computer that stores data centrally for network users and manages access to that data file transfer protocol FTP A TCP IP based client server protocol used to transfer files to and from a remote host Does not perform any conversion or translation firmware Embedded program code that resides and runs on for example directors switches and hubs firewall A networking product that blocks unauthorized access to all or parts of a network firewall zoning Hardware enforced access between F_Ports enforced at the source port The hardware verifies the destination port against the zone defined for the source port firmware Embedded program code that resides and runs on for example directors switches and hubs FLASH memory Reusable nonvolatile memory that is organized as segments for writing and as bytes or words for reading FLASH memory is faster than read only memory but slower than random access memory D FLOGI See fabric login command FL_Port See fabric loop port FPM See fibre port module F_Port See fabric port frame A variable length packet of data that is transmitted in frame relay technology EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 FRU
270. isplays the transmit percentage utilization of the port Type Displays the port type Vendor Displays the name of the product s vendor This field is editable at the device level VFID Displays the Virtual Fabric ID of the port EFC Manager Software User Manual 57 53 1000663 03 2 58 User Interface Description Master Log The Master Log which displays in the lower left area of the main window lists the events that have occurred on the SAN If you do not see the Master Log select View gt Show Panels gt All Panels or press F5 Two daily files are maintained one that contains events and one that contains summary information The format of the daily event log file name is Event_YYYYMMDD log where YYYYMMDD is the date that the events took place and the log was created The daily summary file name format is Event_YYYYMMDD sum By default event history files are kept for 45 days or until LOOO MB of disk space is used Log files and summary files that are older than 45 days are deleted from the system In addition when the total disk space used by all the daily log files exceeds the allowable disk quota the oldest daily log and the associated summary file are deleted from the system This check is performed hourly to ensure optimal performance The default locations for the log files are lt nstall_ Home gt Server Universe_Home TestUniverse _Working EventStorageProvider Event_YY YYMMDD log and lt nstall_Home gt Ser
271. istance feature Z zip drive A high capacity floppy disk and disk drive developed by the lomega Corporation Zip disks are slightly larger than conventional floppy disks The storage capacity for zip disks is between 100 and 250 MB of data The zip drive and disk is used for backing up the laptop Management Server and is located on the communications tray behind the server platform EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Glossary zone Set of devices that can access one another All connected devices may be configured into one or more zones Devices in the same zone can see each other Those devices that occupy different zones cannot See also active zone set zone set zoning zone library Zoning data that includes zones and zone sets for a fabric zone member Specification of a device to be included in a zone A zone member can be identified by the port number of the director or switch to which it is attached or by its port world wide name WWN In multiswitch fabrics identification of end devices or nodes by WWN is preferable zone set A collection of zones that may be activated as a unit See also active zone set zone zoning Grouping of several devices by function or by location All devices connected to a connectivity product such as the director or switch may be configured into one or more zones 325 Glossary 326 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Index A access ass
272. istrator si Maintenance L Operator LE Product Administrator mal Administrator Default Admin Add Add Email Event Notification Setup OK Cancel Help FIGURE 17 EFCM 9 7 Server Users Dialog Box 2 Inthe Users list select a user 3 Inthe Groups list select the groups to which you want to assign the user Press CTRL and click to make multiple selections 4 Click the right arrow The user is assigned to the selected groups 5 Click OK EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Managing User Groups 3 Removing a User from a Group NOTE You must have the User Management privilege to perform this task You can remove users from groups to take away permissions for features and topology views pe are logged in when you reassign their group they are not affected until they log out and try to log in again 1 Select SAN gt Users The EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box displays 2 Inthe Groups list select the groups from which you want to remove the user Press CTRL and click to make multiple selections 3 Click the left arrow The user is removed from the selected groups 4 Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box Finding a User s Groups NOTE Any user with User Management read only or read write privilege can find a user s group You can determine the groups to which a user belongs through the EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box 1 Select SAN gt Users The EF
273. ix Dividing a network into subnets is useful for both security and performance reasons IP networks are divided using a subnet mask subnet mask A mask used by a computer to determine whether another computer with which it needs to communicate is located on a local or remote network The network mask depends upon the class of networks to which the computer is connecting The mask indicates which digits to look atina longer network address and allows the router to avoid handling the entire address Subnet masking allows routers to move the packets more quickly Typically a subnet may represent all the machines at one geographic location in one building or on the same local area network 322 switch A device that connects filters and forwards packets between local area network LAN segments or storage area network SAN nodes or devices switch group A switch and the collection of devices connected to it that are not in other groups Switch groups discovered by the SAN Management application display with a gray background on the Physical Map switched mode If the arbitrated loop device is in switched mode each pair of communicating ports on the arbitrated loop device can share the 100MB bandwidth In switched mode up to three pairs of loop devices can communicate with each other simultaneously Or a public device on the loop can communicate with another device on the fabric while up to two pairs of loop devices can communic
274. k WAN A network capable of transmission over large geographic areas that uses transmission lines provided by a common carrier See also local area network metropolitan area network storage area network window The main window for the SAN Management application All management and monitoring functions are performed through the SAN Management application window Windows A graphical user interface and windowing system introduced by Microsoft Corporation in 1985 Windows runs on top of the MS DOS operating system D EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 workstation A terminal or microcomputer usually connected to a network or mainframe at which a user can perform applications world wide names WWN Eight byte string that uniquely identifies a Fibre Channel entity that is a port a node a switch a fabric even on global networks wrap plug Synonym for loopback plug wrap test A test that checks attachment or control unit circuitry without checking the mechanism itself by returning the output of the mechanism as input A wrap test can transmit a specific character pattern through a system and compare the pattern received with the pattern transmitted D write authorization Permission for an simple network management protocol SNMP management station with the proper community name to modify writable management information base MIB variables WWN See world wide names X XDF See extended d
275. l To verify call home center functionality complete the following steps 1 2 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home Click Edit Centers beneath the Call Home Centers table The Configure Call Home Center dialog box displays In the Call Home Centers list select the center you want to edit Make sure that the Enabled check box is selected Click Send Test A faked event is generated and sent to the selected call home center You must contact the call home center to verify that the event was received and in the correct format EFC Manager Software User Manual 43 53 1000663 03 44 1 Configuring Advanced Call Home 6 Click OK to close the Test Event Sent message 7 Click OK to close the Configure Call Home Center dialog box 8 Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box Disabling a Call Home Center When a call home center is disabled no devices can send call home events to the call home center However the devices and event filters assigned to the disabled call home center are not removed You can still perform the following actions on a disabled call home center e Edit call home center configuration e Add devices and event filters to the call home center To disable a call home center complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays 2 Inthe Call Ho
276. l 53 1000663 03 User Interface Description 2 e Port Display Select to configure how ports display e Occupied Product Ports Select to display the ports of the devices in the fabrics present in the physical map that are connected to other devices e UnOccupied Product Ports Select to display the ports of the devices Shown in the physical map that are not connected to any other device e Attached Ports Select to display the attached ports of the target devices e Switch to Switch Connections Select to display the switch to switch connections Plan Menu The Plan menu is only active when you are in the Planned SAN view To display a planned SAN select View gt Planned SAN The Plan menu provides the following commands e Set Rules Select to specify planning rules e Evaluate Select to evaluate the plan e Insert Devices Select to insert a device such as an HBA bridge or server Multiple Devices Select to add multiple devices to your plan HBA Select to add an HBA device to your plan Switch Select to add a Switch device to your plan Storage Select to add a Storage device to your plan JBOD Select to add a JBOD device to your plan Hub Select to add a Hub device to your plan Bridge Select to add a Bridge device to your plan Tape Select to add a Tape device to your plan NAS Select to add a NAS device to your plan Server Select to add a Server device to your plan e Planned Device Select to change th
277. l home event trigger occurs the SAN Management application generates an entry to the master log You can configure Advanced Call Home for the following Call Home centers Brocade International Windows only Brocade North America Windows only EMC Windows only HP LAN Windows only HP Modem Windows only IBM Windows only IBM E mail Windows only SUN E mail Windows and Solaris Advanced Call Home using the Event Management feature allows you to automate tasks that occur when call home event trigger is fired When a call home event trigger occurs the SAN Management application generates following actions Sends an e mail to a specified recipient or dials in to a Support center Exports Performance data SAN files Zoning data to a designated location Launches the specified application using a script Adds an entry to the master log file and screen display Displays a message to all open Clients Generates a report Sends an SNMP trap containing information about the triggering event to the receiving system Generates an audible alarm For more information about Call Home events refer to Appendix page 287 For more information about Event Management refer to Event Management Online Help or the Event Management User Manual Advanced Call Home allows you to perform the following tasks EFC Manager Software User Manual 37 53 1000663 03 38 1 Configuring Advanced Call Home e Assign devices to and remove
278. led Backup icon Waiting for next backup to start e Backup Disabled icon Backup is disabled e Backup Failed icon Backup failed at hh mm ss mm dd yyy Server Name Displays the name of the Server to which you are connected 8 Total Users Displays the number of clients logged into the server User s ID Displays the user ID of the logged in user EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 70 2 User Interface Description EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Chapter Setting Up the Application 3 In this Chapter This chapter provides instructions for setting up and customizing the application e Server and Client Communication Requirements 0 0 0000 72 e Configuring a Server 6 eee eee 73 Configuring the Client 0 0 0 ce tees 79 Configuration OptionS scssi sebi nsere ee eee 79 Mama sing USCIS cs inii dnc dctescciecdcben a oaen a EEEa Secon seat winion sete EEUE EE aca 89 Managing User GroupS 02 2 cece eee 94 e Configuring Remote ACCESS 0 0 0 c eee eee 100 e Partitioned Switch Support 0 cece eee 102 e Customizing the Main Window 00 cece eee eee 103 e Customizing Device PropertieS 0 0 0 0 cee eee 105 Export ANG IMPOM tc esis k aa gic ieee eee a a ewe stow aa aai 109 e Accessing Third Party ToolS 000 cece eee eee 123 e Accessing Eclipse Management Applications 0000 eee 130 EFC Manager Software
279. lient is logged out and the EFCM 9 7 Log In dialog box displays Log back into the application ATTENTION When discovery is on the discovered SAN is replaced with the imported data Only one SAN can be viewed at a time For instructions about turning on discovery refer to Setting Up Discovery on page 139 6 On the Imported Results dialog box click OK 118 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Export and Import 3 Importing SANvergence Manager Data EFCM 9 7 allows you to import your SANvergence Manager data The SANvergence Manager data includes discovery information MSAN and SAN Router details user defined labels SNMP traps TFTP paths and Zoning files as well as other information NOTE You must exit SANvergence Manager before starting an import from the SAN Management application SANvergence Manager only stores the contents of the discovered devices after you exit the application Therefore if SANvergence Manager is running during the SAN Management import you may not receive all IP addresses from the mSAN list NOTE SANvergence Manager has a different zone data structure than the SAN Management application therefore it must be converted into a data structure that can be re used by the SAN Management application When importing SANvergence Manager zones the SAN Management application only coverts the data into the SAN Management application data structure and stores the data files xml files in the
280. ll Home Configuration dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Advanced Call Home 1 Assigning an Event Filter to a Device To assign an event filters to a call home center complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays 2 Inthe Call Home Event Filters table select the event filter you want to assign For more information about Call Home events refer to Appendix page 287 In the Call Home Centers table select the devices to which you want to assign the event filter Click gt right arrow button The selected event filters are assigned to the selected devices The event filter displays beneath the specified device or all of the device under the specified call home center 5 Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box Overwriting an Assigned Event Filter A device can only have one event filter at a time therefore when a new filter is applied to a device that already has a filter you must confirm the new filter assignment To overwrite an event filter complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays 2 Inthe Call Home Event Filters table select the event filter you want to apply For more information about Call Home events refer to Appendix page 287 In the C
281. ll home status click the Call Home icon The Call Home Notification dialog box displays the list of devices that have assigned filters or call home disabled The following table explains the statuses that may be displayed in the Call Home Notification dialog box TABLE 15 Call Home Status Status Description Enabled The device is manageable call home is enabled and a filter is applied Disabled Call home is disabled on at least one device or call home is disabled from the Advanced Call Home dialog box Not Manageable Manageability is lost EFC Manager Software User Manual 45 53 1000663 03 46 1 Configuring Advanced Call Home Assigning a Device to the Call Home Center Discovered devices switches routers and directors are not assigned to a corresponding call home center automatically You must manually assign each device to a call home center before you use call home To assign a device or multiple devices to a call home center complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays In the Products List table select the devices you want to assign to a call home center NOTE Indirectly discovered switches do not display in the Products List table NOTE SAN routers require firmware 5 0 and higher to display in the Products List table In the Call Home Center table select the call home center to which you wa
282. log box displays Figure 28 NOTE The dialog box may display more fields or tabs depending on your licensed features P Address SNMP Product Type and Access Description IP Address Pv4 Address 7216 788 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 Extended Discovery vy Enable Data Source for Domain Use auto detection Use the server Use a specific RDC IP address of RDC Add Multiple Generate a sequence of IP addresses OK Cancel Help FIGURE28 Address Properties Dialog Box IP Address Tab 4 On the IP Address tab enter a description for the product at the new IP address Select either IPv4 Address or IPv6 Address NOTE The SAN Management application accepts IP addresses in IPv4 and IPv6 formats The IPv4 format is valid when the Operating System has IPv4 mode only or dual stack mode The IPv6 format is valid when the Operating System has IPv6 mode only or dual stack mode EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Address Properties 4 6 If you selected IPv4 Address complete the following steps a Inthe IPv4 Address field enter the IP address four groups of three decimals for the device b Inthe Subnet Mask IPv4 or dual mode only field enter the subnet mask address for the device 7 If you selected IPv6 Address complete the following steps NOTE If IPV6 is disabled restart the SAN Management server and edit the IPV6 address to IPV4 format a Inthe IPv6 Address field e
283. low the MySQL documentation for extracting the JDBC driver into the created folder To export files to a MySQL database follow the instructions in Exporting Data to a Database on page 113 Setting Up for Exporting to a DB2 Database You can export files from the SAN Management application to a DB2 database Use these instructions to set up for exporting to a DB2 database NOTE Export to a DB2 database is only supported on the Windows platform 1 Setup the DB2 client on the machine running the Server Verify that the DB2 client is in the path before the Server is started TIP On Windows the path is C Program Files sqllib bin 2 Create an instance on the database Server If the database happens to be a remote database configure the DB2 Client to access the instance that you want to use The SAN Management application uses the JDBC application driver db2java zip to connect to DB2 The driver can be found in the Java folder after the DB2 Client is installed 3 To export files to a MySQL database follow the instructions in Exporting Data to a Database on page 113 EFC Manager Software User Manual 115 53 1000663 03 3 116 Export and Import Importing Data You can choose to import the following information to the application SAN File zip Imports an entire SAN in zip format For step by step instructions about importing a SAN file refer to Importing a SAN File on page 118 SANvergence Mana
284. lowing passage through firewalls Configuring for Faster Logins When a Client attempts to log into a Server the Server normally calls back to verify communication In a firewall situation this call fails and the Server automatically treats the Client as a polling Client It may take up to 45 seconds for this call back to fail worst case You can configure a polling parameter in configure properties files to let the Server know ahead of time that the Client is a polling Client This skips the call back from the Server and decreases the login time Forcing a Client to Be Polling To force a specific Client to be a polling Client edit the Client config properties file located in the lt Install_Home gt resources Client directory Edit the smp callback passive parameter as in the following example This parameter only affects this Client all other Clients can be regular Clients 1 Open the lt nstall_Home gt resources Client config properties file using a text editor for example Notepad 2 Go to the following lines Forces this Client to be a polling Client Enable by un commenting this parameter smp callback passive 3 Remove the pound sign in front of the smp callback passive parameter Forces this Client to be a polling Client Enable by un commenting this parameter smp callback passive 4 Save the file and restart the server 250 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 In
285. ls 00 c cece e eee eee 128 Launching FCR Configuration 0 20 e eee eee 129 Starting Third Party Tools from the Application 129 Accessing Eclipse Management Applications 130 viii EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Chapter 4 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Discovering a SAN ln this Chia pte riieia wits wiv anaes Wein alee a Kalba aE ee Fl 131 How Discovery WorkS 000 cece eee eee eee 132 Out of Band Discovery 00 cece eee eee eee 132 In Band DISCOVENY esse Baad ack ath cee fas ee Fea St ako 132 DataFabric Manager Interaction Requirements 133 Gathering DataFabric Manager Device Discovery Data 133 SNMP Trap Listener Conflict 0 0 00 c eee eee 133 Manager of Manager Discovery 00 ce eee eens 134 Discovering Data From Another EFCM Server 135 License DISCOVETY sie cee e eee beta eee eee eS 137 Mi1OK Director Discovery 2 0c cee eee eee 138 Access Gateway DiSCOVElY 0 0 cee eee 138 N_Port ID Virtualization Discovery 000 0c eee eee 139 Setting Up Discovery 1 2 0 0 c eee ee 139 Setting the Polling Delay 0 0 cece eee 141 Configuring Address Properties 0000 eee eee eee 142 Adding an IP AddreSS 2 0 cece eee eee eee 142 Editing an IP Address 1 eee eee eee 144 Enabling Extended Discovery 000 cc eee eens 1
286. lt Install_Home gt directory lt nstall_Home gt Client Data Zoning You can then access them using the Import function on the Zoning dialog box to save them into the current Zone Library For more information refer to the Zoning User Manual or Zoning Online Help To import SANvergence Manager Data files complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Import The Import dialog box displays From the Import list select SANvergence Manager Data 3 Inthe Installation Path field enter the path to the SANvergence Manager directory or Browse to the directory The default path is C Program Files McDATA SANvergence Manager 4 7 4 Click OK When the import is complete and successful a User Action Event entry is created in the Master Log EFC Manager Software User Manual 119 53 1000663 03 3 Export and Import Importing Nicknames To import Nicknames complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Import The Import dialog box displays 2 Select Nicknames from the Import list 3 Inthe File Name field enter the path and file name or Browse to the file NOTE If you browsed to and selected the lt nstall_Home gt Server Universe_Home TestUniverse _Working directory or any files within that directory the Import Export might fail You must deselect the file or directory before you run the Import Export process again 4 Select one of the following options to set special handling for nicknames assigned to ports For
287. mats Fibre Channel standard American National Standards Institute ANSI standard that provides a common efficient data transport system that supports multiple protocols The architecture integrates both channel and network technologies and provides active intelligent interconnection among products All data transmission is isolated from the control protocol allowing use of point to point arbitrated loop or switched fabric topologies to meet the needs of an application Fibre Connection FICON An IBM set of products and services introduced in 1999 that is based on the Fibre Channel Standard FICON technology uses fiber optic cables as the data transmission medium and significantly improves I O performance including one Gbps bi directional data transfer FICON is designed to coexist with ESCON channels and FICON to ESCON control unit connections are supported D fibre port module FPM A 1 gigabit per second module that contains four generic ports Deports FICON See Fibre Connection FICON Management Server An optional feature that can be enabled on the director or switch or switch through the Element Manager application When enabled host control and management of the director or switch or switch is provided through an S 390 Parallel Enterprise or 2 Series Server attached to a director or switch or switch port FICON management style The management style that is most useful when attaching to IBM S 390 Enterpr
288. me Centers table clear the Enable check box of the call home center you want to disable The selected call home center and its devices and event filters become grayed out However the call home center is not actually disabled until you save your changes 3 Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box When a device is assigned to the call home center a confirmation message displays 4 Click Yes EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Advanced Call Home 1 Viewing Call Home Status You can view call home status from the main SAN Management application window or from the Call Home Notification dialog box The SAN Management application enables you to view the call home status at a glance by providing a call home status icon on the Status Bar The following table illustrates and describes the icons that indicate the current status of the call home function TABLE 14 Call Home Icons Icon Description Normal Displays when call home is enabled on all devices and no filters are applied Degraded Displays when call home is enabled on all devices and at least one filter is active Disabled Displays when any of the following conditions are met e At least one device s call home is disabled X e At least one call home center is disabled from Advanced Call Home dialog box e Atleast one non manageable switch is assigned to any call home center To view more detail regarding ca
289. me Sniffer your switch must meet the following requirements Manageable switch must support Frame Sniffer M6140 Director Intrepid 6064 Director or the Sphereon 3000 4000 series For a list of manageable switches refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 Firmware must be M EOS 5 0 or higher Manageable switch must have an OSMS feature key enabled Manageable switch must run in McDATA fabric mode FC Host Bus Adapter HBA must support in band feature see table below TABLE 20 FC Host Bus Adapter Requirements Host Bus Adapter Firmware Windows XP HBA Mfg Model Level Windows 2000 Pro Solaris 8 9 Redhat 8 9 Emulex LP1050DC v1 90a4 v5 5 10a10 2 n a v5 02d b v1 6a Emulex LP8000 v3 91a3 v5 5 01a0 1 n a v5 02d n a v1 12 2 0 v1 6a Emulex LP9002 v3 91a3 v5 5 10a10 2 n a v6 01f n a b v 5 0 1e Solaris 9 only Emulex LP9002DC v3 91a3 v5 5 10a10 2 n a v6 01f n a b Emulex LP9802 v1 81 a1 v5 5 01a0 1 n a v5 02d n a v1 12 2 0 v1 6a JNI FCE 6410 N n a n a n a v4 1 5 n a v2 0 b 030717 16 JNI FCE 6460 v1 5 v5 2 v2 0 n a v5 3 n a v2 0 b 030717 16 EFC Manager Software User Manual 199 53 1000663 03 5 Configuring Frame Sniffer TABLE 20 FC Host Bus Adapter Requirements Host Bus Adapter Firmware Windows XP HBA Mfg Model Level Windows 2000 Pro Solaris 8 9 Redhat 8 9 Qlogic QL 2200 v1 83 V8 1 5 15 V8 1 5 12 v4 13 01 v3 05 v6 06 10 v1 27 13 v1 27 06 v2 01b5 Qlogic QL 2202 v1
290. media has a limited number of re writes before the medium is exhausted and write errors occur It is recommended that you configure the backup system to target a hard drive or a network drive as described in the procedures below Back Up Directory Structure Overview EFCM backs up data to two alternate folders For example if the backup directory location is D Backup the backup service alternates between two backup directories D Backup and D BackupaAlt The current backup is always D Backup and contains a complete backup of the system The older backup is always D BackupAlt If a backup cycle fails the cause is usually a full CD RW When the backup cycle fails there may only be one directory D Backup There may also be a D BackupTemp directory Ignore this directory because it may be incomplete EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Backup to a Writable CD NOTE Backing Up and Restoring Data 1 This is not recommended on a permanent basis CDs have a limited life and may only last a month An error message occurs if your SAN Management application can no longer back up to the disc To configure the backup function to a writable CD complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays Figure 2 Category Backup End Node Display Flyovers FIP Nicknames Reset Display PPK SM OM om Coa Software Configuration Client Expor
291. menu 277 F In this Appendix TABLE 56 Privilege Port Fencing Product Administration NOTE This privilege affects M EOS and M EOSn switch product Element Managers Privileges and Application Behavior Description Allows you to configure the function that logs ports out of fabrics auto matically if they are mis behaving An Element Manager priv ilege that enables most functionally No Privilege Disables the Port Fencing command from the Con figure menu Disables the functions described in the Element Manager User Manual for which you do not have rights Displays the message You do not have rights to perform this action Read Only Enables the Port Fencing command from the Con figure menu Disables the Thresholds Add Edit and Delete buttons the right and left arrow threshold assignment buttons and the Port Unblock and Properties buttons and the OK button on the Port Fencing dialog box Same as No Privilege Read Write Enables the Port Fencing command from the Con figure menu Enables all functions on the Port Fencing dialog box Enables the functions described in the Element Manager User Manual Product Maintenance NOTE This privilege affects M EOS and M EOSn switch product Element Managers An Element Manager priv ilege that enables mainte nance functions Disables the functions described in the Element Manager User Manual for which you do not hav
292. ministrator Security Admin System Administrator Security Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Setup Tools System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Show Route System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Shutdown System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator SNMP Agent Configuration System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Software Configuration Properties System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Trap Forwarding System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator User Management View Management System Administrator Security Administrator System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator VirtualFabric Zoning Activation System Administrator System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Zoning Fabric Libraries System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Zoning Global Library 286 System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Advanced Call Home Event Tables Appendix G In this Appendix This section provides information about the specific events that display when using A
293. municating with an unblocked port can login to the director or switch and communicate with devices attached to any other unblocked port assuming that this is Supported by the current zoning configuration uniform resource locator URL A URL is the address of a document or other resource on the Internet universal port module UPM A flexible 1 gigabit per second or 2 gigabit per second module that contains four generic ports G_Ports UNIX A popular multi user multitasking operating system originally designed to be a small flexible system used exclusively by programmers UNIX was one of the first operating systems to be written in a high level programming language namely C This meant that it could be installed on virtually any computer for which a C compiler existed Due to its portability flexibility and power UNIX has become the leading operating system for workstations Historically it has been less popular in the personal computer market but the emergence of a new version called Linux is revitalizing UNIX across all platforms UPM See universal port module upper level protocol ULP Protocols that map to and run on top of the Fibre Channel FC 4 layer ULPs include Internet protocol IP and small computer system interface SCSI D URL See uniform resource locator user action events Actions taken by the user for example changes in the SAN changed settings etc Each such action is considered a user act
294. n NOTE If this is a headless unit with no console refer to Headless Pre Installation Requirements on page 18 e Make sure that the DISPLAY environment variable is correctly defined in the shell with a valid value for example to display to the local console export DISPLAY 0 0 or to display to a remote system that has an X Server running export DISPLAY remoteipaddress 0 0 You may also need to consider a firewall that might block the display to the X Server which listens by default on TCP port 6000 on the remote host To display to a remote system you need to permit the remote display of the X Server by running command xhost IP where rp is the IP address of the EFCM server host from the X based desktop of the remote system EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Installing the Application 1 Make sure to test the DISPLAY definition by running the command xterm from the same shell from which you run install bin A new X terminal window to the destination X Server display should open Installation 1 Insert the installation CD into the CD ROM drive and open the following file lt CD_drive gt lt UNIX_Platform gt install bin 2 On the Choose Install Set screen select Server and Client or Client and click Next NOTE If you select Client the installer will skip the steps that are not required 3 On the Select Install Folder screen select the usual location for your system s application files for e
295. n allows you to add ISL Protocol Link and Security thresholds Adding ISL Protocol Thresholds To add an ISL Threshold complete the following steps 1 Select Configure gt Port Fencing The Port Fencing dialog box displays Figure 44 Violation Type ISL Protocol sini 0 ports blocked by thresholds ISL Thresholds Ports i Name Limit Period Ports Affected Find gt Ports Port Type _ A ISL Thres Default Protocol Er 5 Smin 0 E All Fabrics E 1000080088301191 S 100008008830119 lt NoF end KE Add Edit Delete Properties OK Cancel Help FIGURE 44 Port Fencing Dialog Box 2 From the Violation Type list select ISL Protocol 3 Click Add The Add ISL Threshold dialog box displays Figure 45 Block a port when one of the following ISL protocol error types meets the threshold ISL Bouncing ISL Segmentation ISL Protocol Mismatch Name Threshold 5 V errorsper 5 V Minutes OK Cancel Help FIGURE 45 Add ISL Threshold Dialog Box 4 Enter a name for the threshold in the Name field 5 From the Threshold errors list select the number of port events allowed for the threshold 184 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Port Fencing 5 6 From the Threshold Minutes list select the time period for the threshold Click OK to add the ISL threshold to the table and close the Add ISL Threshold dialog box To assign this threshold to fabrics switches or switch ports re
296. name Varchar 128 ADV Driver version Varchar 128 ASN Serial number Varchar 128 AORV Option ROM version Varchar 128 ANOP Number of ports Int N A AFV Firmware version Varchar 128 ADN Driver name Varchar 128 ADES Model description Varchar 128 AMOD Model Char 128 AMF Manufacturer Char 128 AHV Hardware version Char 128 EXPORTTIME Exported time Varchar 128 Node Confidence Node Confidence Varchar 128 VirtualFabric ID VirtualFabric ID Int 11 CONNECTION Table TABLE 29 Field Definition Format Size SRCGUID Source GUID Varchar 128 SRCPORTNUMBER Source port number Int N A TARGETGUID Target GUID Varchar 128 TARGETPORTNUMBER Target port number Int N A EXPORTTIME Exported time Varchar 128 EFC Manager Software User Manual 257 53 1000663 03 E 258 In this Appendix DEVICE Table TABLE 30 Field Definition Format Size DEVICEGUID Device GUID Varchar 128 IBSTAT Inband status Varchar 128 NAME Device name Varchar 255 OBSTAT Out of band status Varchar 128 DEVICETYPE Type of device Varchar 128 PORTCOUNT Number of ports on Int N A device PORTNAME Port name of device Varchar 255 SERIALNUMBER Serial number of Varchar 255 device VENDOR Manufacturer Varchar 128 MODEL Model of device Varchar 128 IPADDRESS IP address number Varchar 128 FCADDRESS Fibre Channel Varchar 128 address WWN World wide name Varchar 128 FIRMWARE Firmware version Varchar 128 DEVICEAVAILABLE Is device available Int N A EXPORTTIME Exported time Varchar 128
297. names dialog box To import Zone Alias information from a B model switch into the SAN Management application s complete the following steps 1 Select Configure gt Nicknames The Configure Nicknames dialog box displays 2 Click Import The Import dialog box displays From the Import list select FC Aliases into Nicknames In the Fabric field select the fabric from which you want to import FC Aliases Click OK A Warning message displays stating Importing a nickname for a WWN that already has a nickname will overwrite the existing nickname Do you want to continue Click OK to continue The file is imported and assigned 6 Click OK to close the Configure Nicknames dialog box Exporting Nicknames 1 Select Configure gt Nicknames The Configure Nicknames dialog box displays 2 From the Display list select how you want to display devices You can display devices by All Nicknames All WWNs Only Fabrics And mSANs Only Products Only Ports or Switch and N Ports All discovered devices display 3 Click Export The Save dialog box displays 172 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Nicknames 5 Browse to the folder where you want to save the file and type a file name in the File Name field Click Save The file is exported to the selected folder Click OK to close the Configure Nicknames dialog box Removing a Nickname 1 Select Configure gt Nicknames The Configure Nicknames
298. nd enabling 139 overview 131 132 setting up 139 turning on and off 141 151 discovery setup feature 285 disk exporting to 109 documentation where to find 235 E Edit menu 60 editing community strings 213 editing trap recipients 210 editing user groups 96 editing device s shortcut menu 127 EFCM installing 13 starting 23 uninstalling 21 Element Manager session launching 128 element manager opening 162 e mail event notification setup feature 285 e mail notification configuring 220 e mail exporting to 109 enclosure group icon 245 enterprise fabric mode configuring 175 overview 174 enterprise fabric mode feature 285 ethernet events enabling 222 event log copying from 219 overview 58 216 event management feature 285 event notification configuring 222 e mail 220 overview 220 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 events clearing 217 copying 219 exporting 217 filtering 92 218 icons 246 monitoring 216 viewing 216 export feature 285 exporting events 217 files 109 overview 109 setting up DB2 database 115 setting up MySQL database 115 F fabric binding adding detached devices 180 adding switches 179 disabling 179 enabling 178 overview 176 removing switches 181 fabric binding feature 285 fabric group icon 245 FABRIC table for MySQL 258 260 262 263 266 269 fabrics changing nicknames for 166 changing properties 166
299. nd data frame size are also established fabric login command FLOGI The command that establishes the initial operating parameters and topology for a fabric The command is accepted by a fabric port F_Port D fabric loop port FL_Port A fabric port F_Port that contains arbitrated loop AL functions associated with the Fibre Channel arbitrated loop FC AL topology The access point of the fabric for physically connecting an arbitrated loop of node loop ports NL_Ports See also expansion port fabric port hub port node loop port node port fabric mode See interoperability mode fabric port F_Port Physical interface within the fabric that connects to a node port N_Port through a point to point full duplex connection See also expansion port fabric loop port hub port node loop port node port fabric services The services that implement the various Fibre Channel protocol services that are described in the standards These services include the fabric controller login server name server and server platform fabric switches A product that allows communication between multiple products using Fibre Channel protocols A fabric switch enables the sharing bandwidth and end nodes using basic multiplexing techniques failover Automatic and nondisruptive transition of functions from an active field replaceable unit FRU that has failed to a backup FRU FC See Fibre Channel 306 FC O The Fibre Channel la
300. nd group color or layout format to revert to the default Make the background and or layout changes after mapping the loop to the hub Need more information about features Many of the features described in this document are explained in more detail in other manuals or Help modules Search the online Help or refer to the related user manual for more information To find all the help topics that contain a particular word or phrase 1 On the Help window click the tab with the magnifying glass icon 2 Inthe Find field enter the word or phrase for which you want to search 3 Press Enter Product will not install on a Windows system Verify that the system has 100 MB available on the C drive The program requires 100 MB for installation but only 50 MB to run Receiving error Compatibility between lt TARGET VER SION gt and lt CURRENT VER SION gt is unknown Do you want to continue Firmware files are included in the upgrade process but release rules are not Since release rules are required when sending another firmware version to a switch this error results To fix this problem add the latest firmware file to the firmware library This also adds the new release rules and resolve the problem Remote client login fails when you login using the Server IP Address in the Net work Address field for remote client 1 and then try to login using the Network Name in the Network Address field for remote cli
301. nd user groups you can add change or remove users By adding a user you assign privileges to certain features or views in the application enhancing the security of your SAN Viewing the List of Users Select SAN gt Users The 9 7 Server Users dialog box displays users their event notification settings and their e mail addresses Figure 12 Users Groups f uw lo Description E mail Address Emal O E Gp System Administrator Administrator Default Admin O Filter gi Security Administrator Le Maintenance L Operator L Product Administrator Add Add f E mail Event Notification Setup OK Cancel Help FIGURE 12 EFCM 9 7 Server Users Dialog Box EFC Manager Software User Manual 89 53 1000663 03 3 90 Managing Users Adding a User Account NOTE You must have the User Management privilege to perform this task 1 Select SAN gt Users The EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box displays 2 Click Add The Add User dialog box displays Figure 13 Description Email Address d gt Email _ Enable Filter User ID Secure Password Retype Password OK Cancel Help FIGURE 13 Add User Dialog Box In the Description field type the description of the user 4 Inthe E mail Address field type the users e mail addresses separating multiple addresses with a semicolon 5 Select the Enable option to enable e mail notification for the user A message may display stati
302. nd zone definitions EFC Manager Software User Manual 33 53 1000663 03 34 1 Backing Up and Restoring Data Restoring Data from the Brocade Supplied Rack Mount Management Server To restore data to the server platform follow these instructions 1 9 Reinstall the application For step by step instructions about installing the application refer to Installing the Application on page 13 Open the SAN Management application and go through the steps in the configuration Log back into the application Stop the SAN Management application Services by selecting Start gt Programs gt EFCM 9 7 gt Stop Services A DOS window displays messages of services being shut down Change the directory to lt nstall_Home gt bin Double click restore bat A DOS window opens At the Command Prompt enter the path to the backup source directory and press Enter The default is D Backup At the Command Prompt enter the path to the destination directory and press Enter The default is lt Install_Home gt When you receive the Restore completed message press any key to close the DOS window 10 Restart the SAN Management application 11 Log back into the application 12 Make sure discovery is turned on If it is not select Discover gt On Restoring Data from CD 1 Reinstall the application For step by step instructions about installing the application refer to Installing the Application
303. nditions and link initialization D CRC See cyclic redundancy check credit See buffer to buffer credit CTP card See control processor card CUP See control unit port customer support Synonym for technical support cyclic redundancy check CRC System of error checking performed at both the sending and receiving station using the value of a particular character generated by a cyclic algorithm When the values generated at each station are identical data integrity is confirmed D DASD See direct access storage device database A collection of data with a given structure for accepting storing and providing on demand data for multiple users 1 data center A collection of servers and data storage products usually in one location administered by an information technology information services IT IS manager 302 data integrity Refers to the validity of data Data integrity can be compromised in a number of ways including human errors when data is entered errors that occur when data is transmitted from one computer to another software bugs or viruses hardware malfunctions disk crashes and natural disasters fires and floods There are many ways to minimize these threats to data integrity such as backing up data regularly controlling access to data via security mechanisms designing user interfaces that prevent the input of invalid data and using error detection and correction software when tran
304. nel to diagnose hardware or software problems D dialog box A pop up window in the user interface with informational messages or fields to be modified or completed with desired options D_ID See destination address digital transmission Information is converted to binary computer code a series of Os and 1s The information is sent in this format and then converted into its original format when it reaches its destination direct access storage device DASD 1 Generic classification for a storage peripheral that can respond directly to random requests for information Usually refers to a disk drive 2 A storage product that provides direct access to data and in which access time is independent of data location director An intelligent highly available Fibre Channel switch providing any to any port connectivity between nodes end devices on a switched fabric The director sends data transmissions data frames between nodes in accordance with the address information present in the frame headers of those transmissions disaster recovery A program that is designed to help companies get back to normal activities after a catastrophic interruption Through failover to a parallel system or by restoration of the failed system disaster recovery restores the system to its normal operating mode discovery The process by which the SAN Management application detects products in a SAN See also out of band discovery EFC
305. networking applications may include single user workstations required in demanding design engineering and audio visual applications Enterprise Fabric Connectivity Manager application See EFCM Enterprise Systems Architecture ESA A computer architecture introduced by IBM in 1988 as ESA 370 The architecture added access registers to improve virtual memory management and increase storage from 2 gigabyte to 6 terabytes The architecture was enhanced with the introduction of ESA 390 in 1990 D Enterprise Systems Connection ESCON An IBM architecture technology and set of products and services introduced in 1990 that provides a dynamically connected environment using fiber optic cables as the data transmission medium D EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Enterprise Systems Connection Director ESCON Director A device that provides connectivity capability and control for attaching any two links to each other through the ESON channel Specifically any of the hardware products provided for interconnecting IBM compatible mainframe equipment through the proprietary ESCON channel connection IBM s model numbers for ESCON directors include the 9031 and 9033 E_Port See expansion port erase To remove electrically or magnetically stored data leaving the space where the data was stored unoccupied D error detect time out value E_D_TOV The time the switch waits for an expected response before declar
306. ng Tools and or right click com mands already defined or defined by others are available for use how ever you cannot config ure new items If this privilege is removed and the Event Manage ment privilege is assigned then this message appears lt title lt Product gt Mes sage gt lt Warning gt Removing the Log Management privi lege does not remove users ability for Setup Tools in Event Manage ment You might also want to consider remov ing the Event Manage ment privilege as well lt lt OK gt gt Disables the Show Route commands on the Moni tor menu and right click menus on ports Disables the Hide Route command on the Monitor menu Read Only Enables the Setup Tools command on the Tools menu however disables the OK button Same as no privilege Read Write Enables the Setup Tools command on the Tools menu Enables all functions in the Setup Tools dialog box Enables the Show Route commands on the Moni tor menu and right click menus on ports Shutdown 280 Allows you to exit and close the server and optionally the client Disables the Shutdown command on the SAN menu Same as no privilege Enables the Shutdown command on the SAN menu EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 TABLE 56 Privilege SNMP Agent Configura tion Privileges and Application Behavior Description Allows you to configure community strings and trap recipients for the
307. ng multiple Servers may result in errors System response time slug gish when backup occurs If system response time becomes extremely sluggish check the event log direc tory lt Install_Home gt Server Universe_Home TestUniverse _Working EventStor ageProvider If it contains large log files more than 50 000 KB delete or move all except the current day s log files Using Fabric Manager or Device Manager to manage Cisco MDS9xxx switches Install JRE 1 4 or greater which includes Java Web Start Windows service does not display correctly in the Com puter Management Windows 2000 or Service Control Manager Windows NT win dow If you installed or uninstalled the Win32 service while the Computer Management or Service Control Manager window was open the service does not display Close the window and re open it to see the changes The zoning method is not supported You are trying to set zoning methods that produce invalid zones For example the application does not permit you to set a domain port or fabric address zone in an interoperable manageable fabric because it would create an invalid zone EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Appendix Editing Configuration Properties Files B In this Appendix This appendix provides instructions for updating the configuration properties file e Specifying a Host IP Address in Multi NIC N tWOrkS 1 c2 cccceeee 238 Editing
308. ng that you have enabled event notification for this user but event notification for the SAN is turned off do you want to enable event notification for the SAN Click Yes 6 Click the Filter link to specify the event types for which to send e mail notification to this user For detailed instructions refer to Filtering Event Notifications for a User on page 92 In the User ID field type a unique user name 127 character limit for the user 8 Inthe Secure Password and Retype Password fields type the user s password 127 character limit 9 Click OK to close the Add User dialog box The new user displays on the EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box 10 Click OK to save your changes and close the EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Managing Users 3 Changing a User Account NOTE You must have the User Management privilege to perform this task 1 Select SAN gt Users The EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box displays In the Users table select the user whose information you want to edit 3 Click Edit The Edit User dialog box displays 4 Edit the information as necessary Click OK to close the Edit User dialog box The edited information displays on the EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box 6 Click OK to save your changes and close the EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box Removing a User Account NOTE You must have the User Management privilege to perform this task ATTENTION Yo
309. ns chained Two directors or switches that are physically attached channel wrap test A diagnostic procedure that checks S 390 host to director or host to switch connectivity by returning the output of the host as input The test is host initiated and transmits Fibre Channel frames to a director or switch port A director or switch port enabled for channel wrapping echoes the frame back to the host Class 2 Fibre Channel service Provides a connectionless not dedicated service with notification of delivery or nondelivery between two node ports N_Ports Class 3 Fibre Channel service Provides a connectionless not dedicated service without notification of delivery or nondelivery between two node ports N_Ports Synonymous with datagram Class F Fibre Channel service Used by switches to communicate across interswitch links ISLs to configure control and coordinate a multiswitch fabric Class of Fibre Channel service Defines the level of connection dedication acknowledgment and other characteristics of a connection client A node that requests network services from a server Typically the node is a personal computer PC client server computing Architectural model that functionally divides that execution of a unit of work between activities initiated by an end user or program client and those maintaining data servers Originally thought to make mainframes obsolete EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 10006
310. nt Manager and then activate Fabric Binding within your SAN Management application the Fabric Binding is stored by the blade and appended to the current Switch Binding security policy However after carrying out the above procedure if you deactivate Fabric Binding within your SAN Management application it only deactivates on the manageable legacy Switches refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 To deactivate the policy on the Element Manager you must open the Element Manager and deactivate the policy Switch Binding is turned off when the learned fabric policy is merged To turn Switch Binding back on you must activate the policy you created within the Element Manager again Failure to perform this task can lead to a security lapse If Switch Binding is not activated within an Element Manager and Fabric Binding is activated within your SAN Management application deactivate the Fabric Binding on the Switch that uses your SAN Management application If Switch Binding is activated through an Element Manager and there is an F Port logged into the Blade that is not in the Switch Binding membership list for example an administrator command has not logged out the unwanted port then Fabric Binding cannot be activated using your SAN Management application EFC Manager Software User Manual 177 53 1000663 03 5 Configuring Fabric Binding Enabling Fabric Binding Fabric Binding is enabled through the Fabric Binding dialog box After you
311. nt N A MBW Max bandwidth Int N A TSTAMP Time stamp Varchar 128 PS_ITXW Invalid Transmitted Words Number N A PS_ICRC Number of frames received with Number N A invalid CRC PS_TIM Time Stamp Number N A ROUTERFABRIC Table TABLE 45 Field Definition Format Size NAME Name of the SAN Router fabric Varchar 255 ID ID of the SAN Router fabric Bigint 20 CLUSTERID Cluster ID of the SAN Router fabric Int 11 NICKNAME Nickname of the SAN Router fabric Varchar 255 IFCPLINKCOUNT iFCP link count of the SAN Router Int alah fabric EXPORTTIME Exported time Varchar 128 FCHALinkCount FCHA Link Count Int 11 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 E 265 E 266 In this Appendix SANROUTERSYSTEM Table TABLE 46 Field Definition Format Size IPADDRESS IP Address of the SAN Router sys Varchar 255 tem NODEWWN Node WWN of the SAN Router sys Varchar 255 tem NICKNAME Nickname of the SAN Router system Varchar 255 PORTCOUNT Port count of the SAN Router sys Int 11 tem IFCPSANID iFCP SAN ID of the SAN Router sys Bigint 11 tem CLUSTERID Cluster ID of the SAN Router system Int 11 VENDOR Vendor of the SAN Router system Varchar 255 MODEL Model of the SAN Router system Varchar 255 FIRMWARE Firmware of the SAN Router system Varchar 255 FCHALINKCOUNT iFCP link count of the SAN Router Int 11 system IFCPLINKCOUNT iFCP link count of the SAN Router Int a system DNSNAME DNS name of the SAN Router sys Varchar 255 tem LOCATION Loc
312. nt to assign the devices You can only assign a device to one call home center at a time If you do not select a call home center the selection defaults to the first call home center in the Call Home Center table If you have made a previous selection on an assigned device or filter and you do not select a call home center the selection defaults to the previous selection s call home center Click gt right arrow button The selected devices display beneath the selected call home center Devices assigned to a call home center do not display in the Products List table Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Advanced Call Home 1 Removing a Device From a Call Home Center To remove a device or multiple devices from a call home center complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays 2 Inthe Call Home Center table select the call home center from which you want to remove devices Select the devices you want to remove from the selected call home center Click lt left arrow button A confirmation message displays 5 Click OK The selected devices are removed from the call home center and display in the Products List table 6 Click OK to close the Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box Removing All Devices and Filters
313. nter a timeout value default 5 for discovery between the application and the managed products Switches and directors In the SNMP Retry field select the number of retries for discovery between the application and the managed products switches and directors Select the Apply settings to all currently defined IP addresses check box Click Apply or OK to save your work Configuring SNMP Trap Listening Settings To configure SNMP trap listening settings complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select SNMP Trap Listening In the SNMP Listening Port field enter a SNMP listening port number to assign a port to retrieve SNMP traps Click Apply or OK to save your work NOTE Changes to this option take effect after an application restart EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Managing Users 3 Configuring Support Mode Settings To configure support mode settings complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays 2 Inthe Category list select Support Modes to enable or disable support modes NOTE Only use this option when directed to by customer support Select the Client Support Mode check box to enable the support mode for the client 4 Select the Server Support Mode check box to enable the support mode for the server Click Apply or OK to save your work Managing Users When you set up users a
314. nter the address eight groups of four hexadecimal digits for the device b Inthe Prefix Length IPv6 or dual mode only field enter the prefix length for the device 8 Choose from one of the following options e Select the Enable check box if necessary to allow extended discovery support for a manageable M model device Extended discovery allows the SAN Management application to discover all devices in the same fabric as the specified device e Clear the Enable check box to disable extended discovery support 9 Select the data source for the domain e Use auto detection e Use the server e Use a specific RDC 10 If you selected Use a specific RDC enter the IP address IPv4 format only of the RDC in the IP address of RDC field 11 Optional You can generate a sequence of IP addresses which eliminates the need to add each IP address individually To do so complete the following steps NOTE You can only generate a sequence of IP addresses using the IPv4 format a Inthe Add Multiple field click the Generate a sequence of IP addresses option b Inthe Last IP field enter the last IP address in the sequence All IP addresses in a Sequence must be on the same subnet and have the same first three octets 12 Click OK on the Address Properties dialog box 13 Move the IP address to the Selected Individual Addresses area 14 Click OK on the Discover Setup dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 143 53 1000663 03
315. ntroller time necessary for a storage product to retrieve information active configuration In FICON management style the director or switch configuration that is determined by the status of the connectivity attributes active field replaceable unit Active FRU A FRU that is currently operating as the active and not the backup FRU See also backup field replaceable unit active FRU See active field replaceable unit active port address matrix In FICON management style an active port address matrix is the port address matrix that is currently active or operational on an attached director or switch active zone set A single zone set that is active in a multiswitch fabric and is created when a specific zone set is enabled This zone set is compiled by checking for undefined zones or aliases See also zone zone set 296 adapter A printed circuit assembly which transmits user data I Os between the host system s internal bus and the external Fibre Channel link and vice versa Also called an 1 0 adapter host adapter or FC adapter address 1 To refer to a product or an item of data by its address A 1 2 The location in a computer where data is stored 3 In data communication the unique code assigned to each product or computer connected to a network 4 The identifier of a location source or destination D address name Synonym for port name address resolution protocol ARP The protocol by whic
316. oaches Select a storage port icon in the topology view then select Discover gt Storage Port Mapping Right click any storage port icon in the topology view and select Storage Port Mapping Right click any storage port in the Device Tree and select Storage Port Mapping The Storage Port Mapping dialog box displays Select a storage port from the Storage Array list Click Properties The Properties dialog box displays 4 Review the properties Click OK on the Properties dialog box Click OK on the Storage Port Mapping dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 159 53 1000663 03 4 Configuring Storage Port Mapping Viewing Storage Array Properties 1 To open the Storage Port Mapping dialog box choose from one of the following approaches Select a storage port icon in the topology view then select Discover gt Storage Port Mapping Right click any storage port icon in the topology view and select Storage Port Mapping Right click any storage port in the Device Tree and select Storage Port Mapping The Storage Port Mapping dialog box displays Select a storage array from the Storage Array list 3 Click Properties The Properties dialog box displays 4 Review the properties Click OK on the Properties dialog box 6 Click OK on the Storage Port Mapping dialog box 160 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Chapter Configuring SAN Products and Fabrics 5 In this Chapter This chapte
317. ocol Link and Security thresholds which you can then assign to available objects in the tree Thresholds are prioritized using the following policies e Port List policies which have top priority are assigned to a set of port numbers on a switch and operate no matter what other policies are assigned to the switch e Port Type E Port Type F Port Type FL Port Type policies which have secondary priority apply to any port of the Port List policy e Default policies which have the lowest priority only apply to ports not governed by Port List or Port Type policies During the dynamic operation of a SAN any port could be any type For example a technician could disconnect a port from a switch and reconnect that port to a storage port or the port could change from an E Port to an F Port Therefore when calculating the Affected Ports value the SAN Management application does not look for the current port type but looks at the policy priority level in relation to the other policies currently assigned to this switch When there are two or more policies on a switch the total number of Affected Ports may be more than the total number of ports on the switch the same port may adopt different policies depending on changes in the port s port type ISL Protocol Thresholds Use ISL Protocol thresholds to block a port when one of the following ISL protocol errors meet the threshold e ISL Bouncing ISL has repeatedly become unavailable due
318. ol bridge group A bridge and the collection of products connected to it EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Glossary bridge port B_Port 1 In Fibre Channel protocol a fabric inter element port used to connect bridge products with E_Ports on a switch B_Ports provide a subset of E_Port functionality 2 Physical interface between the fabric switch and a bridge product The interface is identical to an expansion port E_Port but it does not participate in full expansion port protocols As such it does not assign domain IDs or participate in routing protocol See also expansion port fabric loop port fabric port generic port hub port node loop port node port segmented expansion port broadcast A method of sending an SNMP request for information to all the products on a subnet that uses a single special request Because of its efficiency the SAN Management application sets its default method of discovery to broadcast However a network administrator may disable this method on the network router buffer Storage area for data in transit Buffers compensate for differences in processing speeds between products buffer to buffer credit BB_Credit 1 The maximum number of receive buffers allocated to a transmitting node port N_Port or fabric port F_Port Credit represents the maximum number of outstanding frames that can be transmitted by that N_Port or F_Port without causing a buffer overrun condit
319. olumn of the Sniffer Tests table displays blank 4 Click Apply The session is stopped In the Sniffer Tests table the Action column displays blank for the selected sessions the Status column displays Stopped and the Finish Time column displays the time the session was stopped 5 Click OK EFC Manager Software User Manual 203 53 1000663 03 5 Configuring Frame Sniffer Editing a Frame Sniffer Test NOTE Frame Sniffer procedures should only be performed by advanced users and are only available with M Model manageable switches running M EOS 5 0 or higher For a list of manageable devices refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 You can edit tests that count frames passed by a switch port that meet certain criteria 1 Select Monitor gt Frame Sniffer The Frame Sniffer dialog box displays Select the test you want to edit Click Edit The Edit Test dialog box displays Figure 59 Name Test 1 Description Direction Ty v Duration 10 Seconds vY Condition Mask Value Word Offset Match String we NONE v Fav NONE v cay ky NONE z A NONE v Fav NONE v Fav NONE v cay sd NONE v Ev NONE vy Fv OK Cancel Help FIGURE 59 Edit Test Dialog Box 4 Editthe fields as desired Refer to Adding a New Frame Sniffer Test on page 201 for detailed instructions 5 Click OK Your settings are validated If no issues are found the edited test displays on the Frame Sniffer dialog box 2
320. om all other EFCM application Discover Setup dialogs The Mi10K Director will not display in the current topology if any other EFCM application is discovering the Director Broadcast request blocked by routers Resolution 1 If you know the IP addresses and the addresses are not in the Avail able Addresses pane Repeat steps 1 through 5 until all your addresses are available Select the IP addresses you would like to discover in the Available Addresses pane Click the right arrow to move your choices to the Selected Individual Addresses pane 9 Click OK Resolution 2 If you know the IP addresses and the addresses are listed in the Available Addresses pane 1 Select Discover gt Setup 2 Select the Out of Band tab 3 Select the IP addresses you would like to discover in the Available Addresses pane 4 Click the right arrow to move your choices to the Selected Individual Addresses pane 5 Click OK 1 Select Discover gt Setup 2 Select the Out of Band tab 3 Click Add 4 Enter data in the dialog box 5 Click OK 6 7 go Cannot open an Element Manager for a device Ensure that only one copy of the application is being used to monitor and manage the device Only one copy of the application should be used to monitor and man age the same devices in a subnet Cannot see HBA in Discovery Setup dialog box EFCM requires specific HBA driver levels Verify the driver levels Devices are not being
321. ome gt EFCM 9 7 8 When you receive the Restore completed message press any key to close the DOS window 9 Restart the SAN Management application 10 Log back into the application 11 Make sure discovery is turned on If it is not select Discover gt On EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Advanced Call Home 1 Configuring Advanced Call Home NOTE Advanced Call Home is supported on Windows systems for all Call Home Centers and is supported on Solaris for the SUN E mail Call Home Center NOTE Indirectly discovered switches do not display in the Products List able of the Advanced Call Home dialog box NOTE SAN routers require firmware 5 0 and higher to display in the Products List table of the Advanced Call Home dialog box Advanced Call Home notification allows you to configure the Server to automatically send an e mail or dial in to a Support center to report system problems on specified devices Switches routers and directors If you are upgrading from a previous release all of your Call Home settings are preserved Advanced Call Home supports multiple call home centers which allows you to configure different devices to contact different call home centers You can assign devices and filters to the call home centers even when the Call Home Service is not running All configuration changes take effect once the Call Home Service is started When you make any call home configuration changes or a cal
322. only allow management through a web based Element Manager and zoning An unmanaged product s icon displays as a generic icon or a grayed out icon and you cannot perform any of the above mentioned SAN management functions To obtain management capability on a device you need to add the device s IP address to your discovery setup see Adding an IP Address on page 142 If the device is still not manageable check the following e Make sure the device is not managed by another EFCM instance e Make sure you have the NMRU connection Properties dialog box Discovery Status and or Managed By fields e Make sure the device s state is operational Properties dialog box Operational Status Devices discovered through the Manager of Manager MoM feature ECCAPI which enables you to discover data from other servers in the fabric allows you to access and use the Element Manager of the attached switches view performance across fabrics and perform select management actions such as zoning Opening a Product s Element Manager You can open an Element Manager to administer manageable switches and directors directly from the application For a list of manageable products refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 Opening the Element Manager from the Interface To open an Element Manager from the user interface perform one of the following steps e On the Physical Map or Product List right click a manageable product s icon and
323. ooling fan propeller has failed two failed propellers 3 302 FAN HW A cooling fan propeller has failed 3 303 FAN HW A cooling fan propeller has failed 3 304 FAN HW A cooling fan propeller has failed 3 305 FAN HW A cooling fan propeller has failed 3 306 FAN HW A cooling fan propeller in FAN2 FRU type has failed 3 307 FAN HW A cooling fan propeller in FAN2 FRU type has failed 3 322 FAN HW Front top fan FRU failed 3 323 FAN HW Front bottom fan FRU failed 3 324 FAN HW Rear top fan FRU failed 3 400 CTP HW Power up diagnostic failure 3 411 CTP SW Firmware fault occurred 3 413 CTP HW Backup CTP power on self test failure 3 288 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 In this Appendix G TABLE58 Call Home Event Table Event Reason Code FRU Code Event Type Description Severity 414 CTP HW Backup CTP failure 3 419 CTP INFO Board NVRAM failure 3 420 CTP HW CTP non volatile memory failure 3 425 CTP HW CTP DRAM mismatch 3 427 CTP HW Utility Bus Errors detected by backup CTP 3 433 CTP SW Non recoverable Ethernet fault 3 440 CTP HW Embedded Port fatal error 3 473 CTP SW CTP shutdown due to failure 3 488 CTP HW Critical CTP failure on single CTP system 3 TABLE59 CONSRV Events Event Reason Code FRU Code Event Type Description Severity 504 DVP LIM HW EOS Port module failure 3 506 DVP PORT Fibre Channel port failure 3 509 DVP PORT Fibre Channel path failure 0 511 LIM DVP LIM SP
324. op icon The EFCM 9 7 Log In dialog box displays Figure 9 Connect to EFCM 9 0 server to open a SAN Network Address localhost v Delete Server Name DT82C7C91 User ID Administrator Password aeaeo Change Forget password Save password Setup Login Exit k i Server Available FIGURE 9 Log In Dialog Box 2 Specify a new address by typing it in the Network Address field or selecting one from the list NOTE Localhost is the default value The application automatically determines the local IP address and uses that value as the local host address The SAN Management application accepts IP addresses in IPv4 and IPv6 formats The IPv4 format is valid when the Operating System has IPv4 mode only or dual stack mode The IPv6 format is valid when the Operating System has IPv6 mode only or dual stack mode EFC Manager Software User Manual 73 53 1000663 03 74 3 Configuring a Server IPv4 addresses are normally written as four groups of three decimals For example 123 023 123 023 is a valid IPv4 address The SAN Management application accepts the following IPv4 address formats e 123 023 123 023 Complete address including leading zeros e 123 23 123 23 Compressed format with leading zeros omitted This is the default display IPv6 addresses are normally written as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits For example 2001 0db8 85a3 08d3 1319 8a2e 0370 7334 is a valid IPv6 address The SAN Management application
325. ore configuration data if the control processor CTP card ina nonredundant ED 5000 Director is removed and replaced connectivity The ability of products to link together connectivity attribute In FICON management style the characteristic that determines port address status for the director or switch See allowed connection blocked connection connectivity control dynamic connection dynamic connectivity unblocked connection connectivity capability 1 The capability that allows attachment of a product to a system without requiring physical reconfiguration of either the product or the interconnections D connectivity control In FICON management style in a director or switch the method used to change port address connectivity attributes and determine the communication capability of the link attached to the port D See also active port address matrix connectivity attribute connector Synonym for optical fiber connector console See personal computer segmented loop port 301 Glossary context menu See shortcut menu control processor card CTP card Circuit card that contains the director or switch microprocessor The CTP card also initializes hardware components of the system after power on The card may contain an RJ 45 twisted pair connector control unit port CUP An internal director or switch port on the control processor CTP card labelled FE that communicates with channels to report error co
326. oring The writing of data to pairs of drives in an array creating two exact copies of the drive contents This procedure provides a backup of data in case of a failure model The model identification assigned to a device by its manufacturer modem Modem is an abbreviation for modulator demodulator A communication device that converts digital computer data to signals and signals to computer data These signals can be received or transmitted by the modem via a phone line or other method of telecommunication ms Millisecond multimedia A simultaneous presentation of data in more than one form such as by means of both visual and audio 315 Glossary multiswitch fabric Fibre Channel fabric created by linking more than one director or fabric switching device within a fabric N name server 1 In TCP IP see domain name server 2 In Fibre Channel protocol a server that allows node ports N_Ports to register information about themselves This information allows N_Ports to discover and learn about each other by sending queries to the name server name server zoning Node port N_Port access management that allows N_Ports to communicate if and only if they belong to a common name server zone NAS See network attached storage network An arrangement of hardware software nodes and connecting branches that comprises a data communication system The International Organization for Standardization ISO seven lay
327. ort correctly You can also import nicknames from the Import dialog box for more information refer to Importing Nicknames on page 120 To import nicknames complete the following steps 1 Select Configure gt Nicknames The Configure Nicknames dialog box displays 2 Click Import The Import dialog box displays From the Import list select Nicknames 4 Inthe File Name field enter or browse to the nickname file you want to import NOTE If you have multiple devices using the same WWN the nickname associated with the WWN imports to only one of the devices 5 Optional Select one of the following options to set special handling for nicknames assigned to ports For HBA ports also apply the nickname to the HBA product For Storage ports apply one of the nicknames to the Storage product includes product types of Storage Tape and Bridge EFC Manager Software User Manual 171 53 1000663 03 5 Configuring Nicknames 6 Click OK A Warning message displays stating Importing a nickname for a WWN that already has a nickname will overwrite the existing nickname Do you want to continue Click OK to continue The file is imported and assigned 7 Click OK to close the Configure Nicknames dialog box Importing FC Aliases into Nicknames This procedure provides step by step instructions for importing Zone Alias information from a B model switch into the SAN Management application from the Configure Nick
328. otocol Default Threshold 5 w errorsper 5 W Minutes OK Cancel Help FIGURE 48 Edit ISL Threshold Dialog Box 4 Change the name for the threshold in the Name field if necessary Change the number of port events allowed for the threshold from the Threshold errors list if necessary 6 Change the time period for the threshold from the Threshold Minutes list if necessary Click OK on the Edit ISL Threshold dialog box If the threshold has already been assigned to ports an Are you sure you want to make the requested changes to this threshold on X ports message displays Click OK to close To assign this threshold to fabrics switches or switch ports refer to Assigning Thresholds on page 187 8 Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 189 53 1000663 03 5 190 Port Fencing Editing Link Thresholds To edit link thresholds complete the following steps 1 Select Configure gt Port Fencing The Port Fencing dialog box displays Select Link from the Violation Type list Click Edit The Edit Link Threshold dialog box displays Figure 49 Block a port when link level hot I O errors meet the threshold Default Link Level Policy Threshold 90 errors per 15 Y Seconds 1 to 65 535 OK Cancel Help FIGURE 49 Edit Link Threshold Dialog Box 4 Change the name for the threshold in the Name field if necessary Change the number of port events
329. ousand bits EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 kilobyte KB A unit of measure for data storage equaling 1 024 bytes or two to the tenth power Kilobytes are generally approximated as being one thousand bytes L label A discovered or user entered property value that displays below each product on the Physical Map or topology LAN See local area network laser Laser is an acronym for light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation A product that produces a very powerful narrow beam of coherent light of a single wavelength by simulating the emissions of photons from atoms molecules or ions latency Amount of time elapsed between receipt of a data transmission at a switch s incoming fabric port F_Port from the originating node port N_Port to retransmission of that data at the switch s outgoing F_Port to the destination N_Port The amount of time it takes for data transmission to pass through a switching product The time it takes for data to go from an HBA to a product s LUN and back to the HBA LCD Liquid crystal display light emitting diode LED Asemiconductor chip that emits visible or infrared light when electricity passes through it LEDs are used on switch or director field replaceable units FRUs and the front bezel to provide visual indications of hardware status or malfunctions LIN See link incident link Physical connection between two products on a switched fabric
330. out changing in persisted fabrics 196 license key installing 10 retrieving 11 upgrading 10 license update feature 285 license See license key life cycle of a SAN 54 Linux uninstalling from 22 log entries copying 219 log file location 58 log management feature 285 logging in 73 logging out 74 logs clearing 217 exporting 217 overview 58 216 viewing 216 218 loop group icon 245 loop icon 244 LUN management feature 285 LUN table for MySQL 262 331 M main window 55 managing reports 223 managing users overview 89 map area 55 map editing feature 285 map HBA to server feature 285 map loop to hub feature 285 map port to storage feature 285 master log copying from 219 filtering 218 icons 246 illustrated 58 location 58 overview 58 menu bar Edit 60 Plan 63 SAN 60 View 61 menu bar Configure 64 menu bar Discover 63 menu bar Help 66 menu bar Monitor 65 menu bar Tools 66 merging persisted fabrics 196 minimap attaching 59 detaching 59 overview 59 resizing 59 minus icon persisted fabrics 195 monitor ethernet event feature 286 Monitor menu 65 monitoring events 216 MSAN group icon 245 MySQL database setting up 115 N network attached storage icon 244 new features licensing 10 new features ordering 10 notifications configuring e mail 220 overview 220 332 0 offline icon 246 online help searching 52 opening EFCM 23 op
331. owing fields Instance Name DB2 only The DB2 instance name Host IP MySQL only The IP address where the MySQL database resides The SAN Management application accepts IP addresses in IPv4 or IPv6 formats Port MySQL only The port number used to connect to the MySQL database DB Driver The location of the database driver User ID The User ID for the database Password The Password for the database Save Password To save the database password DB Name A name for the database export Auto generated To have the application generate a database name for the database export NOTE If Auto generated is cleared without giving a database name a database name is automatically created 6 Click Apply or OK to export the files 7 Click OK at the confirmation window EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Export and Import 3 Setting Up for Exporting to a MySQL Database You can export files from the SAN Management application to a MySQL database Use these instructions to set up for exporting to a MySQL database NOTE Your MySQL account must have a password for the export feature to work correctly 1 Create a new folder on your computer 2 Download the supported version of the JDBC driver from the MySQL website http www mysql com downloads api jdbc htm to the folder you created Note the full path NOTE You must download the appropriate driver for the MySQL server version in your environment Fol
332. ox Figure 43 displays 2 Select the switches you want to add to the selected fabrics Fabric Membership List FML in the Available Switches table Click the right arrow to move the switches to the Membership List table Click OK on the Fabric Binding dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 179 53 1000663 03 5 Configuring Fabric Binding Adding Detached Devices to the Fabric Binding Membership List NOTE When performing fabric binding in an edge fabric with extended discovery disabled on all devices you must retrieve the translate domain and then enter it into the membership list You can determine the translate domain using the CLI or enabling extended discovery temporarily on any manageable M model device in the edge fabric To add a switch or SAN router that does not have physical connection and is not discovered to the fabric complete the following steps 1 Select Configure gt Fabric Binding The Fabric Binding dialog box displays 2 Click Add Detached Switch The Add Detached Product dialog box displays Select an option from the Device list If you selected Switch complete the following steps a Enter the domain ID of the switch in the Domain ID field b Enter the node WWN of the switch in the Node WWN field 5 If you selected SANRouter lt 5 0 firmware complete the following steps a Enter the R port domain ID of the SAN router in the R Port Domain ID field b Enter the R port WWN of the SAN router
333. p non Brocade SAN Router WWN Workaround None contact Brocade technical support EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 231 A In this Appendix Problem Resolution Discovery of a Blade Switch In order for EFCM to discover and manage Blade Switches the user and password may not work if the admin values must match the values in the Element Manager If the user and or pass password has been changed word values are changed within the Element Manager the settings in discovery from the default must also be changed NOTE For Blade Switches the default user is admin and default password is password To set the user and password for the Blade Switch complete the following step 1 Select Discover gt Setup The Discover Setup dialog box displays 2 Click the Out of Band tab 3 Click Add The Address Properties dialog box displays 4 Click the Product Type and Access tab 5 Select Switch from the Product Type list 6 Inthe User ID field enter a user ID 7 Inthe Password and Retype Password fields enter the password 8 Click OK on the Address Properties dialog box 9 Click OK on the Discover Setup dialog box Discovery time is excessive 1 Select SAN gt Options 2 Select the SNMP Discovery under Software Configuration 3 Decrease the value in the SNMP Timeout field 4 Select the Apply settings to all currently defined IP addresses check box 5 Click OK The symapi jar f
334. perating system Server The computer that is hosting the SAN Management application Multiple client systems can log in to the server to utilize the SAN Management application server device events Events occurring on the server or a designated device that meet criteria set by the user Server Platform Aserver platform shipped with the product or supplied by the customer for the purpose of running the SAN management and Element Manager server applications SFP transceivers See small form factor pluggable transceivers shared mode If a director or switch is in shared mode all devices on the loop share the 100MB bandwidth available on the loop In shared mode only one end device can communicate with another device through the fabric loop port FL_Port on the director or switch shortcut menu The menu that displays when you right click an icon or the background simple mail transfer protocol SMTP A transmission control protocol Internet protocol TCP IP protocol that allows the user to create send and receive text messages SMTP protocols specify how messages are passed across a link from one system to another They do not specify how the mail application accepts presents or stores the mail simple network management protocol SNMP A transmission control protocol Internet protocol TCP IP derived protocol governing network management and monitoring of network devices simple network management protocol community
335. perating system has IPv6 select the IPv6 Address option and complete the following steps a Inthe IPv6 Address field enter the return address for the server b Inthe Prefix Length field enter the prefix length Continue with step 5 5 Click Apply or OK to save your work NOTE Changes to this option take effect after an application restart Archiving Master Log Data To archive master log data complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select LogData 3 Select the Archive master log data check box The master log data is archived to the lt nstall_Home gt savelog directory NOTE Changes to this option take effect after an application restart 4 Click Apply or OK to save your work Configuring Memory Allocation Settings To configure memory allocation settings complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays 2 Inthe Category list select Memory Allocation to set the memory allocation for the server and client In the Client Memory Allocation field enter the memory allocation MB for the client In the Server Memory Allocation field enter the memory allocation MB for the server If your server has a minimum of 2 Gb RAM change the default server memory value to 1024 MB NOTE If your server is running less than 2 Gb RAM do not change the default 512 MB 5 Click Apply or OK to save your work NOTE Ch
336. perties 3 Hiding All Empty Property Fields You can hide all empty fields on any of the tabs from the Properties dialog box NOTE Not available in the Planned SAN view 1 Right click any product icon and select Properties The Properties dialog box displays Select the tab on which you want to hide a property Right click the label for the property you want to hide Select Hide All Empty All properties without any values are removed from the dialog box Showing a Property Field You can show any field you have previously hidden on any of the tabs from the Properties dialog box NOTE Not available in the Planned SAN view 1 Right click any product icon and select Properties The Properties dialog box displays 2 Select the tab on which you want to show a property Right click the label above where you want the property to show Select Show then select the property you want to display The property you selected displays beneath the label you selected Showing All Property Fields You can show all fields you have previously hidden on any of the tabs from the Properties dialog box NOTE Not available in the Planned SAN view 1 Right click any product icon and select Properties The Properties dialog box displays Select the tab on which you want to show a property Right click the label above where you want the properties to show Select Show then select All All properties in the Show list display beneath the label
337. pose such as implementing the lower layer Fibre Channel protocol FC O They are particularly suited to sending video and audio information as well as text ASICs differ from general purpose products such as memory chips or microprocessors arbitrated loop One of the three connection topologies offered by Fibre Channel protocol Up to 126 node ports and one fabric port can communicate without the need for a separate switched fabric arbitrated loop physical address AL_PA A 1 byte value used in the arbitrated loop topology that identifies loop ports L_Ports This value then becomes the last byte of the address identified for each public L_Port on the loop arbitration Process of selecting one product from a collection of products that request service simultaneously archive 1 To copy files to a long term storage medium for backup 2 Removing data usually old or inactive files from a system and permanently storing the data on removable media to reclaim system hard disk space area The second byte of the node port N_Port identifier ARP See address resolution protocol array Two or more disk drives connected to a host and connected and configured such that the host perceives the disk drives to be one disk ASCII See American National Standard Code for Information Interchange ASIC See application specific integrated circuit 297 Glossary attribute In FICON management style the connection status
338. posed to computer programs or software hardware management console The console runs the Hardware Management console application HWMCA and is the operations and management personal computer PC platform for S 390 and z Series servers HBA See host bus adapter heterogeneous fabric A fabric containing open fabric compliant products from various vendors Contrast with homogeneous fabric hexadecimal A numbering system with base of sixteen valid numbers use the digits O through 9 and characters A through F where A represents 10 and F represents 15 D homogeneous fabric A fabric consisting of only one vendor s products Contrast with heterogeneous fabric hop 1 Data transfer from one node to another node 2 Describes the number of switches that handle a data frame from its origination point through it s destination point hop count The number of hops a unit of information traverses in a fabric host The computer that other computers and peripherals connect to host bus adapter HBA Logic card that provides a link between the server and storage subsystem and that integrates the operating systems and I O protocols to ensure interoperability 310 host group The collection of HBAs and NASs in a fabric discovered by the SAN Management application Host groups display with a yellow background on the Physical Map host processor 1 A processor that controls all or part of a user application network
339. public loop is connected to a switched fabric through the switch bridge port B_Port and the switch has an active embedded fabric loop port FL_Port that is user transparent All devices attached to the loop can communicate with each other and public devices attached to the loop can communicate with fabric attached devices pull down menu See drop down menu R RAID See redundant array of independent disks RAM See random access memory R_A_TOV See resource allocation time out value random access memory RAM A group of computer memory locations that is numerically identified to allow high speed access by the controlling microprocessor A memory location is randomly accessed by referring to its numerical identifier D Contrast with read only memory 319 Glossary read only memory ROM An information storage chip with permanent memory Stored information cannot be changed or deleted except under special circumstances D Contrast with random access memory redundancy Performance characteristic of a system or product whose integral components are backed up by identical components to which operations automatically failover in the event of a component failure Redundancy is a vital characteristic of virtually all high availability 24 hours 7 days per week computer systems and networks redundant array of independent disks RAID Grouping of hard drives in a single system to provide greater performance and da
340. r Privileges provides supplemental information about user privileges and access levels Appendix G Advanced Call Home Event Tables provides supplemental information about the specific events that display when using Advanced Call Home Appendix H B Model Considerations provides supplemental information about the specific considerations you need to know when using B model devices The Glossary defines terms abbreviations and acronyms used in this manual An Index is also provided Supported Hardware and Software This document supports the following platforms All B model switches and directors All M model switches directors and SAN routers FOS 5 3 or later M EOS and M EOSn 9 7 In those instances in which procedures or parts of procedures documented here apply to some switches but not to others this guide identifies exactly which switches are supported and which are not Although many different software and hardware configurations are tested and supported by Brocade Communications Systems Inc documenting all possible configurations and scenarios is beyond the scope of this document What s New in This Document The following changes have been made since this document was last released Information that was added Pv6 address support Information that was changed Technical Edits Information that was removed None For further information refer to the release notes xvi EFC Manager Softwa
341. r provides instructions for configuring and managing products and fabrics set threshold limits on the number of specific port events send SNMP trap reports to other computers count frames passed by a switch port and configure SNMP trap agent Managing ProductS ssec ccc0ccecew ce eee deed tini et eee ae ne ee rE 162 e Configuring NicknaMeS 0 ce eee 167 e Configuring Enterprise Fabric Mode 000 enana eee eee 174 e Configuring Fabric Binding 0 00 eee eee 176 PORUFENCING agteraan e Alacer e ayhcectarit ch ES 182 e Persisting and Unpersisting Fabrics and Switch Groups 194 e Configuring Trap Forwarding 0000 c eects 197 e Configuring Frame Sniffer 0 eee eee 199 e Configuring the SNMP Agent 0 00 c cece eee eee eee 207 EFC Manager Software User Manual 161 53 1000663 03 5 Managing Products Managing Products You can use the application to manage discovered products You can search for a product change its properties and perform other configuration and maintenance tasks Determining Whether a Product is Being Managed Managed devices are managed through MPI and allow you to perform numerous SAN management functions Such as management through an Element Manager zoning fabric binding enterprise fabric mode and show route A managed product s icon displays as a Brocade icon as shown in the Icon Legend see Icon Legend on page 243 Blade Switches
342. rantees the last 10 minutes of data entry Do not enter any data into the application 10 minutes prior to shutdown To close the SAN Management Client select SAN gt Exit To close the SAN Management Client and Server select SAN gt Shutdown EFC Manager Software User Manual 51 53 1000663 03 1 Using the Documentation Using the Documentation The SAN Management application ships documentation in both PDF format and Online Help The PDF documentation is shipped on a separate documentation CD ROM The Online Help system is part of the SAN Management application and allows you to search all topics to find a particular word or phrase You can also print help topics as needed Searching the Online Help To find all the help topics that contain a particular word or phrase follow these steps 1 On the Help window click the tab with the magnifying glass icon 2 Inthe Find field enter the word or phrase for which you want to search 3 Press Enter If any matches are found a list of topics displays in the panel The number of times the word or phrase occurs in the topic displays next to the name Click the name to display that topic Printing an Online Help Topic To print a help topic follow these steps 1 On the Help window click the print icon The Print dialog box displays 2 Select your printer settings and click OK 52 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Chapter Software Overview 2 In this Ch
343. raph Enables entire Perfor mance submenu off the Monitor menu and the right click Performance Graph s command on ports and switch prod ucts Enables changes to the Performance Setup dialog box Allows you to open the Performance Graphs dia log box and enables all controls Enables all functions on the individual port dialog box double click a graph Persist Fabric Allows you to define the current devices and con nections present in a fab ric as a baseline and to highlight any changes to that baseline Disables the Persist Fab ric Unpersist Fabric and Unpersist Product com mands on the Monitor menu and right click menus of Fabrics and Products Allows you to see the persistence dis plays Same as no privilege Enables the Persist Fab ric Unpersist Fabric and Unpersist Product com mands on the Monitor menu and right click menus of Fabrics and Products Planning Allows you to display and edit a planning desktop EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Disables the Planned SAN button on the main tool bar the New Open Save and Save As Plan com mands in the SAN menu and the Planned SAN command on the View menu Enables the Open Plan command in the SAN menu which allows you to display a SAN Plan Enables the Planned SAN button on the main tool bar and the New Open Save and Save As Plan commands in the SAN menu and the Planned SAN command on the View
344. re User Manual 53 1000663 03 Document conventions Document conventions This section describes text formatting conventions and important notices formats Text formatting The narrative text formatting conventions that are used in this document are as follows bold text Identifies command names Identifies the names of user manipulated GUI elements Identifies keywords and operands Identifies text to enter at the GUI or CLI italic text Provides emphasis Identifies variables Identifies paths and Internet addresses Identifies document titles code text Identifies CLI output Identifies syntax examples For readability command names in the narrative portions of this guide are presented in mixed lettercase for example switchShow In actual examples command lettercase is often all lowercase Otherwise this manual specifically notes those cases in which a command is case sensitive Notes cautions and warnings The following notices and statements are used in this manual They are listed below in order of increasing severity of potential hazards NOTE A note provides a tip guidance or advice emphasizes important information or provides a reference to related information ATTENTION An Attention statement indicates potential damage to hardware or data A CAUTION A A Caution statement alerts you to situations that can be potentially hazardous to you DANGER A Danger statement indicates conditions or situations t
345. red on a medium such as tape or even paper that is not available immediately to the user offline sequence OLS 1 Sequence sent by the transmitting port to indicate that it is attempting to initialize a link and has detected a problem in doing so 2 Sequence sent by the transmitting port to indicate that it is offline offline state When the switch or director is in the offline state all the installed ports are offline The ports transmit an offline sequence OLS and they cannot accept a login got connection from an attached device Contrast with online state OLS See offline sequence online Referring to data stored on the system so it is available immediately to the user online diagnostics Diagnostics that can be run by the customer engineer while the operational software is running These diagnostics do not impact user operations EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Glossary online state When the switch or director is in the online state all of the unblocked ports are allowed to log in to the fabric and begin communicating Devices can connect to the switch or director if the port is not blocked and can communicate with another attached device if both devices are in the same zone or if the default zone is enabled Contrast with offline state Open Systems Architecture OSI A model that represents a network as a hierarchical structure of functional layers Each layer provides a set of functions
346. reshold Authentication Fabric Binding Switch Binding gt Port Binding lt ISL Security lt N Port Connection Not Allowed Name Threshold 5 w errorsper 5 W Minutes OK Cancel Help FIGURE 47 Add Security Threshold Dialog Box 4 Enter a name for the threshold in the Name field 5 Select the number of port events allowed for the threshold from the Threshold errors list 6 Select the time limit for the threshold from the Threshold Minutes list 7 Click OK to add the Security threshold to the table and close the Add Security Threshold dialog box To assign this threshold to fabrics switches or switch ports refer to Assigning Thresholds on page 187 8 Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box 186 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Port Fencing 5 Assigning Thresholds You can assign thresholds to any active object in the Ports table If you assign a threshold to a switch director or fabric object or to the All Fabrics object the threshold is assigned to all subordinate objects which do not have a directly assigned threshold in the tree However if an object inherits a threshold from another object above it in the hierarchy you cannot remove that inherited threshold directly from the subordinate object You must either remove the threshold from the higher object to which it was directly assigned or directly assign a different threshold to the subordinate object To assign an existing thr
347. rformance Data_Admi Coe A Ly Port Usage_Administratc D Product List_Administrat D Storage Device Summar Switch Group 1000080088041 CEE Switch Count 1 m z N Le roa FIGURE 72 View Reports Dialog Box 2 Select the report you want to view in the left pane of the dialog box If you do not see the report you want to view generate it first by following the instructions in Generating Reports on page 224 Product List Operating Status Change Performance Data Connectivity Map Port Usage Fabric Ports Storage Device Summary LUN Masking Summary Departmental Storage Allocation NOTE Hyperlinks in reports are active only as long as the source data is available 3 To view the report in your Web browser window click Show in Browser The selected report displays in your default Web browser 4 Click the Close button in the Web browser to close EFC Manager Software User Manual 225 53 1000663 03 6 Creating Reports Printing Reports You can print reports through an internet browser Reports are stored in lt Install_Home gt Server Reports 1 Select Monitor gt Reports gt View The View Reports dialog box displays Select the report you want to view in the left pane of the dialog box If you do not see the report you want to view generate it first by following the instructions in Generating Reports on page 224 NOTE Hyperlinks in reports are active only as long as the source data is
348. ric Binding Membership 181 Port Fencing nesese vee ee bee ee bee pa ee ee EA 182 Thresholds i fas peed Wide whe bi Wie dane 183 Adding ThresholdS 00 c cece eee eee eee 184 Assigning Thresholds 0 0 00 c eee eee eee eee 187 Turning Off Port Fencing Inheritance 188 Editing Thresholds 0 0 0 0 cece eee 189 Finding Assigned Thresholds 00 e eee ee eee 191 Viewing Thresholds 000 eee eee eee eee 192 Removing Thresholds 00 c eee eee eee eee ee 192 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Persisting and Unpersisting Fabrics and Switch Groups 194 Persisting a Fabric or Switch Group 020e 0 eee 194 Unpersisting a Fabric or Switch Group 0005 194 Unpersisting a Single Product 000 nannan 194 Graphic Indicators Related to Persisted Fabrics 195 Merging Persisted FabricS 0 0c cece e eens 196 Splitting Persisted FabricS 0 0 0 0 eee 196 Layout Changes in Persisted FabricS 4 196 Finding Devices in a Persisted Fabric 4 197 Configuring Trap Forwarding 0 000 nananana nenn 197 Configuring Trap Forwarding 000 cece eee eee 197 Adding Trap Recipients 000 ccc eee eee eee 198 Removing Trap Recipients 0000 eee eee eee 198 Configuring Frame Sniffer 0 2000 c cece ee eee 199 Frame Sniffer Requirements
349. ric attachment product list The list of SAN products groups and ports which displays on the left hand side of the main window in the application product name User configurable identifier assigned to a managed product Typically this name is stored on the product itself A director or switch product name can also be accessed by a simple network management protocol SNMP manager as the system name prohibited port connection In a director or switch in FICON management style an attribute that removes dynamic connectivity capability EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Glossary protocol 1 Set of semantic and syntactic rules that determines the behavior of functional units in achieving communication 2 In systems network architecture the meanings of and sequencing rules for requests and responses for managing the network transferring data and synchronizing network component states 3 A specification for the format and relative timing of data exchanged between communicating devices D public device A loop device that can transmit a fabric login command FLOGI to a switch receive acknowledgement from the switch s login server register with the switch s name server and communicate with fabric attached devices Public devices communicate with fabric attached devices through the switch s bridge port B_Port connection to a director or switch Contrast with private device public loop A
350. rise Fabric Mode on the switch but not the rest of the fabric Disabled switches segment from the fabric Fabric Binding is disabled through the Fabric Binding dialog box NOTE Fabric Binding is only supported on B model FOS level 6 0 or higher and M model manageable switches and fabrics For a list of manageable devices refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 1 Select Configure gt Fabric Binding The Fabric Binding dialog box displays 2 Inthe Fabric List table clear the Enable Disable check box for fabrics for which you want to disable fabric binding 3 Click OK Adding Switches to the Fabric Binding Membership List Once you have enabled Fabric Binding refer to Enabling Fabric Binding on page 178 you can add switches to the fabric binding membership list NOTE Fabric Binding is only supported on B model FOS level 6 0 or higher and M model manageable switches and fabrics For a list of manageable devices refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 NOTE When performing fabric binding in an edge fabric with extended discovery disabled on all devices you must retrieve the translate domain and then enter it into the membership list You can determine the translate domain using the CLI or enabling extended discovery temporarily on any manageable M model device in the edge fabric To add a switch to the fabric complete the following steps 1 Select Configure gt Fabric Binding The Fabric Binding dialog b
351. roblem persists contact Customer Support Retry the command or action If the problem persists contact Customer Support CSV data imported incor rectly When entering information directly into a CSV file make sure you only use com mas to separate attributes For example if you enter 1000080088520000 Bro cade Communications Systems Inc v2 4 1 123 into a CSV file for Node Name Vendor and Firmware 1000080088520000 displays as the Node Name Brocade Communications Systems displays as the Vendor Inc displays as the Firmware and v2 4 1c 123 does not display EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Problem Data and settings not imported during installation In this Appendix A Resolution Open an MS DOS window and enter the following script at the command line Install_Service lt startstatus gt lt runnow gt where startstatus parameter is manual or auto and runnow parameter is true or false Error occurs when trying to delete a nickname Once assigned a nickname cannot be deleted and left blank An indirectly connected device does not display Make sure you have the SANtegrity Authentication PFE key enabled An indirectly discovered IBM host displays as a storage device Make sure you enter all IP addresses in Discovery to view proper device icons in the topology Mapping a loop to a hub causes the loop group and the outermost portion of the topology s backgrou
352. rs dialog box Use to configure users user groups and permissions 2 Export Displays the Export Discovered SAN dialog box Use to export files from a discovered SAN 3 Properties Displays the Properties dialog box of the selected device Use to view or edit device properties 4 Launch Element Manager Launches the element manager of the selected device Use to configure a device through its element manager Discover Setup Displays the Discover Setup dialog box Use to configure discovery 6 Zoning Displays the Zoning dialog box Use to configure zoning Persist Fabric Select to take a snapshot of the current products and connections in the fabric as a reference point for comparison to future fabric changes Discovered SAN Displays the Discovered SAN view when selected from the Planning SAN view Planned SAN Displays the Planning SAN view when selected from the Discovered SAN view Use to plan a SAN 10 View Utilization Displays or hides the utilization legend 11 View Report Displays the View Reports dialog box Use to view available reports 12 Domain ID Port Use to set the dutchman ID or port number to display as decimal or hex in the physical map 13 Product Label Use to set the product label for the devices in the physical map 14 Port Label Use to set the port label for the devices in the physical map 15 Search Use to search for a device on the physical map and product list 16 Help Displays
353. rting Log Data You can export the SAN Management application log data in tab delimited format This feature is useful for providing the data to a third party or including it in a report To export log data complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Logs gt lt og_type gt The View Logs dialog box displays the log for the fabric you selected 2 Click Export The Save lt og_type gt Log as dialog box displays 3 Browse to the folder where you want to save the file and enter a file name in the File Name field 4 Click Save The file is exported in tab delimited format To view it in table format open the file in Microsoft Excel EFC Manager Software User Manual 217 53 1000663 03 6 Event Monitoring Deleting Group Logs To delete a group log complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Logs gt Group The Group Logs dialog box displays 2 Select the log you want to delete from the Group Name list Click Delete Log Click Close Viewing the Fabric Log You can view persisted fabric data through the Fabric Log dialog box For more details on the Fabric Log refer to Event Monitoring on page 216 To display the Fabric Log 1 Selecta persisted fabric in the Connectivity Map or Product List 2 Select Monitor gt Logs gt Fabric Log The Fabric Log dialog box displays 3 Click Close Filtering Events in the Master Log You can filter the events that display in the Master Log on the ma
354. ructure and secured from or disconnected from the global Internet 1 0 See input output IOPS Input output operations per second IP See Internet protocol IP address See Internet protocol address IS See information services IPL See initial program load IPL configuration See initial program load configuration ISL See interswitch link ISL hop Interswitch link hop See hop 312 isolated E_Port Isolated expansion port isolated expansion port Isolated E_Port isolated group A collection of isolated devices not connected to the SAN but discovered by the SAN Management application The isolated group displays with a gray background near the bottom of the Physical Map IT See information technology J Java An object oriented programming language derived from C that produces code that is platform independent Developed by Sun Microsystems designed for distribution and distributable applications development Java applications require a program called the Java Virtual Machine JVM to execute JVMs have been developed for many of the mainstream platforms and operating systems JBOD See just a bunch of disks just a bunch of disks JBOD Refers to a rack of disks without data redundancy or striping K Kb See kilobit KB See kilobyte kilobit Kb A unit of measure for data storage equaling 1 024 bits or two to the tenth power Kilobits are generally approximated as being one th
355. ry is not accepted 4 Click Add The new device displays in the table 5 Click OK to close the Configure Nicknames dialog box 170 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Nicknames 5 Importing Nicknames This procedure provides step by step instructions for importing nicknames from the Configure Nicknames dialog box If you need to add single or a double quotation mark to a nickname you must edit the lt Nickname gt csv file using a text editor such as Notepad However by adding single or double quotation marks to the lt Nickname gt csv file in an editor other than a text editor the quotation marks will not display correctly in the SAN Management application NOTE If you add only double quotation marks to a nickname the SAN management application displays the nickname with two double quotation marks If you add only single quotation marks the nickname is displayed as only single quotation marks If you combine single quotation marks with double quotation marks however the application displays the nickname with two single quotation marks NOTE The format of the nickname export file changed in EFCM 9 1 therefore when importing SANavigator or EFCM 8 X or earlier nickname export files and an EFCM 9 1 or later nickname export file you must import the files separately NOTE Do not copy contents from the old export nickname format to the new export nickname format the nicknames will not imp
356. s NOTE On Linux systems you must use CTRL BACKSPACE to delete text in the Telnet session window EFC Manager Software User Manual 127 53 1000663 03 3 128 Accessing Third Party Tools Launching an Element Manager Element Managers are used to manage Brocade Fibre Channel switches and directors You can open a device s Element Manager directly from the application On the Physical Map right click the Brocade device you want to manage and select Element Manager The Element Manager displays Blade Switch Element Manager Requirements The following requirements must be met to allow a Blade Switch Element Manager to be launched from EFCM e The firmware must be EOS q 5 2 2 or greater e The Switch Licensed for EFCM capability feature must be enabled on the Blade Switch e The WWN must be set to 080088 in the Vendor ID field on the Features dialog box in the Blade Switch Element Manager The following SNMP Sys OIDs are not configurable on the Blade Switch but can be configured within EFCM These are the default SNMP Sys OIDs which allow the Blade Switch to be identified as a Blade Switch 1 3 6 1 4 1 1663 1 1 1 1 21 Brocade 1 3 6 1 4 1 1663 1 1 1 1 29 Brocade 1 3 6 1 4 1 1663 1 1 1 1 37 Brocade 1 3 6 1 4 1 1663 1 1 1 1 38 Brocade 1 3 6 1 4 1 1663 1 1 1 1 39 Brocade 1 3 6 1 4 1 1663 1 1 1 1 40 Brocade 1 3 6 1 4 1 1663 1 1 1 1 41 Brocade Launching Web Tools Use Brocade Web Tools to enable
357. s The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select Client Export Port to assign a communications port between the client and server In the Client Export Port field enter the client export port number to set a fixed port number for the client Click Apply or OK to save your work NOTE Changes to this option take effect after an application restart Configuring Element Management Settings To configure element management settings complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select Software Configuration Select Element Management Choose one of the following options e Select the SNMP and management discovery option to allow discovery and monitoring by this server and not allow element management capability from other servers e Select the SNMP Discovery Only option to allow discovery and monitoring without overriding the element management capability from another server Click Apply or OK to save your work NOTE Changes to this option take effect after an application restart EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuration Options 3 Configuring IP Configuration Settings To configure the IP address and subnet mask to override the default Ethernet ports used by the server for client server communications complete the following steps The SAN Management application enables you to run your server in dual mode which allo
358. s 3 6 To set the connections to display on flyover click the Connection tab and complete the following steps a Inthe Available Properties table select all the products you want to display b Click the right arrow to move the selected products to the Selected Properties table c Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the products in the Selected Properties table Items in the Selected Properties table appear in the flyover display 7 Click Apply or OK to save your work Configuring FTP Server Settings In EFCM 9 7 a built in FTP server and its services are installed during installation Other FTP servers on your system are recognized by the application as external FTP servers For Windows systems the built in FTP server is the default configuration and installation starts the FTP service if port 21 is not used by any other FTP server For UNIX systems the external FTP server is the default Note that when uninstalling the application the built in FTP server is removed with all other services even if the FTP service is used by firmware upgrade or supportsave features To configure the FTP server settings complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays 2 Inthe Category list select FTP 3 Choose one of the following options e Select the Use built in FTP Server option to use the default built in FTP server a b Cc In the FTP User Name and Password lis
359. s LUN and back to the HBA e Switch Graphs Select to monitor a switch s performance through a performance graph which displays transmit and receive data The graphs show persisted data e View Utilization Select to display the connection utilization e Event Notification Select to configure the SAN Management application to send event notifications at specified time intervals e E mail Select to configure the SAN Management application to send event notifications through e mail e Advanced Call Home Select to configure the SAN Management Server to automatically dial in to a Support center to report system problems e SNMP Agent Select to configure the SAN Management application to act as a translator of information stored on the Server into a form usable by SNMP management stations On Select to turn on SNMP Agent e Off Select to turn off SNMP Agent e Setup Select to configure community strings and trap recipients e Ethernet Event Select to configure the application to send notification of Ethernet events e Trap Forwarding Select to configure the SAN Management application to send SNMP traps to other computers e Frame Sniffer Select to configure the SAN Management application to count frames passed by a switch port that meet user specified criteria e Reports Select to generate reports about the SAN Generate Select to determine witch reports to run View Select to view reports through the application or throug
360. s been assigned by the principal switch and that a switch is currently using domain name server In transmission control protocol Internet protocol TCP IP a server program that supplies name to address translation by mapping domain name to internet addresses D DOS See disk operating system 303 Glossary drop down menu A menu that appears when a heading in a navigation bar is clicked on with the mouse The objects that appear in the drop down menus are organize by their headings in the navigation bar dump The file that is created when the director detects a software fault It contains various data fields that when extracted assist in the debugging of software dynamic connection A connection between two ports established or removed by the directors and that when active appears as one continuous link See connectivity attribute See also allowed connection blocked connection dynamic connectivity unblocked connection dynamic connectivity The capability that allows connections to be established and removed at any time dynamic random access memory DRAM Random access memory that resides in a cell comprised of a capacitor and transistor DRAM data deteriorates that is is dynamic unless the capacitor is periodically recharged by the controlling microprocessor DRAM is slow but relatively inexpensive D Contrast with static random access memory E EFCM Enterprise Fabric Connectivity Manager appl
361. s changed EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Backing Up and Restoring Data 1 Restoring Data NOTE You cannot restore data from a previous version of the SAN Management application The backed up data is contained in the following directories e lt install_Home gt Call Home e lt install_Home gt Client e lt linstall_Home gt Resources e lt linstall_Home gt Server NOTE lt lnstall_Home gt refers to the directory where the SAN Management application is installed In a disaster recovery situation it is possible that configuration changes made less than 45 minutes before Server loss depending on the backup interval you set could be missing from the backup The data in those directories is automatically backed up and can be restored from your disk network folder or CD The data includes the following items All log files All plans saved through the Planning function All reports generated Application configuration data Backup configuration Call home configuration including phone numbers and dialing options Note that call home information may be different depending on which call home centers you use Call home Enabled status of each call home center Call home mapping between call home centers and devices Call home mapping between devices and assigned event filters License information Performance data User defined sounds User launched scripts Zoning library all zones sets a
362. s for exporting to database refer to Exporting Data to a Database on page 113 1 Select SAN gt Export The Export Discovered SAN dialog box displays a list of file types that can be exported and their sizes Figure 21 Se i Select All Unselect All Files SAN file 15KB _ Master log 1KB Connectivity map 16 KB Connectivity XML Product list 2KB L Reports OKB Nicknames OKB C Status Zone set activation history OKB Total Export To c Program Files EFCM 9 6 Client Dataisan0709251 40800 Browse f OK Cancel Apply Help FIGURE21 Export Discovered SAN dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 109 3 110 Export and Import 2 In the Export To list select one of the following options Disk Saves the exported zip files to a user specified directory E mail Mails the exported files as an e mail attachment NOTE Connectivity XML cannot be exported to e mail To export to both Disk and E mail at the same time complete steps 2 through 5 as needed for each option Select the types of files you want to export NOTE Some file types may not be available based on the export destination you selected in the previous step Click Select All to select all check boxes or click Unselect All to clear all check boxes SAN Files Exports the SAN files Performance Data Exports the performance data Performance Monitoring is a feature of the Advanced Module which is an Enterprise Edition only op
363. s found If the server was not found verify that the server address was entered correctly and that the server is running If you are using an SMTP mail server also verify that the SMTP Port SMTP ID and SMTP Password information was entered correctly 11 To specify which users receive e mail notification click User List The EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box displays a Select the Filter check box in the E mail column for each user b Click OK on the EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box 12 Click OK on the E mail Event Notification Setup dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 221 53 1000663 03 6 Using Event Notification Features Enabling Ethernet Events NOTE This feature is only available for manageable switches For a list of manageable products refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 An Ethernet event occurs when the Ethernet link between the Server and the managed product is lost You can configure the application to send notification of Ethernet events 1 Select Monitor gt Ethernet Event The Configure Ethernet Event dialog box displays Figure 70 Enable Ethernet Event Ethernet Time Out minutes 10 120 OK Cancel Help FIGURE 70 Configure Ethernet Event Dialog Box 2 Select Enable Ethernet Event to be notified when the Ethernet link between the Server and the managed product is lost 3 Inthe Ethernet Time Out field enter the number of minutes the application should wait before notifying you of
364. s separators so trim leading or trailing spaces unless you want to import them as part of the data For step by step instructions about importing Server HBA mappings refer to Importing Server HBA Mappings on page 121 e Storage Port Mappings csv Imports Storage Port Mappings into the existing Fabric Map The general format for this import is in CSV ASCII format The first row contains the header for the file which does not effect the import process however text must be present The first two fields must be the World Wide Port Name WWPN then the Storage Array Nickname If either of these fields WWPN or Storage Array Nickname have no text in them the Storage Port Mapping entry is considered null and is not imported All additional fields are ignored during the import process The format is space sensitive only commas are used as separators so trim leading or trailing spaces unless you want to import them as part of the data For step by step instructions about importing storage port mappings refer to Importing Storage Port Mappings on page 121 e Zone set activation history Imports zone set files in zip format The imported Zone set activation history files are stored in lt nstall_Home gt Server Data Zoningsets Allows you to import the zone set activation history into another Server s zone set library or to a different zone set library on the current server For step by step instructions about importing the zone set acti
365. s the name of the product Nickname Displays the nickname of the product This field is editable at the fabric group and device level Node WWN Displays the node world wide name of the product Operational State Displays the operational state of the port Operational Status Displays the operational status of the product OS Displays the operating system running on the product OS Device Name Displays the device name of the operating system Port Displays the number of the port Port Count Displays the number of ports on the product Port Name Displays the name of the port Port Nickname Displays any nickname for the port This field is editable at the port level Port State Displays the state of the port online or offline Port Type Displays the type of port for example expansion port node port or NL port Port WWN Displays the world wide name of the port Receive Utilization Displays the receive percentage utilization of the port Serial Displays the serial number of the product This field is editable at the device level Speed Configured Gbps Displays the actual speed of the port in Gb s Speed Supported Gbps Displays the supported speed of the port in Gb s State Displays the port state Supported FC4 Types Displays the Fibre Channel 4 types supported by the port Tag Displays the tag number of the product Text 1 4 Displays user entered information EFCM 8 x Transmit Utilization D
366. s to which that an event filter is assigned complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt Event Notification gt Advanced Call Home The Advanced Call Home Configuration dialog box displays 2 Inthe Call Home Event Filters table select the event filter you want to find Click gt find button All instances of the event filter are highlighted in the Call Home Centers table If the selected event filter is not assigned to any devices in the call home centers table a not found message displays Miscellaneous If a web server is running on the PC such as IIS then the default embedded http server port needs to be configured for another port by adding the following property to the lt Install_Home gt resources server Config properties file Smp server httpserverport lt port number gt Multiple Network Interface Cards Asecond Ethernet NIC card may be desirable in the PC to isolate the switches in your SAN from the public network If there are any connection issues with the dual NICs modify the configuration file lt Install_Home gt resources Server config properties to force the server to look at a specific IP address To force the server to look at a specific IP address add the following parameter to the file ServerRmlpAddress xxx xXxx XXX XXX where XXX XXX XXX XXX is the IP of the NIC card on which you want the client connections to come in Closing the Application NOTE Only a controlled application shutdown gua
367. save your edits and close the dialog box Click OK to save your changes and close the EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box 96 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Managing User Groups 3 Removing a User Group NOTE You must have the User Management privilege to perform this task ATTENTION You are not prompted for confirmation before the user s account is removed If users are logged in when you remove their accounts they are immediately logged out You can remove a user group regardless of whether a user is assigned to the group 1 Select SAN gt Users The EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box displays 2 Inthe Groups list select the group you want to remove Click Remove Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 97 53 1000663 03 98 3 Managing User Groups Assigning Users to Groups NOTE You must have the User Management privilege to perform this task You can assign users to groups to assign them permissions for features and topology views If you assign one user to multiple groups the user has the user rights specified in all the groups NOTE If users are logged in when you reassign their group they are not affected until they log out and try to log in again 1 Select SAN gt Users The EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box displays Figure 17 Users Groups f of ID Description Email Address Email w System Administrator ar Security Admin
368. sented as Storage Devices Using the Storage Port Mapping dialog you cannot change the device type to an HBA JBOD and so on However once a device has been identified as type Storage with ports assigned you can no longer change its type EFC Manager Software User Manual 155 53 1000663 03 4 Configuring Storage Port Mapping Adding Storage Ports to a Storage Array 1 To open the Storage Port Mapping dialog box choose from one of the following steps Select a storage port icon in the topology view then select Discover gt Storage Port Mapping Right click any storage port icon in the topology view and select Storage Port Mapping Right click any storage port in the Device Tree and select Storage Port Mapping The Storage Port Mapping dialog box Figure 34 displays Create storage arroys ons ossign ports Storage Ports Storage Array Port Namecrnyen Port Nickname Node Namecrwinny Node Nickname Pota Node V E Wi New Soraga Array I x Merosystons Wi Crete td Dome Properties LETI T FIGURE 34 Storage Port Mapping Dialog Box 2 Select a storage port from the Storage Ports table To select more than one port hold down the CTRL key while selecting multiple storage ports A storage array in the Storage Array list is highlighted 3 Click the right arrow The selected storage port is added to the Storage Array 4 Click OK Removing Storage Port and Storage Array Associations 1 To open th
369. seseess 234 Problems with Addresses Problem Resolution No subnets or addresses 1 Select Discover gt Setup selected 2 Select the Out of Band tab 3 Click on the subnet or individual address you would like to discover in the Available Addresses pane 4 Click the appropriate right arrow to move your choice to the Selected Subnets pane or to the Selected Individual Addresses pane 5 Click OK Wrong IP addresses selected 1 Select Discover gt Setup Select the Out of Band tab Verify that the IP addresses in the Selected Subnets and Selected Individual Addresses panes are the correct current addresses for the SAN Click OK W N P Wrong community strings are selected Select Discover gt Setup Select the Out of Band tab Select an IP address Click Change Select the desired community strings Click OK OoaRWNE EFC Manager Software User Manual 229 53 1000663 03 A In this Appendix Problems with Discovery 230 Problem An indirectly discovered device does not display cor rectly for example a NPIV host displays as a loop of HBAs Resolution Make sure you enter all IP addresses in Discovery to view proper device icons in the topology Attempting to discover an Mi10K Director displays Too many sessions and No response statuses Verify that no other EFCM application is currently discovering the Mi1OK Director Remove the Mi10K Director IP Address fr
370. smitting data data recovery Salvaging data stored on damaged media such as magnetic disks and tapes There are a number of software products that can help recover data damaged by a disk crash or virus Of course not all data is recoverable but data recovery specialists can often restore a surprisingly high percentage of the data on damaged media datagram Synonym for Class 3 Fibre Channel service default Pertaining to an attribute value or option that is assumed by a system when none is explicitly specified D I default zone A zone that contains all attached products that are not members of a separate active zone destination A point or location such as a processor director or switch or server to which data is transmitted D destination address D_ID An address identifier that indicates the targeted destination of a data frame device 1 Product connected to a managed director or switch See also node 2 Mechanical electrical or electronic hardware with a specific purpose D device number In a channel subsystem four hexadecimal digits that uniquely identify an I O product D EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 device type Identifier used to place products in the Physical Map i e switch hub storage etc diagnostics 1 The process of investigating the cause or nature of a problem in a product or system 2 Procedures or tests used by computer users and service person
371. specify the IP addresses you want to discover through out of band discovery NOTE The SAN Management application cannot discover manage or monitor any devices when the device s Operating System has IPv6 mode You can add edit and remove IP addresses as necessary For instructions refer to Configuring Address Properties on page 142 Click OK Select Discover gt On Setting the Polling Delay The polling delay allows you to configure a delay between polling cycles 1 Select Discover gt Setup The Discover Setup dialog box displays Click the General tab 3 Edit the values in the Polling Delay field NOTE To make sure performance data is accurate set the polling delay below two minutes If you set the polling delay to greater than two minutes it may produce inaccurate performance data 4 Click OK on the Discover Setup dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 141 53 1000663 03 4 Configuring Address Properties Configuring Address Properties 142 You can configure IP Addresses SNMP Community Strings and Product Type and Access Using these properties the application can perform discovery and communication functions as well as set password authentication Adding an IP Address You can add IP addresses and subnets through which the SAN can be discovered 1 Select Discover gt Setup The Discover Setup dialog box displays 2 Click the Out of Band tab 3 Click Add The Address Properties dia
372. splay end nodes when discovering a new fabric complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select End Node Display Select the Show connected end nodes when new fabric is discovered check box to display end nodes on your system NOTE Before changes can take effect the topology must be rediscovered Click Apply or OK to save your work Configuring Flyover Settings You can configure your system to display product information for products and connections in a pop up window on the Physical Map To display product information in a pop up window complete the following steps 1 a FF WN Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select Flyovers Select the Enable flyover display check box to enable flyover display on your system Select the Include labels check box to include labels on flyover displays To set the products to display on flyover select the Product tab and complete the following steps a Inthe Available Properties table select each product you want to display b Click the right arrow to move the selected products to the Selected Properties table c Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the products in the Selected Properties table if necessary Items in the Selected Properties table appear in the flyover display EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuration Option
373. splay in the Sniffer Tests table If you are opening the Frame Sniffer dialog box for the first time the table displays empty Add new tests using the instructions provided in Adding a New Frame Sniffer Test on page 201 200 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 5 Configuring Frame Sniffer Adding a New Frame Sniffer Test NOTE Frame Sniffer procedures should only be performed by advanced users and are only available with M Model manageable switches running M EOS 5 0 or higher For a list of manageable devices refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 You can add tests to count frames passed by a switch port that meet certain criteria 1 Select Monitor gt Frame Sniffer The Frame Sniffer dialog box displays Click Add The New Test dialog box displays Figure 58 Name Description Direction Liem Duration Seconds Condition NONE Mask Value Word Offset Match String NONE NONE NONE NONE IN NONE NONE NONE OK Cancel Help FIGURE 58 New Test Dialog Box o ono EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Type a name for the test Optional Type a description for the test This description displays as a tool tip when you point to the name of a test From the Direction list select a direction Some switches only support one direction in which case you may only have one choice In the Duration field enter the length of time you want
374. splays the proper port value for all firmware levels When traps are generated on the switch for firmware versions 4 X and below the varbind shows the correct port number 0 as the first port however for firmware versions 5 X and above the varbind shows port number 1 as the first port and the label for the first port is O so you need to subtract 1 from the port number extracted from the varbind to correctly match the label Third party applications may not correctly interpret the information Click OK Removing Trap Recipients To remove an existing trap recipient during SNMP agent configuration use the following steps ATTENTION This procedure removes trap recipients without asking for confirmation 1 Select Monitor gt SNMP Agent gt Setup The SNMP Agent Setup dialog box displays 2 Select the trap recipient you want to remove and click Remove The trap recipient is removed without confirmation 3 Click OK EFC Manager Software User Manual 211 53 1000663 03 5 Configuring the SNMP Agent Adding Community Strings To add a community string during SNMP agent configuration complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor gt SNMP Agent gt Setup The SNMP Agent Setup dialog box displays Figure 62 Community Strings Trap Recipients Community Strings Community String Privileges gt j Add public Read Only OK Cancel Help FIGURE 65 SNMP Agent Setup Dialog Box Community Strings Tab 2 Click the
375. ssions specifying 100 viewing 101 setting discovery 139 polling delay 141 setup tools feature 286 shortcut menu adding option to 126 changing 127 removing option from 127 shortcuts 247 show route feature 286 show routes overview 165 procedure 165 requirements 165 182 showing levels of detail physical map 104 shutdown feature 286 sniffer events in log 199 refreshing 206 sniffer session deleting 205 stopping 203 sniffer test adding 201 deleting 205 editing 204 running 202 stopping 203 viewing 200 snmp agent configuring 207 overview 207 turning off 208 turning on 208 SNMP agent configuration feature 286 SNMP trap events changing TCP IP ports 214 242 software configuration properties feature 286 Solaris uninstalling from 22 specifying remote access 100 splitting persisted fabrics 196 334 starting EFCM 23 Element Managers 128 SAN Management application 23 Telnet session 127 status bar 68 status determining for fabric 166 storage group icon 245 storage icon 244 switch group icon 245 symapi jar class path issues 232 system requirements 4 T tape group icon 245 tape icon 244 TCP IP ports changing 214 242 Telnet session launching 127 terminating on UNIX 16 terminating on Windows 13 third party applications opening 129 time out values changing 141 tips turning on and off 104 tool tips turning on and off 104 toolbar des
376. stem 390 SBAR See serial crossbar assembly segment A fabric segments when one or more switches cannot join the fabric because of various reasons The switch or switches remain as separate fabrics segmented E_Port See segmented expansion port segmented expansion port Segmented E_Port E_Port that has ceased to function as an E_Port within a multiswitch fabric due to an incompatibility between the fabrics that it joins See also bridge port fabric loop port fabric port generic port hub port node loop port node port segmented loop port Allows you to divide a Fibre Channel private loop into multiple segments Each segment can pass frames around as an independent loop and can connect through the fabric to other segments of the same loop serial crossbar assembly SBAR The assembly is responsible for Fibre Channel frame transmission from any director or switch port to any other director or switch port Connections are established without software intervention serial port A full duplex channel that sends and receives data at the same time It consists of three wires two that move data one bit at a time in opposite directions and a third wire that is a common signal ground wire EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 server A computer that provides shared resources such as files and printers to the network Used primarily to store data providing access to shared resources Usually contains a network o
377. t System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator LUN Management System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Map Editing System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Map HBA to Server System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Map Loop to Hub System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Map Port to Storage EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator 285 F In this Appendix TABLE 57 Feature Monitor Ethernet Event Features and User Groups Access Levels User Groups with Read Write Access System Administrator User Groups with Read Only Access Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Performance System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Persist Fabric System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Planning System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator PortFencing System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Properties Edit Remote Access Report System Administrator System Administrator Security Administrator System Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Administrator Maintenance Operator Product Ad
378. t select Default or User Defined If you select Default go to step 4 If you select User Defined continue with step b In the User Name field enter your user name In the Password and Confirm Password fields enter your password Go to step 4 e Select the Use External FTP Server option to configure the external FTP server a b c d In the Remote Host IP field enter the IP address for the remote host In the Remote User Name field enter a user name In the Remote Directory Path field enter the path to the remote host In the Password Required for FTP field enter the password 4 Click Apply or OK to save your work EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 81 3 Configuration Options Configuring Nickname Settings The SAN Management application allows you to configure nicknames to be either unique or non unique To configure nicknames complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select Nicknames 3 Select one of the following options e Select Set nicknames to be unique to require that nicknames be unique on your system e Select Set nicknames to be non unique to allow duplicate nicknames on your system 4 Click Apply or OK to save your work Editing Duplicate Nicknames The SAN Management application allows you to edit duplicate nicknames so that each device has a unique nickname Note that this dialog box only displays when
379. t Popup Menu Items table select the menu item you want to change The settings for the selected menu item displays in the fields at the top of the dialog box 4 Edit the fields as necessary Click Edit NOTE You must click Edit before clicking OK otherwise your changes will be lost 6 Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box Removing an Option from a Device s Shortcut Menu You can remove a tool that displays on a device s shortcut menu 1 Select Tools gt Setup The Setup Tools dialog box displays 2 Click the Product Menu tab The Product Popup Menu Items table displays all configured menu options In the Product Popup Menu Items table select the menu item you want to remove Click Remove NOTE You must click Remove before clicking OK otherwise your changes will be lost 5 Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box Launching a Telnet Session You can use Telnet to log in and issue command line based commands to a switch 1 On the Physical Map select the switch to which you want to connect NOTE The switch must have a valid IP address If the device does not have a valid IP address the Telnet selection will not be available on the Tools menu or the shortcut menu You must right click the device icon select Properties and enter the device s IP address before you can open a Telnet session 2 Select Tools gt Product Menu gt Telnet The Telnet session window display
380. t Port Element Management IP Configuration LogData Memory Allocation Server Connection SNMP Discovery SNMP Trap Listening Support Mode BRIER IRIE This option allows you to configure Backup settings Backup is a service process that periodically copies and stores application files to an output directory The output directory is relative to the Server and must use a network share format to support backup to the network If you use a network path as the output directory you must add network credentials as well y Enable backups Next Backup Start Time 17 Hours 35 Minutes Backup Interval 6Hours Y Backup Now Output Directory D Backup Start with W for a network drive Browse OK Cancel Apply Help FIGURE 2 Options Dialog Box 2 Select Backup in the Category list The currently defined directory displays in the Backup Output Directory field Select the Enable backups check box if necessary 4 Inthe Next Backup Start Time Hours and Minutes fields enter the time using a 24 hour clock you want the backup process to begin Select an interval from the Backup Interval drop down list to set how often backup occurs 6 Verify that the CD backup directory is correct default directory is D Backup It is assumed that drive D is a CD RW drive You can change the directory or use the Browse button to select another directory EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 27 1 Backing Up
381. t and are listed in the Fabric Log Determining a Persisted Fabric s Status The fabric or switch group s status is reflected by the indicator that displays on the fabric or switch group on the Physical Map 100008008840E010 FIGURE 51 Persisted Fabric Icon on Physical Map E 100008008840E010 D Switch Group BS 3032 FIGURE 52 Persisted Fabric Icon on Product List Refer to Product Status Icons for a list of status icon definitions You can also determine changes to the persisted fabric through the Fabric Log To display the log complete the following steps 1 Selecta persisted fabric in the Physical Map or Product List 2 Select Monitor gt Logs gt Fabric Log For more details on the Fabric Log refer to Event Monitoring on page 216 3 Click Close Determining Status of a Product in a Persisted Fabric When a product is added to a persisted fabric it displays with a plus icon Figure 53 D FIGURE 53 Product Added to Persisted Fabric When a product is removed from a persisted fabric it displays with a minus icon Figure 54 LA FIGURE 54 Product Removed from Persisted Fabric EFC Manager Software User Manual 195 53 1000663 03 5 196 Persisting and Unpersisting Fabrics and Switch Groups Determining the Status of Connections in a Persisted Fabric or Switch Group If more than one connection exists between products and all connections are disconnected the conn
382. t of Band tab of the Discover Setup dialog box If you do not configure the application to directly discover the devices the connections and attached devices may not display correctly Only fabrics that have manageable switches as the principal switch display For a list of manageable products refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 If a manageable switch is being directly managed but exists in a fabric where the principal switch is a third party device another Server is not allowed to connect to and manage those devices NOTE Only one copy of the application should be used to monitor and manage the same devices ina subnet In Band Discovery When performing in band discovery the Server gathers data from the HBA driver about the in band data flow and LUNs Discovery is performed by calling SCSI commands from the vendor s library and sending them through the HBA to the target LUNs on the storage device Note that for in band discovery to work properly the HBA driver must support the Fibre Alliance HBA API Furthermore the vendor s HBA drivers and their implementation of the SNIA HBA API Library must be correct With the HBA vendor s drivers and library installed the application is able to gather information about both the adapter s and the port s attributes When in band discovery starts the application calls routines from the vendor s library and the library issues SCSI Inquiry Report LUNs and Read Capacity commands throu
383. t supported in Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Server with service pack 4 Windows 2000 Advanced Server with service pack 4 Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition with service pack 1 Windows XP with service pack 2 Memory 1 GB Disk Space 2 GB Video Requirements 8MB VGA 256 Resolution 256 colors EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 TABLE 8 Solaris Client Requirements System Requirements 1 Processor Hardware Operating System Memory Disk Space Video Requirements Resolution Solaris UltraSparc Ili and up CD ROM Solaris 9 or 10 1GB 2 GB 8MB 8 bit color 256 colors TABLE 9 Linux Client Requirements Processor Hardware Operating System Memory Disk Space Video Requirements Resolution 2 0 GHz Intel Pentium 4 CD ROM Red Hat Enterprise Linux ES 3 0 Red Hat Enterprise Linux ES 4 0 Redhat 9 0 kernel v 2 4 20 8 SuSE Linux 9 2 SuSE Linux 9 3 1GB 2 GB 8MB 8 bit color 256 colors EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 1 Product Licensing Overview Product Licensing Overview License keys are unique strings of alphanumeric characters that verify ownership of the SAN Management application software as well as determine any additional features Such as Event Management that you receive as part of the license Feature keys are unique strings of alphanumeric characters that verify ownership of Switches and Directors as well as any additional software features
384. t tab Enables all commands for the Potential Member right click menu Enables Port Label Search and Properties commands for the Zones right click menu Enables Properties com mand for the Zone Sets right click menu Enables Properties com mand for the Zones in Zone Sets right click menu Read Write Includes the Global Library in the Zoning Library drop down list in the Zoning dialog box Enables all functions on the dialog boxes EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 About User Groups and Access Levels In this Appendix F A user with administrative privileges can assign users to user groups Five pre configured user groups System Administrator Security Administrator Maintenance Operator and Produce Administrator are available with the application however System Administrators can also create user groups manually Refer to Creating a User Group on page 94 for instructions TABLE 57 Feature Active Session Management Features and User Groups Access Levels User Groups with Read Write Access System Administrator Security Administrator User Groups with Read Only Access Operator Maintenance Product Administrator Add Delete Properties System Administrator Operator Maintenance Product Administrator Advanced Call Home System Administrator Backup System Administrator Maintenance Product Administrator Operator Device Administration System Adm
385. ta integrity RAID systems have features that ensure data stored on the drives are safe and quickly retrievable remote computer running client software Workstation such as a personal computer PC or UNIX workstation running SAN management and Element Manager client application software that can access the server platform over a local area network LAN connection remote notification See event notification resource allocation time out value R_A_TOV R_A_TOV is a value used to time out operations that depend on the maximum possible time that a frame could be delayed in a fabric and still be delivered right click menu See shortcut menu ROM See read only memory Contrast with random access memory router An attaching device that connects two local area network LAN segments which use similar or different architectures at the reference model network layer D Contrast with bridge 320 S SAN See storage area network EFCM Basic interface The interface provides a graphical user interface GUI similar to the Element Manager application and supports director or switch configuration statistics monitoring and basic operations With director or switch firmware installed administrators or operators with a browser capable personal computer PC and an Internet connection can monitor and manage the director or switch through an embedded web server interface SA 0S 390 See System Automation for Operating Sy
386. tached Devices Select to show all devices attached to the selected object EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 User Interface Description 2 e Select Connected Set Select to select two connected objects e Select All Select to select all object in the physical map e Properties Select to display the selected objects properties View Menu The View menu provides the following commands e Discovered SAN Select to display the discovered SAN e Planned SAN Select to display a planned SAN e Show Panels Select to select which panels to display All Panels Select to show all panels Connectivity Map Select to only show the connectivity map Product List Select to only show the product list Event Management Select to only show the Event Management tab Security Center Select to only show the Security tab Master Log Select to only show the master log e Manage View Select to set up the SAN Management application view Create View Select to create a new view Display View Select to display by View All or by a view you create Levels Select to display by All Levels Products and Ports Product Only or Ports Only Copy View Select to copy a view Delete View Select to delete a view Edit View Select to edit a view Connectivity View Select to configure a connectivity view e Zoom Select to configure the zoom percentage e Show Select to determine what products display Fabrics Only Sel
387. take effect 254 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Appendix MySOL and DB2 Database Fields E In this Appendix This appendix provides reference information related to database exporting e MYSQL and DB2 Database Fields cccscscsesssteseesteveiestsvessesiststsesess 256 EFC Manager Software User Manual 255 53 1000663 03 E In this Appendix MySQL and DB2 Database Fields When you export data to a MySQL or DB2 database the information is displayed in database tables ADAPTER Table CONNECTION Table DEVICE Table FABRIC Table HISTORICALPERFORMANCE Table HOST Table HOSTCONNECTION Table HOSTHBAS Table HOSTLUNS Table IFCPLINK Table LUN Table LUNBINDING Table LUNMASKING Table MSAN Table NETAPPFILER Table PORT Table REALTIMEPERFORMANCE Table ROUTERFABRIC Table SANROUTERSYSTEM Table STORAGEDEVICES Table ZONE Table ZONELIBRARY Table ZONEMEMBER Table ZONEMEMBERDOMAINPORT Table ZONEMEMBERFABRICADDRESS Table ZONEMEMBERWWN Table ZONESET Table ZONESETZONES Table 256 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 In this Appendix E ADAPTER Table NOTE The Format table column displays values for both MySQL and DB2 databases The values are the same for both databases unless noted otherwise TABLE 28 Field Definition Format Size DEVICEGUID Device GUID Varchar 128 PWWN Port world wide name Varchar 128 AVS Vendor specific ID Varchar 128 ANSN Node symbolic
388. ter See host bus adapter Fibre Channel address A 3 byte node port N_Port identifier which is unique within the address domain of a fabric Each port may choose its own identifier or the identifier may be assigned automatically during fabric login EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Glossary Fibre Channel arbitrated loop FC AL A high speed 100 Mbps connection which is a true loop technology where ports use arbitration to establish a point to point circuit Data can be transferred in both directions simultaneously achieving a nominal transfer rate between two products of 200 Mbps Fibre Channel Association FCA The FCA is a non profit corporation consisting of over 150 members throughout the world Its mission is to nurture and help develop the broadest market for Fibre Channel products through market development education standards monitoring and fostering interoperability among members products Fibre Channel fabric element FCFE Any product linked to a fabric Fibre Channel fabric element management information base FCFE MIB A table of variables available to network management stations and resident on a switch or director Through the simple network management protocol SNMP these pointers can be manipulates to monitor control and configure the switch or director Fibre Channel Industry Association FCIA A corporation consisting of over 100 computer industry related companies Its goal is to
389. ter the new password during discovery on the Product Type and Access tab of the Address Properties dialog box 8 Click OK Select the DataFabric Manager server you just added and move it to the Selected Individual Address list NOTE After the initial discovery of NetApp DFM servers the Master Log generates Created events for each LUN in the filers 10 Click OK 150 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Turning Discovery On and Off 4 Turning Discovery On and Off To turn discovery on select Discover gt On To turn discovery off select Discover gt Off Determining the Discovery State NOTE The Product List panel may be hidden by default To view all panels select View gt All Panels or press F12 You can determine the discovery status of products by looking at the Operational Status column in the Product List Additionally the operational status Unknown is equivalent to the discovery state Offline The operational statuses Healthy Operational Degraded Marginal and Down Failed are equivalent to a discovery state of Online You can also determine the discovery status of products from the Discover Setup dialog box General Tab by looking at the Discovery Status column in the Selected Individual Address table EFC Manager Software User Manual 151 53 1000663 03 4 Troubleshooting Discovery Troubleshooting Discovery If you encounter discovery problems
390. the Con figure menu however disables the OK button Enables the Fabric Bind ing command on the Con figure menu Enables all functions in the dialog box Frame Sniffer Allows you to count frames passed by a switch port that meet spe cific criteria Allows you to control access to the Frame Sniffer dialog box from the Monitor menu Disables the Frame Sniffer command on the Monitor menu Enables the Frame Sniffer command on the Monitor menu however disables the OK button Enables the Frame Sniffer command on the Monitor menu Enables all functions in the dialog box Group Manager Create Event Log Allows you to create a log that lists all events that are associated with any of the products in the speci fied group Allows you to control access to the Create Event Log function Enables the Group Man ager command on the Configure menu however disables the Create Event Log option Disables Log gt Group on the Monitor menu Enables the Group Man ager command on the Configure menu however disables the Create Event Log option Enables Group Log on the Monitor menu Enables the Group Man ager command on the Configure menu and enables the Create Event Log option Enables Group Log on the Monitor menu Group Manager Firm ware Install 274 Allows you to install firm ware on a group of prod ucts either switches or directors Allows you to control access
391. the IPv6 Address field enter the address eight groups of four hexadecimal digits for the device b Inthe Prefix Length IPv6 or dual mode only field enter the prefix length for the device Choose from one of the following options e Select the Enable check box to allow extended discovery support for a manageable M model device Extended discovery allows the SAN Management application to discover all devices in the same fabric as the specified device e Clear the Enable check box to disable extended discovery support Select the data source for the domain e Use auto detection e Use the server e Use a specific RDC If you selected Use a specific RDC enter the IP address IPv4 format only of the RDC in the IP address of RDC field EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Address Properties 4 12 Click OK on the Address Properties dialog box 13 Move the IP address to the Selected Individual Addresses area 14 Click OK on the Discover Setup dialog box Enabling Extended Discovery When you enable extended discovery for a manageable M model device the SAN Management application discovers all devices in the same fabric as the specified device NOTE Extended discovery is not Supported on B model devices NOTE Enabling or disabling extended discovery for any IP address causes discovery to reload To enable extended discovery complete the following steps 1 Select Discover gt Setup The Dis
392. the Online Help EFC Manager Software User Manual 67 53 1000663 03 2 User Interface Description Toolbox The toolbox Figure 7 is located at the top right side of the View window and provides tools to zoom in and out of the Physical Map collapse and expand groups and fit the topology to the window D 2A 3 H dM FIGURE 7 The Toolbox Zoom In Use to zoom in on the Physical Map Zoom Out Use to zoom out on the Physical Map 1 2 3 Fit in View Use to scale the map to fit within the Physical Map area 4 Expand Use to expand the map to show all ports in use on a device 5 Collapse Use to collapse the map to show only devices hides ports Status Bar The status bar Figure 8 displays at the bottom of the main window The status bar provides a variety of information about the SAN and the application The icons on the status bar change to reflect different information such as the current status of products fabrics and backup fess ry foy oreacrest sents 1 acamiristrator I i YD ORN O Oe FIGURE 8 Status Bar The icons on your status bar will vary based on the licensed features on your system 1 Connection Status Displays the Server Client connection status 2 Product Status Displays the status of the most degraded device in the SAN For example if all devices are operational except one which is degraded the Product Status displays as degraded Click this icon to open the
393. the Potential Member right click menu Enables Port Label Search and Properties commands for the Zones right click menu Enables Properties com mand for the Zone Sets right click menu Enables Properties com mand for the Zones in Zone Sets right click menu Includes the fabric library in the Zoning Library drop down list in the Zoning dialog box Enables all functions on the dialog boxes 283 F In this Appendix TABLE 56 Privilege Zoning Global Library no MSAN and Router Fabric 284 Privileges and Application Behavior Description Allows you to add data in the Global Zone Library Does not effect on Router Fabric or mSAN libraries No Privilege Removes Global Library from the Zoning Library drop down list in the Zon ing dialog box Disables the Global command in the list of targets in the Copy Into right click com mands Read Only Includes the fabric library in the Zoning Library drop down list in the Zoning dialog box Disables the Save To on the Zoning dialog box Active Zone Set tab Disables the right arrow for adding left arrow for removing New Zone New Member New Set Import OK and Apply buttons on the Zoning dialog box Zone Library tab Enables Cancel and Help buttons in the Zoning dia log box Enables Find and Export buttons in the Zoning dia log box Zone Library tab Enables Compare and Report buttons in the Zoning dialog box Active Zone Se
394. the Virtual Switches dialog box EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 TABLE 56 Privilege Zoning Activation Privileges and Application Behavior Description Allows you to activate a zone set selected in the Zoning dialog box No Privilege Disables the Activate Deactivate and Zoning Policies buttons in the Zoning dialog box In this Appendix F Read Only Same as no privilege Read Write Enables the Activate Deactivate and Zoning Policies buttons in the Zoning dialog box Zoning Fabric Libraries Allows you to edit data in the Fabric Zone Libraries EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Removes the fabric library from the Zoning Library drop down list in the Zon ing dialog box Disables all the fabric libraries in the list of targets in the Copy Into right click com mands Includes the fabric library in the Zoning Library drop down list in the Zoning dialog box Disables the Save To on the Zoning dialog box Active Zone Set tab Disables the right arrow for adding left arrow for removing New Zone New Member New Set Import OK and Apply buttons on the Zoning dialog box Zone Library tab Enables Cancel and Help buttons in the Zoning dia log box Enables Find and Export buttons in the Zoning dia log box Zone Library tab Enables Compare and Report buttons in the Zoning dialog box Active Zone Set tab Enables all commands for
395. the event 4 Click OK 222 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Creating Reports 6 Creating Reports Presenting and archiving data about a SAN is equally as important as gathering the data Through the application you can generate reports about the SAN You can send the reports to network administrators support consultants and others interested in the SAN s architecture or archive them for future reference The following standard report types are available from the Generate Reports dialog box Product List Lists the Product List which has detailed information about the products in the SAN Operating Status Change Lists status change for products in the SAN including the number of products online and offline and details about each product s status Note that this report only looks at the events from the event log for the last 30 days To save space the log may be truncated and events lost resulting in an inaccurate summary The generation time for the Operating Status Report depends on the size of the event logs for the past 30 days Performance Data Displays the performance data This report is available for B model and M model devices Performance Monitoring is a feature of the Advanced Module which is an Enterprise Edition only optional module Please contact your sales representative to order the Advanced Module Connectivity Map Displays a graphic of the SAN s topology Port Usage Lists the number
396. therwise continue to step 5 Select a Property name and Value for Condition 1 Optional To define a second condition to be simultaneously true enter the Property name and Value for Condition 2 Condition 1 AND Condition 2 must be true NOTE To set up a condition where Condition 1 OR Condition 2 must be true define two menu items one for each condition 7 From the Tool list select the tool that you want to launch or click Define to add a tool For more information refer to Adding a Tool on page 123 8 Click Append device ID to specify the parameter used when opening the tool Select IP Address to specify that the device s IP address should be used when opening the tool Select Node WWN to specify that the device s Node WWN should be used when opening the tool 9 Click Add to add the new menu item It displays in the Product Popup Menu Items table NOTE You must click Add before clicking OK otherwise your changes will be lost 10 Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box 126 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Accessing Third Party Tools 3 Changing an Option on a Device s Shortcut Menu You can change the parameters for a tool that displays on a device s shortcut menu 1 Select Tools gt Setup The Setup Tools dialog box displays 2 Click the Product Menu tab The Product Popup Menu Items table displays all configured shortcut menu options 3 Inthe Produc
397. tion Fields are optional unless SMTP server enables authentication User List oK Cancel Help FIGURE 69 E mail Notification Setup Dialog Box Select Enable E mail Event Notification 3 Inthe E mail Server field enter the IP address or the name of the SMTP mail server that the Server can use to send the e mail 4 Inthe SMTP Port field enter the port number of the SMTP mail server In the SMTP ID field enter the authentication ID of the SMTP mail server 6 Inthe SMTP Password field enter the authentication password of the SMTP mail server EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Using Event Notification Features 6 In the Reply Address field enter the recipient s e mail address 8 Inthe Summary Interval field and drop down list enter the length of time the application should wait between notifications Notifications are combined into a single e mail and sent at each interval setting An interval setting of zero causes notifications to be sent immediately ATTENTION Setting too short an interval can cause the recipient s e mail inbox to fill VERY quickly 9 Select one of the following options e Select Send to and enter an e mail address for a user to send a test e mail to a specific user e Select Send to all users enabled for notification to send a test e mail to all users already set to receive notification 10 Click Send Test E mail to test the e mail server A message displays whether the server wa
398. tion In FICON management style in a director or switch the attribute that when set removes the communication capability of a specific port A blocked address is disabled so that no other address can be connected to it A blocked attribute supersedes a dedicated or prohibited attribute on the same address Contrast with allowed connection unblocked connection See connectivity attribute See also dynamic connection dynamic connectivity blocked port In a director or switch the attribute that when set removes the communication capability of a specific port A blocked port continuously transmits the offline sequence boot 1 To start or restart a computer 2 Loading the operating system B_Port See bridge port bps Bits per second Bps Bytes per second bridge 1 An attaching product that connects two local area network LAN segments to allow the transfer of information from one LAN segment to the other A bridge can connect the LAN segments directly by network adapters and software in a single product or can connect network adapters in two products through software and use of a telecommunication link between the two adapters D 2 A functional unit that connects two LANs that use the same logical link control protocol but may use different media access control protocols T Contrast with router 3 A product that connects and passes packets between two network segments that use the same communications protoc
399. tion history zip from the Import list 3 Inthe File Name field enter the path and file name or Browse to the file The imported Zone set activation history files are stored in lt nstall_Home gt Server Data Zoningsets NOTE If you browsed to and selected the lt nstall_Home gt Server Universe_Home TestUniverse _Working directory or any files within that directory the Import Export might fail You must deselect the file or directory before you run the Import Export process again EFC Manager Software User Manual 121 53 1000663 03 3 Export and Import 4 Click OK The zone set you want to import is compared to zone sets in the destination zone library If no zone name or zone ID conflicts are found the zone set is successfully imported and the Import dialog box closes However note the following exceptions e If the destination library contains a zone set that is identical to the one being imported a message displays asking whether you want to proceed Click Yes to continue and overwrite the existing zone set with the one being imported or click No to cancel the import operation e If the destination library contains a zone set with the same name as the one being imported but different contents a message displays warning you that continuing will overwrite the existing zone set and asking whether you want to proceed Click Yes to overwrite the existing zone set or click No to cancel the import operation Importing FC
400. tional module Please contact your sales representative to order the Advanced Module When exporting to Disk or E mail this option is subordinate to SAN Files When exporting to MySQL or DB2 it is independent of SAN Files Master log Exports the Event files Connectivity Map Exports the Connectivity Map topology as a graphic JPG file Connectivity XML Exports description of all fabric topologies in XML format including online and persisted product and connection information Connectivity XML cannot be exported to e mail Product List Exports the Product List in tab delimited format To view the product list in table format open it in Microsoft Excel The Product List cannot be imported back into the SAN Management application Reports Exports SAN reports Nicknames Exports nicknames Status Exports SAN status data used by technical support Zone set activation history Exports the zone set activation history as an XML file Allows you to choose the location default is lt nstall_Home gt Server Data Zoningsets of where to export the zone set activation history If you are exporting to disk skip to step 6 Otherwise continue to step 5 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Export and Import 3 If you are exporting to e mail use the following fields and buttons Mail To Enter the recipient s e mail address Separate multiple e mail addresses with
401. to link down events e ISL Segmentation ISL has repeatedly become segmented e ISL Protocol Mismatch ISL has been repeatedly put into the Invalid Attachment state due to a protocol error Link Thresholds Use this type of threshold to block a port when a Link Level Hot I O error meets the threshold e Link Level Hot I 0 Active Loop port repeatedly received LIP Active non loop port repeatedly received LR OLS or NOS Security Thresholds Use this type of threshold to block a port when one of the following security violations occur e Authentication the switch has repeatedly become unavailable due to authentication events e Fabric Binding the switch has repeatedly become unavailable due to fabric binding events e Switch Binding the switch has repeatedly become unavailable due to switch binding events Switch Binding is enabled through a product s Element Manager e Port Binding the switch has repeatedly become unavailable due to port binding events e ISL Security Generic Security Error the switch on the other side of the ISL detected a specific security violation but is only able to tell us that a generic security violation has occurred ora security configuration mismatch was detected e N Port Connection Not Allowed the switch has repeatedly become unavailable due to N port connection not allowed events EFC Manager Software User Manual 183 53 1000663 03 5 Port Fencing Adding Thresholds The SAN Management applicatio
402. to the Firmware Install function Enables the Group Man ager command on the Configure menu however disables the Firmware Install option Same as no privilege Enables the Group Man ager command on the Configure menu and enables the Firmware Install option EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 TABLE 56 Privilege Privileges and Application Behavior In this Appendix F No Privilege Description Read Only Read Write Allows you to collect main Group Manager Run Data Collection tenance data about a group of switches or directors Allows you to control access to the Run Data Collection function Enables the Group Man ager command on the Configure menu however disables the Run Data Collection option Same as no privilege Enables the Group Man ager command on the Configure menu and enables Run Data Collec tion option Import Allows you to import SAN files zip SANvergence Manager Data mSAN list Nicknames Proper ties csv of products and ports Server HBA Map pings csv Storage Port Mappings csv Zone set activation history zip and FC Aliases into Nick names Allows you to control access to the Import dia log box from SAN menu Disables the Import com mand on the SAN menu Same as no privilege Enables the Import com mand on the SAN menu and enables the functions in the dialog box License Update Allows you to update your
403. tocol an end device Server or storage device that is or can be connected to a switched fabric See also device node loop port NL_Port A physical interface within an end device node that participates in a loop containing one or more fabric loop ports FL_Ports or other NL_Ports See also expansion port fabric loop port fabric port hub port node port node port N_Port Physical interface within an end device that can connect to an fabric port F_Port on a switched fabric or directly to another N_Port in point to point communications See also expansion port fabric loop port fabric port hub port node loop port node port identifier N_Port ID In Fibre Channel protocol a unique address identifier by which an N_Port is uniquely known It consists of a domain most significant byte an area and a port each 1 byte long The N_Port ID is used in the source identifier S_ID and destination identifier D_ID fields of a Fibre Channel frame nonvolatile random access memory NV RAM RAM that retains its content when the device power is turned off N_Port See node port EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 N_Port ID See node port identifier NV RAM See nonvolatile random access memory 0 octet An 8 bit quantity often called a byte or word An octet can equal a byte as long as the byte equals eight bits See also byte OEM See original equipment manufacturer offline Referring to data sto
404. tually be the original manufacturers They usually customize and market the product 317 Glossary Os See operating system 0S 390 See Operating System 390 OSI See Open Systems Architecture OSMS See open systems management server out of band Transmission of management protocols outside of the Fibre Channel network typically over Ethernet See also in band out of band discovery The process through which the SAN Management application connects to the switches via the IP network Device information is copied from the SNMP server to the Server See also in band discovery out of band management Transmission of management information using frequencies or channels other than those routinely used for information transfer P packet In Fibre Channel protocol Logical unit of information usually in the form of a data frame transmitted on a network It contains a header with all relevant addressing and timing information the actual data and a trailer which contains the error checking function usually in the form of a cyclic redundancy check and frequently user data panel A logical component of the interface window Typically a heading and or frame marks the panel as an individual entity of the window Size and shape of the panel and its data depend upon the purpose of the panel and may or may not be modified partition A way to logically divide a hard drive so that an operating system treats ea
405. tup The Discover Setup dialog box displays 2 Click the Out of Band tab 3 From the Available Addresses table select the IP address you want to remove ATTENTION When you click Remove the IP address is removed without confirmation 4 Click Remove If the IP address you want to edit is in the Selected Individual Addresses area of the Discovery Setup dialog box then an message displays telling you that you must remove the IP Address from the Selected Individual Addresses area before editing Click OK to close the message Remove the IP Address from the Selected Individual Addresses tab of the Discovery Setup dialog box then repeat step 4 to remove the IP Address 5 Click OK to close the Discover Setup dialog box Configuring an SNMP Community String You can specify the SNMP community strings used to communicate with products 1 Select Discover gt Setup The Discover Setup dialog box displays 2 Click the Out of Band tab 3 Click Add The Address Properties dialog box displays 4 Click the SNMP tab Figure 29 IP Address SNMP Product Type and Access Target Port 161 Time out sec 5 Retries 2 SNMP Version wv Set the SNMP community strings used to communicate with devices Read Default public Custom Write Default private D Custom OK Cancel Help FIGURE29 Address Properties Dialog Box SNMP tab EFC Manager Software User Manual 147 53 1000663 03 4 148 Configuring A
406. tware jhtml e Best practice guides white papers data sheets and other documentation is available through the Brocade Partner Web site For additional resource information visit the Technical Committee T11 Web site This Web site provides interface standards for high performance and mass storage applications for Fibre Channel storage management and other applications http www ti1 org For information about the Fibre Channel industry visit the Fibre Channel Industry Association Web site http www fibrechannel org xviii EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Document feedback Document feedback Because quality is our first concern at Brocade we have made every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document However if you find an error or an omission or you think that a topic needs further development we want to hear from you Forward your feedback to documentation brocade com Provide the title and version number of the document and as much detail as possible about your comment including the topic heading and page number and your suggestions for improvement EFC Manager Software User Manual xix 53 1000663 03 XX Document feedback EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Chapter Getting Started 1 In this Chapter This chapter provides information to help you begin using the EFCM application WOVE VIGW a pe iire Saad ad erage D aa os EAA E aby hone Seer Aas ards
407. u are not prompted for confirmation before the user s account is removed If users are logged in when you remove their accounts they receive a message that states that their client has been disconnected They are immediately logged out after they click OK on the message 1 Select SAN gt Users The EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box displays Select the user account you want to remove Click Remove Click OK EFC Manager Software User Manual 91 53 1000663 03 3 Managing Users Filtering Event Notifications for a User The application provides notification of many different types of SAN events If a user only wants to receive notification of certain events you can filter the events specifically for that user NOTE The e mail filter in EFCM is overridden by the firmware e mail filter When the firmware determines that certain events do not receive e mail notification an e mail is not sent for those events even when the event type is added to the Selected Events table in the Define Filter dialog box 1 Select SAN gt Users The EFCM 9 7 Server Users dialog box displays 2 Inthe E mail column click the Filter link associated with the user for whom you want to filter events The Define Filter dialog box displays Figure 14 The Selected Events table includes the events of which this user is notified The Available Events table includes all other events J Include extended events Available Events Selected Events Type Sute ft
408. ual 17 53 1000663 03 1 Installing the Application Post Installation Requirements On many Unix servers the X DISPLAY may not always remain available for example if you log out of the desktop therefore we recommend that you modify the following parameter for the EFCM Server To support the EFCM server running when the X DISPLAY is not available headless mode complete the following steps in the lt nstall_Home gt bin directory NOTE If you do not complete these steps server java errors can occur in functions such as discovery and performance 1 Execute EFCM_mgr stop 2 Open the ServerParameters properties file and insert the following parameter parameter java awt headless true 3 Execute nohup EFCM_mgr start Headless Installation on UNIX Systems Headless Pre Installation Requirements An X Server display is required even when performing a headless installation to run the initial configuration Before you install EFCM complete the following e Make sure that an X Server is available for display and is configured to permit X Client applications to display from the host on which they are installing the EFCM Connectrix Manager Server typically this simply requires that the systems console be present and running with a logged in user on the X Server based desktop session such as KDE GNOME and so on The Display can be any host X Server for example DISPLAy can be set to display configuration to anoth
409. ure 15 Users Groups le g ID Description Email Address Email gi System Administrator Administrator Default Admin Fill sA Security Administrator Le Maintenance A Operator L Product Administrator m Add Email Event Notification Setup OK Cancel Help FIGURE 15 EFCM 9 7 Server Users Dialog Box 2 Click the Add button The Features tab of the Group dialog box displays and lists the available features Figure 16 94 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Managing User Groups 3 Name Description Features I Views Readi rite F Active Session Management e Add Delete Properties Ka Backup Q Call Home Event Notification Setup a Device Administration gt Device Maintenance 9 Device Operation Discover On Off Q Discovery Setup amp Email Event Notification Setup Q Enterprise Fabric Mode gt Event Management Q Export Q FabricBinding y Frame Sniffer Q Global Zone Library 9 Group Manager Create Event Log y Group Manager Firmware Install y Group Manager Run Data Collection 7v Import gt License Update Log Management gt LUN Management amp Map Editing Map HBA to Server yvy Map Loop to Hub Q Map Port to Storage gt Monitor Ethernet Event amp Performance yy Persist Fabric amp Planning gt PortFencing 9 Properties Edit Remote Access Read Only dv A Cancel Help FIGURE 16 Group Features Dialog Box Enter a name and d
410. use the Hide Route feature to hide routes that Fibre Channel frames must take between two end products in a multiswitch fabric You must show routes before you can hide routes For instructions refer to Showing Routes Between Two End Products on page 165 To hide the route right click the route line between end nodes or the fabric that includes the route you want to hide and select Hide Route Viewing Properties of Routes Between Two End Products 1 To view the properties of a route right click the route and select Properties The Route Properties dialog box displays 2 Review the source and destination ports as well as route details 3 Click Close to close the dialog box Changing a Fabric s Properties You can view and change a fabric s properties 1 On the Physical Map right click a fabric icon or the background of an expanded fabric and select Properties from the menu The Fabric Properties dialog box displays 2 View the fabric s information and edit the nickname if desired NOTE If you segment a fabric the Fabric s nickname follows the assigned principal switch 3 Click OK to update the fabric s properties EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Nicknames Configuring Nicknames 5 The SAN Management application allows you to use Nicknames as a method of providing familiar simple names to products and ports in their SAN Using your SAN Management application you can
411. vation history refer to Importing the Zone Set Activation History on page 121 e FC Aliases into Nicknames Imports Zone Alias information from a B model switch into the SAN Management application For step by step instructions about importing FC aliases into nicknames refer to Importing FC Aliases into Nicknames on page 122 EFC Manager Software User Manual 117 53 1000663 03 3 Export and Import Importing a SAN File To import a SAN File zip complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Import The Import dialog box displays Figure 24 Import SAN File zip File Name Browse Install Performance Data OK Cancel Help FIGURE 24 Import Dialog Box 2 Select SAN File zip from the Import list 3 Inthe File Name field enter the path and file name or Browse to the file NOTE The default path is lt nstall_Home gt ClientData san lt date gt san zip Be sure to select the san zip file for import Importing the rep zip file causes errors NOTE If you browsed to and selected the lt nstall_Home gt Server Universe_Home TestUniverse _Working directory or any files within that directory the Import Export might fail You must deselect the file or directory before you run the Import Export process again 4 To install performance data click the Install Performance Data check box Click OK A message displays stating that imported data will replace corresponding data on the server The c
412. vents Selected Events Type Subtype Levell Type Subtype Levell Event Management Informational o a Client Server Warning A Event Management Trigger Informational Z Ethernet Warning N A Fabric Informational 9 y Event Management Fatal x A Product Informational 9 A Event Management Trigger Warning A A Product Audit Informational Q Ld Fabric Fatal x A Product Hardware Informational o d Fabric Warning A A Product Link Incident Informational Q Performance Fatal x Product Open Trunking Informational D 5 Performance Warning A Product State Informational A Product Fatal x Product Threshold Alert Informational 9 4 Product Warning A Session Informational i i Product Audit Fatal x _ SNMP Trap Informational D z Product Audit Warning A OK Cancel Help FIGURE23 Define Filter Dialog Box 4 Select the Include extended events check box to include extended events Select the Only events in the current view check box to only include events in the current view 6 Toaddan event type to the filter select the event from the Available Events table and click the right arrow 7 To remove an event type from the filter select the event from the Selected Events table and click the left arrow 8 Click OK Exporting Data to a Database You can only export SAN files and Performance data to a third party database such as MySQL or DB2 NOTE Export to a DB2 database is only supported on the Windows
413. ver Local_Root EventStorageProvider Event_YYYYMMDD sum However you can configure EFCM to archive log files over 45 days old For step by step instructions refer to Archiving Master Log Data on page 87 The default locations for the archived log files are lt nstall_Home gt savelog Event_YYYYMMDD log and lt nstall_Home gt savelog Event_YYYYMMDD sum The following fields and columns are included in the Master Log e Level The severity of the event For more information about events refer to the Event Management User Manual or online help For a list of the events icons refer to Table 16 TABLE 16 Event Icons Event Icon Description Informational Warning 4 Fatal e Source The product on which the event occurred e Type The type of event that occurred for example client server communication events e Description A description of the event e Time The time and date the event occurred e P The IP address IPv4 or IPv6 format of the product on which the event occurred e Node WWN The world wide name of the node on which the event occurred e Port WWN The world wide name of the port on which the event occurred EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 User Interface Description 2 Minimap The Minimap which displays in the lower right corner of the main window is useful for getting a bird s eye view of the SAN or to quickly jump to a specific place on the Physical Map To jump to a
414. ver Reports 1 Select the router for which you want to generate a report 2 Choose one of the following options e Select Monitor gt Reports gt lt Report_Type gt OR e Right click the router and select Reports gt lt Report_Type gt The following report types are available Consistency iFCP Connections and Zones LUN Mapping Name Server R Port Router Configuration Zone Library The selected report automatically displays in the View Reports dialog box NOTE Hyperlinks in reports are active only as long as the source data is available 3 To print the report click Show in Browser and complete the following steps The selected report displays in your default Web browser a Select File gt Print in the Web browser The Print dialog box displays b Select the printer to which you want to print and click Print c Select File gt Close to close the Web browser EFC Manager Software User Manual 227 53 1000663 03 6 Creating Reports 4 To delete the report click Delete Report ATTENTION Once you click Delete Report the report is deleted without confirmation 5 Click Close to close the View Reports dialog box Generating Zone Library Reports Generated reports are saved to lt nstall_Home gt Server Reports 1 Select the device for which you want to generate a zone library report 2 Choose one of the following options e Select Monitor gt Reports gt Zone Library OR e Right click the devic
415. vices you must retrieve the translate domain and then enter it into the membership list You can determine the translate domain using the CLI or enabling extended discovery temporarily on any manageable M model device in the edge fabric For M model devices enabling Fabric Binding activates Fabric Binding and enables insistent domain ID Disabling Fabric Binding on M model devices deactivates Fabric Binding For B model devices enabling Fabric Binding activates Switch Connection Control SCC policy and sets Fabric Wide Consistency Policy FWCP and insistent domain ID Disabling Fabric Binding on B model devices deletes SCC policy NOTE In a pure B model fabric enabling insistent domain ID is not mandatory EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuring Fabric Binding 5 Fabric Binding and Element Manager Switch Binding for Blade Switches Do not use the Element Manager Switch Binding feature for Blade Switches You must use the SAN Management application Fabric Binding feature for Blade Switches The Element Manager Switch Binding does not synchronize with the SAN Management application Fabric Binding Therefore if you use both the Element Manager Switch Binding and your SAN Management application Fabric Binding features you will disconnect the two features Examples If you activate an ISL set when a port set is already active the ISL set takes over and vise versa If you activate Switch Binding within the Eleme
416. w 1 In the License Key field enter the license key The License Key field is not case sensitive The License dialog box displays the license information for the Server to which the Client is currently connected Click Update and confirm that the information is accurate The dialog box decodes the key you entered and displays the new license information without setting a new license on the Server The Adv Module Licensed Ports field port count is calculated using the following criteria e Displays the number of licensed ports when the license key has at least one advanced module licensed Only directly discovered switches are counted for licensing This includes the following e Direct discovery All devices whose IP address is specified in the Discovery Setup dialog box e Subnet discovery All devices discovered as a result of the subnet broadcast e Manager of Managers discovery All devices discovered as part of MoM discovery are counted e Displays N A if the license key has no advanced modules e Displays with the EFCM 9 5 behavior when the discovered port count meets the following condition Discovered port count gt Licensed port count grace port count If your port count exceeds your license the following messages display in the topology e Displays a water mark with the text License Exceeded See Help gt License for details if the discovered port count exceeds your license but is within the grace period ran
417. want to configure Enterprise Fabric Mode The fabric s current status displays in the Enterprise Fabric Mode field 4 To activate Enterprise Fabric Mode on the selected fabric click the Activate button NOTE You must be managing the fabric to set this option 5 To deactivate Enterprise Fabric Mode on the selected fabric click the Deactivate button NOTE You must be managing the fabric to set this option EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 175 5 Configuring Fabric Binding Configuring Fabric Binding 176 NOTE Fabric Binding is only supported on B model FOS level 6 0 or higher and M model manageable switches and fabrics Fabric Binding in Interop Mode 3 is only supported on FOS level 6 1 or higher For a list of manageable devices refer to Table 22 Product Icons on page 243 NOTE To enable or disable Fabric Binding in a mixed fabric at least one B model device and one M model device must be manageable NOTE You cannot disable Fabric Binding if Enterprise Fabric Mode is enabled However if Enterprise Fabric Mode is disabled you can disable Fabric Binding The fabric binding feature enables you to configure whether switches can merge with a selected fabric This provides security from accidental fabric merges and potential fabric disruption when fabrics become segmented because they cannot merge NOTE When performing fabric binding in an edge fabric with extended discovery disabled on all de
418. within the Switches or Directors that you purchase License Keys License keys allow you to access the features that you purchase with the SAN Management application software package Depending on the software package you purchase you may have any of the features in the following table TABLE 10 EFCM Software Features Features Standard Edition Enterprise Edition Advanced SAN Routing x xe Advanced Module x Event Management Group Configuration Performance Security Backup X X Advanced Call Home Windows and Solaris only X X Planning X Basic SAN Routing X X View Management X X Virtual Fabrics X X Zoning X X Optional module Note the following items regarding the SAN Management software application for this release e In the License dialog box the Adv Module Licensed Ports field indicates the number of ports for which you have licenses for the optional software modules e The number of ports in the licensed optional software modules must be equal to or greater than the number of currently discovered ports e All of the software modules that are port based must have the same number of ports activated For example if you have 128 ports for Performance and want to add the Event Management module you must purchase 128 ports for Event Management e The serial number cannot be changed without reinstalling the software 8 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 EFC Manager Software
419. ws the client to communicate from both IPv4 and IPv6 NOTE The server binds using IPv6 address by default if your Operating System is IPv6 enabled dual mode or IPv6 only Server binds using IPv4 address by default if your Operating System is IPv4 enabled Servers running in dual mode allow the client to communicate from both IPv6 and IPv4 addresses 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select IP Configuration to set the IP address and subnet mask In the Server IP Configuration list choose from one of the following options e Select Automatic Go to step 5 e Select Manual Continue with step 4 4 Inthe Return Address area choose from one of the following options e If your operating system has IPv4 only complete the following steps a Inthe Subnet Mask field enter the subnet mask address for the server b Inthe Return Address field enter the return address for the server Continue with step 5 e If your operating system has IPv6 only complete the following steps a Inthe IPv6 Address field enter the subnet mask address for the server b Inthe Prefix Length field enter the prefix length Continue with step 5 e If your operating system has IPv4 and IPv6 select one of the following options If your operating system has IPv4 select the IPv4 Address option and complete the following steps a Inthe IPv4 Address field enter the return address for the server b In th
420. xample opt EFCM97 and click Next NOTE Do not select the installation folder for the previous version 4 On the Pre Installation Summary screen review your installation settings and click Install On the Installation Complete screen make sure the Launch EFCM Configuration check box is selected default and click Done The Configuration screen displays 6 On the Welcome screen click Next On the License screen read the agreement select Yes and click Next 8 On the Copy Data and Settings screen click No and then click Next NOTE To migrate data from a previous version refer to the EFCM Upgrade Instructions 9 On the EFCM 9 7 Server Name screen enter a name for the Server and click Next 10 On the EFCM 9 7 Server License screen enter the serial number on the CD jewel case and license key on the Key Certificate and click Next The License Key field is not case sensitive 11 On the EFCM 9 7 Server License Summary screen review to make sure you have the correct configuration and license and click Finish The EFCM 9 7 Log In dialog box displays 12 In the User ID and Password fields enter your user ID and password 13 Click Login 14 Click OK on the EFCM Login Banner screen For the latest information about this release refer to the software release notes Go to the http www brocade com support resources website and follow the instructions to access the Brocade EFCM 9 7 Release Notes EFC Manager Software User Man
421. y as well as for product management of the suite of Brocade products NOTE If the default ports defined are not available the associated feature becomes unavailable TABLE 1 EFCM Server Ports Used by Other Applications Including EFCM client UDP Product Port TCP Feature Client Server Management Editable 51513 TCP ECCAPI YES 51512 TCP CLI Proxy from client to managed product YES 51511 TCP RMI registry YES YES 51510 TCP RMI calls from EFCM client YES YES 4033 UDP Peer manager 1024 UDP SNMP traps from Mi10K director YES 162 UDP SNMP traps can be forwarded or create events YES YES 80 TCP Client download You can edit the following default port numbers However some changes require coordinated changes on the managed products To edit the ECCAPI port number 51513 refer to Configuring the ECCAPI Port Number on page 239 To edit the CLI Proxy from client to managed product port number 51512 refer to Configuring the CLI Proxy Listening Port Number on page 239 To edit the RMI registry port number 51511 refer to Configuring Server Connection Settings on page 88 To edit the RMI calls from the EFCM Client port number 51510 refer to Configuring Server Connection Settings on page 88 To edit the SNMP traps port number 162 refer to Configuring SNMP Trap Listening Settings on page 88 2 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Overview 1 TABLE 2
422. yer that describes the physical link between two ports including the transmission media transmitter and receiver circuitry and interfaces D This consists of a pair of either optical fiber or electrical cables link media along with transceiver circuitry which work together to convert a stream of bits at one end of the link to a stream of bits at the other end FC 1 Middle layer of the Fibre Channel physical and signaling interface FC PH standard defining the 8B 10B encoding decoding and transmission protocol FC 2 The Fibre Channel layer that specifies the signaling protocol rules and mechanisms required to transfer data blocks The FC 2 layer is very complex and provides different classes of service packetization sequencing error detection segmentation and reassembly of transmitted data D FC 3 The Fibre Channel layer that provides a set of services common across multiple node ports N_Ports of a Fibre Channel node The services are not commonly used and are essentially reserved for Fibre Channel architecture expansion D FC 4 The Fibre Channel layer that provides mapping of Fibre Channel capabilities to upper level protocols ULP including Internet protocol IP and small computer system interface SCSI D FCA See Fibre Channel Association FC AL See Fibre Channel arbitrated loop FC adapter Fibre Channel adapter See host bus adapter FCC Federal Communications Commission FCC IOC See Fi
423. you do not want to migrate data from the previous version of the SAN Management application To migrate data from a previous version refer to the EFCM Upgrade Instructions 1 Oe OW oe 00 gt EN 10 11 Select Start gt Program Files gt EFCM 9 7 gt EFCM 9 7 or double click the desktop icon The first time you start the application a configuration screen displays if you did not complete configuration during installation If this is not the first time you start the application go to step 9 On the Welcome screen click Next On the License screen read the agreement select Yes and click Next On the Copy Data and Settings screen click No and then click Next On the EFCM 9 7 Server Name screen enter a name for the Server and click Next On the EFCM 9 7 Server License screen enter the serial number on the CD jewel case and license key on the Key Certificate and click Next The License Key field is not case sensitive On the EFCM 9 7 Server License Summary screen click Finish A message displays that states configuration is about the start the server make sure that the Administrative Tools Services window is closed or the server may not start Click OK to close the message On the EFCM 9 7 Log In dialog box enter your user ID and password and click Login Click OK on the EFCM Login Banner Review the Software Release Notes document Set up the application to discover a SAN using the instructions in
424. you set nicknames to be unique and there are duplicate nicknames in the system To edit duplicate nicknames complete the following steps 1 Select SAN gt Options The Options dialog box displays In the Category list select Nicknames Select Set nicknames to be unique to require that nicknames be unique on your system Click OK on the Options dialog box The Duplicated Nicknames dialog displays 5 Select one of the following options e If you select Append Incremental numbers for all repetitive nicknames the nicknames are edited automatically using incremental numbering e If you select will fix them myself edit the nickname in the Nickname field 6 Click Apply or OK to save your work 82 EFC Manager Software User Manual 53 1000663 03 Configuration Options Configuring Reset Display Settings You can reset your system to display the following EFCM classic display settings TABLE 17 EFCM Classic Display Settings Settings Default State Show port Disabled Show connected end device Disabled Map Layout Set to default for Groups Line Types Set to default for Groups Port Display Set to Attached Ports only Product Flyover Map Flyovers Set to include the only following properties Nick name Name WWN IP Address and Domain ID Set to include the following properties Nickname IP Address WWN Port Number Hex Port Address and Port WWN Master Log Events Set to hide Extended Events

SAN Management Software User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents